NMSU Carlsbad Campus IT Renovation, Emergency Back up...

NMSU Carlsbad Campus

IT Renovation, Emergency Back up

Generator and Boiler Replacement (AIM #2779)

NMSU Facilities and Services Department

P.O. Box 30001

Las Cruces, NM 88003-8001

Technical Specifications Manual March 18, 2016

100% CD Review submittal

1065 S. Main St., Bldg. D, Ste. A

Las Cruces, New Mexico 88005

(575) 647-1554

NA-1

NAMES AND ADDRESSES PROJECT ADDRESS: NMSU CARLSBAD 1500 University Drive Carlsbad, New Mexico, 88220 ARCHITECT: NINE DEGREES ARCHITECTURE + DESIGN, INC. 101 MAGUEY CT., SUITE 2 SUNLAND PARK, NEW MEXICO 88063 P. 915-526-8739 F. 915-533-3282 MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, AND PLUMBING: RBM ENGINEERING INC. 1065 S MAIN STREET, SUITE A LAS CRUCES, NEW MEXICO 88005 P (575) 647-1554

NMSU CARLSBAD - IT RENOVATION EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND BOILER REPLACEMENT (AIM #2779)

NEW MEXICO STATE UNIVERSITY Carlsbad, NM

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

Section 010000– General Requirements Section 011000 – Summary Section 012300 – Alternates Section 012500 – Substitution Procedures Section 012600 – Contract Modification Procedures Section 012900 – Payment Procedures Section 013100 – Project Management and Coordination Section 013200 – Construction Progress Documentation Section 013300 – Submittal Procedures Section 014000 – Quality Requirements Section 014200 – References Section 015000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 016000 – Product Requirements Section 017300 – Execution Section 017700 – Closeout Procedures Section 017823 – Operation and Maintenance Data Section 017839 – Project Record Documents

DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

Section 024119 – Selective Demolition

DIVISION 7 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

Section 072100 – Thermal Insulation Section 079200 – Joint Sealant

DIVISION 8 – HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

Section 081113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 084113 – Flush Wood Doors Section 084113 – Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Store Fronts Section 088000 – Glazing

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES

Section 092216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing Section 092900 – Gypsum Board Section 095000 – Acoustical Ceiling Section 096513 – Resilient Base and Accessories Section 096519 – Resilient Tile Flooring Section 096813 – Modular Carpet Tile Section 096900 – Access Flooring Section 099123 – Interior Painting

DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 212200 – Clean Agent Fire Suppression System DIVISION 22, 23 HVAC AND PLUMBING Section 220500 – Basic Mechanical Requirements Section 220516 – Piping Expansion Compensation Section 220519 – Gages and Meters Section 220529 – Supports and Anchors Section 220553 – Mechanical Identification Section 220700 – Piping Insulation Section 221000 – Plumbing Piping Section 221010 – Plumbing Specialties Section 230593 – Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Section 230700 – Ductwork Insulation Section 230716 – Equipment Insulation Section 230900 – Automatic Temperature Control Section 232113 – Hydronic Piping Section 232114 – Hydronic Specialties Section 232123 – HVAC Pumps Section 232500 – Chemical Water Treatment Section 233113 – Ductwork Section 233300 – Ductwork Accessories Section 233423 – Exhaust Fans Section 233700 – Air Outlets and Inlets Section 235216 – High Efficiency Condensing Boilers Section 236010 – Refrigerant Piping Section 238123 – Computer Room Air Conditioning Unit DIVISION 26, 27 – ELECTRICAL Section 260000 – Electrical General Provisions Section 260503 – Equipment Wiring System Section 260508 – Electrical Connections for Equipment Section 260519 – Wires and Cables Section 260526 – Grounding Section 260529 – Supporting Devices Section 260530 – Electrical Boxes and Fittings Section 260535 – Raceways Section 260553 – Electrical Identification Section 262416 – Panelboards Section 262419 – Motor & Circuit Disconnects Section 262716 – Cabinets & Enclosures Section 262726 – Wiring Devices Section 262826 – Emergency/ Standby Power Section 263553 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Section 265100 – Interior Lighting Fixtures Section 265400 – Lighting Controls Section 270000 – Communication Systems

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

T O C Page 2 of 2


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 010000 - 1

SECTION 010000 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

A. The owner has the following requirements for the contractor during the proposed construction:

1. Contractor will be responsible for the development of a complete project schedule that illustrates all of the construction sequences required to complete the project. Contractor will update the owners on a timely and regular basis to insure that the project will be completed as plan.

2. The work will be performed in a dust free environment throughout the construction period. Contractor shall maintain all areas clean on a daily basis.

3. Contractor will be responsible to manage all workers to insure that no damage occurs to all existing I.T. equipment, AV ceiling projectors, walls, floors and ceilings during the performance of the work required to fulfill this contract. Any damage to the existing building will be corrected at contractor’s cost.

4. Actual construction on the IT, Emergency Generator and Boiler systems shall not commence until the contractor’s design shop drawing submittal is reviewed and approved by the Architect, Engineer, NMSU Manager and NMSU Carlsbad Facilities Mangers.

7. Existing conditions walk-thru shall be executed of each space within the work areas prior

and after work is executed. This activity will establish Contractor’s responsibility as to condition of each space and any damage that may need to be attended by all applicable parties and stakeholders.

8. The contractor shall be responsible for repairing, replacing and/or restoring existing

ceiling, wall and floor finishes disturbed as part of the installation/execution of IT renovation, emergency generator and boiler replacement work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 010000


SUMMARY 011000 - 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. Type of the Contract. 3. Use of premises. 4. Owner's occupancy requirements. 5. Work restrictions. 6. Specification formats and conventions.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section – 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls for limitations and

procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: NMSU IT Renovation, Emergency Generator and Boiler Room Replacement.

1. Project Location: Carlsbad New Mexico

B. Owner: New Mexico State University

1. Owner's Representative: Heidi M. Frohnapfel, AIA, LEED AP, Project Manager

Facilities and Services Department

C. Architect: NINE DEGREES Architecture + Design, Inc.

D. Contractor: _________________________________________ has been engaged as Contractor for this Project.

E. Project Manager: Heidi M. Frohnapfel, AIA, LEED AP


SUMMARY 011000 - 2

F. The Work consists of the following:

1. The Work includes Computer Building IT Department Office and Server Area improvements, Emergency Generator installation and Boiler equipment replacement.

1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT

A. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations, including use of Project site, during construction period. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to exterior of building and roof. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy of Project site and use by the public. 2. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and

available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of

materials and equipment on-site.

C. Use of Existing Building: Maintain existing building in a weathertight condition throughout system installation activities. Repair damage caused by construction operations. Protect building and its occupants during all IT improvements, Emergency Generator installation and Boiler equipment replacement activities.

1. Maintain existing building clean and dust free during all construction activities. General Contractor shall be responsible to maintain a clean working environment that will not impact the day to day use of the building by the owner and its users. All flooring surfaces and finishes to be protected as such that no damage is experienced.

1.6 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.


SUMMARY 011000 - 3

2. Provide not less than 72 hours' notice to Owner of activities that will affect Owner's operations.

3. Provide the necessary wayfinding and signage throughout the project to insure that the owner's occupants and owner's day to day operations are not impacted or interfered.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. On-Site Work Hours: Work shall be generally performed inside the existing building during normal business working hours of 6 a.m. to 6 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless otherwise indicated in accordance to the proposed project schedule.

1. Weekend Hours: 7 a.m. to 7 p.m. 2. Hours for Utility Shutdowns: coordinate with Owner.

B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect and Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.

2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.

C. Project Schedule: Contractor to provide a work schedule for the completion of the project that is in compliance with the owner’s use of the building. The project schedule should reflect the work zones and phasing needed to complete the project without significant interference with the operations of the owner.

1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 50-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system.

1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents.

2. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural, and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.


SUMMARY 011000 - 4

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.9 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


NMSU CARLSBAD - IT RENOVATION EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND BOILER

REPLACEMENT (AIM #2779)

ALTERNATES 012300 - 1

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined

in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if

Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be

completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described

in the Contract Documents.

1. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract

Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the

Contract Sum.

1.4 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate

work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar

items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part

of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in

writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or

deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to

alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A Schedule of Alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification

Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the

work described under each alternate.

NMSU CARLSBAD - IT RENOVATION EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND BOILER

REPLACEMENT (AIM #2779)

ALTERNATES 012300 - 2


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. One (1): Installation of a new 5 ton computer room ceiling mounted air

conditioning system and humidification control system. To include new outdoor air cooled

condensing unit and related controls, electrical and plumbing connections.

B. Alternate No. Two (2): Installation of new secondary heating pumps in the main mechanical

room. Installation shall be two new base mounted end suction pumps in place of the old pumps

on existing inertia pads. Related piping revisions, piping specialties and electrical connections.

C. Alternate No. Three (3): Installation of a 2 ½” computer raised floor access system in the

server and IT office spaces, refer to plan for location and limits of construction.

D. Alternate No. Three A (3A): Installation of a 2’-0” x 2’-0” Carpet Tile over the raised floor.

Carpet to match the raised floor module



SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 016000 - Product Requirements for requirements for submitting comparable

product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.



c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from International Building Code 2009. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed

substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within fifteen days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.



1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than fifteen days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided.

c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution

has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.




CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 016000 Product Requirements for administrative procedures for

handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within time specified in Proposal Request after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.



d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.







PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 012600 Contract Modification Procedures for administrative

procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 2. Division 01 Section – 013200 Construction Progress Documentation for administrative

requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.



1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets. 3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the

following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value.

1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.

5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If specified, include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing.

7. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

9. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

10. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.



1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the Twenty Fifth day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

D. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

E. (not used)

F. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

G. Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. Owner’s and Architect’s copy shall include waivers of lien from all subcontractors and suppliers paid in previous Application for Payment and other required attachments.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

H. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to

Owner.



I. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit

waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity

involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

J. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Products list. 5. Schedule of unit prices. 6. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 7. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 8. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 9. Copies of building permits. 10. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 11. Initial progress report. 12. Report of preconstruction conference. 13. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 14. Performance and payment bonds. 15. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. 16. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

K. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

L. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.



2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of

date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination Drawings. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Project meetings. 4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility will be assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 013200 Construction Progress Documentation for preparing and

submitting Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Division 01 Section – 017300 Execution for procedures for coordinating general

installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Division 01 Section – 017700 Closeout Procedures for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work.



Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to

ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

10. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:



a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate required installation sequences. c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of

dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit Three opaque copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy.

a. Submit five copies where Coordination Drawings are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.

4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those Sections.

B. Key Personnel Names: Within Seven days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to Project superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.

1. Include special personnel required for coordination of operations with other contractors.

1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.



3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within two days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than five days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of Record Documents. l. Use of the premises. m. Work restrictions. n. Owner's occupancy requirements. o. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. p. Construction waste management and recycling. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. First aid. u. Security. v. Progress cleaning. w. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:



a. The Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to



do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who

should have been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at necessary intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of



schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting.

c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Change Orders.

3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.

1.8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect . 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.



9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.

10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: CSI Form 13.2A.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above.

1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.

E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow two working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within five days of receipt of the RFI response.

F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within three days if Contractor disagrees with response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use CSI Log Form 13.2B., Include the following:

1. Project name.



2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.





CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Preliminary Construction Schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Submittals Schedule. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Field condition reports. 7. Special reports.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 012900 Payment Procedures for submitting the Schedule of

Values. 2. Division 01 Section – 013100 Project Management and Coordination for submitting and

distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 01 Section -"Photographic Documentation" for submitting construction

photographs. 4. Division 01 Section – 013300 Submittal Procedures for submitting schedules and reports. 5. Division 01 Section – 014000 Quality Requirements for submitting a schedule of tests

and inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.



B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum, unless otherwise approved by Architect.

C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity.

3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

G. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

H. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

I. Milestone: A key or critical point in time for reference or measurement.

J. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.

K. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

B. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.



C. Preliminary Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies.

1. Approval of cost-loaded preliminary construction schedule will not constitute approval of Schedule of Values for cost-loaded activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit an electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, on CD-R, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (Initial or Updated) and date on label.

E. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.

F. Special Reports: Submit two copies at time of unusual event.


A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the Preliminary Construction Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Procedures: Comply with procedures contained in AGC's "Construction Planning & Scheduling."

B. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion in accordance to the phasing schedule for the project.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

C. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

a. Insert list of major items or pieces of equipment.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.



4. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final CompletionFirst paragraph below establishes progress measured in dollar volume of the Work.

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

F. Computer Software: Prepare schedules using a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

G. Owner’s preferred scheduling method: It is the Owner’s preference, given the particulars of this project, to utilize a Gantt Chart Schedule. Please refer to section 2.4.

2.3 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit preliminary horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within five days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first thirty days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.4 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within ten days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in ten percent increments within time bar.

2.5 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site.



3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial Completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation on CSI Form 13.2A. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.6 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.



B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Division 01 Section – 012900 Payment Procedures for submitting Applications for Payment and the Schedule of Values.

2. Division 01 Section – 013100 Project Management and Coordination for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.

3. Division 01 Section – 013200 Construction Progress Documentation for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

4. Division 01 Section – 014000 Quality Requirements for submitting test and inspection reports.

5. Division 01 Section – 017700 Closeout Procedures for submitting warranties. 6. Division 01 Section – 017839 Project Record Documents for submitting Record

Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 7. Division 01 Section – 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data for submitting operation

and maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.



1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 7 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 7 days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record

Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals



shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

F. Deviations: Highlight or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810. 2. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. j. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record. l. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter.

3. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related submittal.

I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal.



2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.

3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Reviewed” or “Reviewed As Noted”.

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Reviewed” or “Reviewed As Noted” taken by Architect.

1.5 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES

A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:

1. Contractor shall be fully responsible for the use of the files and will hold the Architect completely harmless for any information contained in those files. Contractor is strongly encouraged to field verify all information contained in the files.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for Project.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with specified referenced standards.



l. Testing by recognized testing agency. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed

wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 11 inches by 17 inches ,but no larger than 30 by 40 inhes.

3. Number of Copies: Submit two opaque (bond) copies of each submittal. Architect will return one copy.

4. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit five copies where copies are required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Drawing.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:



a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets; remainder will be returned

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product. 2. Number and name of room or space. 3. Location within room or space. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will return two copies.



a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

F. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.

G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Use CSI Form 1.5A. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.

Architect will return two copies.

a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

K. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs) for LEED Certification: Submit information necessary to show compliance with LEED certification requirements, which will be the limit of the Architect's review.

1. Architect will not review non-LEED submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."



C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."



N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.



U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

V. Construction: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section " Photographic Documentation" If applicable.

W. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect, as required in "Action Submittals" Article.

1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire submittal for resubmittal.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.



3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows:

1. “Reviewed”, “Reviewed as noted”, “Revise and Resubmit”, “Rejected”.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.



QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 013200 Construction Progress Documentation for developing a

schedule of required tests and inspections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where



indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.

G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as



appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.



B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing the Work.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.



d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect .

2. Notify Architect five days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow five days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 49.

1.7 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.



1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.



6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.

7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 15 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect,testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency and/ or special inspector to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency and/ or special inspector as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACCEPTABLE TESTING AGENCIES

A. CQC Testing, El Paso, Texas.



3.2 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



REFERENCES 014200 - 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.



B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

D. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253 Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080 Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800 www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dps.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925 www.gsa.gov Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800 www.nibs.org FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)



MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-6257 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080 www.access-board.gov

1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960 www.aluminum.org AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333 www.aaadm.com AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202 www.aabchq.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and (202) 624-5800 Transportation Officials www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888 www.airbarrier.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155 www.abma-dc.org



ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700 (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118 www.agc.org AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837 www.aia.org (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800) 644-2400 www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303) 792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700 www.alsc.org AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org



AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (505) 522-1437 www.aosaseed.com APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800 www.ari.org ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723 www.asce.org (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and (800) 527-4723 Air-Conditioning Engineers (404) 636-8400 www.ashrae.org ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.astm.org AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300 (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) www.awci.org AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (800) 449-8811 www.awinet.org (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (334) 874-9800 www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353



www.aws.org (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337 www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010 www.bia.org BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772 www.bissc.org CCC Carpet Cushion Council (203) 637-1312 www.carpetcushion.org CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282 www.copper.org (212) 251-7200 CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263 www.canelect.ca CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700 www.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association (630) 584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583 www.chainlinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604 www.pbmdf.com



CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772 www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846 www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200 www.crsi.org CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272 (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000 www.csa-international.org CSI Cast Stone Institute (770) 972-3011 www.caststone.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900 www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010 www.dhi.org EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500 www.eia.org EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462 www.eima.com (770) 968-7945 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000 www.ejdc.org EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937 www.esda.org FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur 41 22 545 00 00 (The International Basketball Federation) www.fiba.com FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35 (The International Volleyball Federation)



www.fivb.ch FMG FM Global (401) 275-3000 (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FMG) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors (407) 671-3772 Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0 www.fsc.org GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440 www.geosynthetic-institute.org HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744 www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700 HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200 www.gamanet.org HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International)



IBF International Badminton Federation (6-03) 9283-7155 www.intbadfed.org ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369 www.icea.net ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900 www.ieee.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000 www.iesna.org IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561 www.iest.org IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.igcc.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510 www.igmaonline.org ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426 www.iliai.com ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11 www.iso.ch Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020 www.ansi.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732 www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek (800) 345-3851 www.intertek.com (713) 407-3500 ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)



LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864 www.lightning.org (804) 314-8955 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333 www.mbma.com MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138 www.maplefloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association (312) 644-6610 www.metalframingmfg.org MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815 www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937 www.paintinfo.com MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and (703) 281-6613 Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926 www.nadca.com NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193,

ext. 453 www.aahperd.org/nagws/ NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848 www.nbgqa.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222 www.ncaa.org



NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900 www.ncma.org NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094 www.ncpi.org NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550 www.ncta.com NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698 www.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110 www.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382 www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900 www.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776 www.nfrc.org NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642 www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318 www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016 (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) www.nofma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545 www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622



www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400 NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010 www.nsf.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415 www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736 www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Acquired by ITS - Intertek) (800) 966-5253 www.opl.com (210) 635-8100 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300 www.pci.org PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322 www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956 www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720 PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929 http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522 (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) (703) 736-9666 www.landcarenetwork.org PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540 www.post-tensioning.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections (800) 644-2400 www.boltcouncil.org (312) 670-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339 www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662 RTI (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association)



(Now TRI) SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323 www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647 www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424 www.sefalabs.com SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234 www.sgcc.org SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075 www.siaonline.org SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991 www.smacentral.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980 National Association www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154 (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026 www.spri.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355 www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772



www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265 www.steeltank.com SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974 www.swrionline.org TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453 www.tileusa.com TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic (703) 907-7700 Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (847) 649-5555 www.turfgrasssod.org TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177 (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute) www.tileroofing.org UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488 www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869 www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486 www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651



WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636 (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers (212) 297-2109 Association) www.windowcoverings.org WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301 (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and (847) 299-5200 Door Association) www.wdma.com WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of (916) 372-9943 California) www.wicnet.org WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889 www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591 WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930 www.wwpa.org

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-

4100 www.iapmo.org ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES) ICC International Code Council (888) 422-

7233 www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-



4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-

6587 www.icc-es.org (562) 699-

0543 SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (See ICC)





TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Division 01 Section – 011000 Summary for limitations on utility interruptions and other work restrictions.

2. Division 01 Section – 013300 Submittal Procedures for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

3. Division 01 Section – 017300 Execution for progress cleaning requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 USE CHARGES

A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to,Architect,testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.

C. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

E. Sewer, Water, and Electric Power Service: Use charges are specified in Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary."



F. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

G. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pavement: N/A.

B. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch , 0.148-inch thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails.

C. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch , 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails. Provide concrete or galvanized steel bases for supporting posts.

D. Wood Enclosure Fence: N/A.

E. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry, Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry"



F. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.

G. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

H. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

1. Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

2. Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with not less than 1 receptacle on each wall. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack board.

3. Drinking water and private toilet. 4. Coffee machine and supplies. 5. Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68

to 72 deg F. 6. Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

C. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

1. Store combustible materials apart and away from building.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.



3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services or reconnection of existing mechanical units.

B. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

1. Connect temporary sewers to as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction.

D. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

1. Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

1. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

F. Heating and Cooling (as required): Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

G. Ventilation and Humidity Control (as required): Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

H. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.

I. Electric Power Service (If required): Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics required for construction operations.

1. Install electric power service overhead or underground, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.



J. Lighting (If required): Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

2. Install lighting for Project identification sign.

K. Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by all construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following:

a. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer in each field office.

2. At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office. g. Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.

3. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from field office.

L. Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities.

1. Provide internet service in primary field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.



D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs as directed by Owner (If required). Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

E. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

F. Existing Access Hatch Usage: Use of Owner's existing access hatch will not be permitted.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Site Enclosure Fence: Before contract operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations.

2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel.

C. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

D. Covered Walkway: Erect structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals along adjacent public street(s). Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing to protect all existing building entrances and exits.

2. Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage.

3. Extend back wall beyond the structure to complete enclosure fence. 4. Paint and maintain in a manner approved by Owner and Architect.

E. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.



1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar

sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel

at Project site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

4. Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose size with outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.

D. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."



PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 014200 References for applicable industry standards for products

specified. 2. Division 01 Section – 017700 Closeout Procedures for submitting warranties for Contract

closeout. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products

and installations specified to be warranted.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facilityProducts salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service



performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product.

1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.

2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:

a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery

date.

3. Initial Submittal: Within 10 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period.

4. Completed List: Within 20 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements.

5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 10 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,

as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.



b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test

results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for

Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in

the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently

become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractorof acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed

substitution within time allocated.

C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."



b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.

2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and

equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.



1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish "salient characteristics" of products.

7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.



B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.



2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 20 days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having

jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. 10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.






EXECUTION 017300 - 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Progress cleaning. 2. Protection of installed construction. 3. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section – 013100 Project Management and Coordination for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

2. Division 01 Section – 013300 Submittal Procedures for submitting surveys. 3. Division 01 Section – 017700 Closeout Procedures for submitting final property survey

with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept waste disposal.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.



B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. 3. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Submit requests on CSI Form 13.2A, "Request for Interpretation."

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

B. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance.

C. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

D. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.



E. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.4 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.5 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation.

B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

3.6 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.



3.7 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.



CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 017300 Execution for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Division 01 Section – 017839 Project Record Documents for submitting Record

Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Division 01 Section – 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and

maintenance manual requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements

for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.



8. Complete startup testing of systems. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems as applicable.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction



including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.

1. Organize list of areas in sequential order 2. Organize items applying to each area by major element. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,

free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Remove labels that are not permanent. i. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

j. Leave Project clean and ready.

C. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Maintenance documentation directory. 2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of Roofing and associated systems.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 013300 Submittal Procedures for submitting copies of submittals

for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Division 01 Section – 017700 Closeout Procedures for submitting operation and

maintenance manuals. 3. Division 01 Section – 017839 Project Record Documents for preparing Record Drawings

for operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual

requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Initial Submittal: Submit two draft copies of each manual at least 15 days before requesting inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit three copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.



1.5 COORDINATION

A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information furnished by representatives and prepare manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal.



5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.



B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section – 017700 Closeout Procedures for general closeout procedures. 2. Division 01 Section – 017839 Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and

maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record

Documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of corrected Record Transparencies and one set of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each transparency and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return transparencies and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.

b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints, one set of Record Transparencies, and three copies printed from Record Transparencies. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.



1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup

before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.



2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and



in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.



SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

2. Demolition and removal of existing fire alarm system


1. Division 01 Section – 011000 Summary for use of premises, schedule, project phasing and Owner-occupancy requirements.

2. Division 01 Section – 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls for temporary construction and environmental-protection measures for selective demolition operations.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site, unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare them for reuse, and reinstall them where indicated.

C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.


A. Not Used




A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb;

immediately notify Architect and Owner. Owner will remove hazardous materials under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. This requirement is applicable to the roofing system and the aluminum composite panels, among others.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities, conduits, and pipes have been disconnected and capped.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and reinstalled and items to be removed and salvaged.



D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

E. Engage a professional engineer to survey condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective demolition operations.

F. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs and drawings.

1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic Documentation."

G. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition activities.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."

B. Service/System Requirements: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, before

proceeding with selective demolition provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing.

a. Where entire wall is to be removed, existing services/systems may be removed with removal of the wall.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."



B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building.

2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas.

3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations.

4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling

specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls."

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level.

2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

4. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

5. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. 6. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and

promptly dispose of off-site. 7. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid

free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation. 8. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to

impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 9. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly]



B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area as designated by Owner 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. Paint equipment to match new equipment.

2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new

materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Cut concrete to a depth of at least 3/4 inch at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete indicated for selective demolition. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that

will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.



3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


Building “A” Main Building Fire Sprinkler and Fire Alarm System

JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Sound attenuation insulation.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for installation in metal-framed assemblies of

insulation specified by referencing this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Insulation composed of rock-wool fibers, slag-wool fibers, or glass fibers; produced in boards and blanket with latter formed into batts (flat-cut lengths) or rolls.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Plenum Rating: Provide glass-fiber insulation where indicated in above ceiling areas regardless of plenum presence whose test performance is rated as follows for use in plenums as determined by testing identical products per "Erosion Test" and "Mold Growth and Humidity Test" described in UL 181, or on comparable tests from another standard acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Erosion Test Results: Insulation shows no visible evidence of cracking, flaking, peeling, or delamination of interior surface of duct assembly, after testing for 4 hours at 2500-fpm (13-m/s) air velocity.

2. Mold Growth and Humidity Test Results: Insulation shows no evidence of mold growth, delamination, or other deterioration due to the effects of high humidity, after inoculation with Chaetomium globosium on all surfaces and storing for 60 days at 100 percent relative humidity in the dark.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.



B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency for insulation products.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. 2. Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119. 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION

A. [Available ]Manufacturers:

1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Guardian Fiberglass, Inc.



3. Johns Manville. 4. Knauf Fiber Glass. 5. Owens Corning.

B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

C. Where glass-fiber blanket insulation is indicated by the following thicknesses, provide blankets in batt or roll form with thermal resistances indicated: 1. 3-5/8 inches (92 mm) thick with a thermal resistance of 11 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu at 75

deg F (1.9 K x sq. m/W at 24 deg C).

2.3 INSULATION FASTENERS

A. Adhesively Attached, Spindle-Type Anchors: Plate welded to projecting spindle; capable of holding insulation of thickness indicated securely in position indicated with self-locking washer in place; and complying with the following requirements:

1. [Available ]Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; Series T TACTOO Insul-Hangers. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type N Fasteners. c. Gemco; Spindle Type.

2. Plate: Perforated galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch (0.762 mm) thick by 2 inches (50 mm) square.

3. Spindle: Copper-coated, low carbon steel; fully annealed; 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) in diameter; length to suit depth of insulation indicated. a.

B. Anchor Adhesive: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation, fasteners, and substrates.

1. [Available ]Products:

a. AGM Industries, Inc.; TACTOO Adhesive. b. Eckel Industries of Canada; Stic-Klip Type S Adhesive. c. Gemco; Tuff Bond Hanger Adhesive.

C. Double banding support system.

1. ¾” wide, white color, polyester as manufactured by Ultra-Grid.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice, rain, and snow.

C. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.

E. For preformed insulating units, provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Install glass-fiber insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.



2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures. 4. Install eave ventilation troughs between roof framing members in insulated attic spaces at

vented eaves. 5. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm),

support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs.

6. For wood-framed construction, install glass-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:

a. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members.

b. With faced blankets having stapling flanges, lap blanket flange over flange of adjacent blanket to maintain continuity of vapor retarder once finish material is installed over it.

c. Provide double banding support system at all insulation installed at underside of roof deck. Insulation in this application shall be polypropylene faced.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION

A. Install [3-inch- (76-mm-)] thick, faced [glass] fiber blanket insulation over suspended ceilings at partitions in a width that extends insulation 48 inches (1219 mm) on either side of partition.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.




SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the applications indicated in the Joint-Sealant Schedule at the end of Part 3.

1. Exterior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

2. Interior joints in the following vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces: a. Tile control and expansion joints. b. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of walls and partitions. c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors,

windows, and elevator entrances. d. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

3. Interior joints in the following horizontal traffic surfaces: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section – 092900 Gypsum Board for sealing perimeter joints of gypsum

board partitions to reduce sound transmission. 2. Division 09 Section – 095000 Acoustical Panel Ceilings for sealing edge moldings at

perimeters of acoustical ceilings.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

B. Provide joint sealants for interior applications that establish and maintain airtight and water-resistant continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.



B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, signed by product manufacturer.

D. SWRI Validation Certificate: For each elastomeric sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

E. Qualification Data: Installer must have been in business a minimum of 10 consecutive years and have a successful record of prior performance. Installer shall provide proof of SWRI Institute Applicator Training.

F. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

G. Field Test Report Log: For each elastomeric sealant application.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized Installer who is approved or licensed for installation of elastomeric sealants required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows:

1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:

a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated. b. Each type of non-elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.

3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.

4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.

a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193.



1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.

Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint

substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which elastomeric sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this Article exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.



4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

C. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS

A. Elastomeric Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

B. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where elastomeric sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

C. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C 920 for Class 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Single-Component Non-Sag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-1:

1. Available Products: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795 (if left unpainted). b. Multi-component, non-sag, urethane sealant; Sika Corporation, Inc,

Sikaflex-2c or Sonneborn , NP2 (if surface is to be painted).



2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (non-sag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (non-traffic).

E. Single-Component Mildew-Resistant Acid-Curing Silicone Sealant ES-2:

1. Available Products:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.

2. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (non-sag). 3. Class: 25. 4. Use Related to Exposure: NT (non-traffic).

F. Multi-component Non-sag Urethane Sealant ES-2:

1. Available Products: a. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c NS TG. b. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; NP 2.

2. Type and Grade: M (multi-component) and NS (non-sag). 3. Class: [50]. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic) and NT (non-traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: Exterior concrete.

G. Multi-component Non-sag Urethane Sealant ES-3:

1. Available Products: a. Pecora Corporation, Dyantrol II-NS b. Sika Corporation, Inc., Sikaflex-2c NS c. Sonneborn Division of Chemrex Inc.; NP2

2. Type and Grade: M (multi-component) and NS (non-sag). 3. Class: [50]. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: NT (non-traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

H. Multi-component Pourable Urethane Sealant ES-4:


a. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II-SG. b. Sika Corporation, Inc.; Sikaflex - 2c SL. c. Sonneborn, Division of ChemRex Inc.; SL 2.

2. Type and Grade: M (multi-component) and P (pourable, self-leveling). 3. Class: 50.



4. Uses Related to Exposure: T (traffic). 5. Uses Related to Joint Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to joint substrates

indicated, O.

a. Use O Joint Substrates: marble, ceramic tile and exterior concrete.

2.4 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints AS-1: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following:

1. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.


a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), B (bicellular material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

a. Concrete. b. Masonry. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.



3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

D. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and

replace them with dry materials.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise

indicated. 4. Provide flush joint configuration where indicated per Figure 5B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 5C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows:



a. Perform 5 tests for the first 250 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 100 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, Method B, Exposed Surface Finish Hand Pull Tab, Method C, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Flap or as appropriate for type of joint-sealant application indicated.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; do this by extending cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field-adhesion-test log.

4. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

b. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. c. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.

5. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

6. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.



3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.7 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application JS-[1]: Exterior horizontal [nontraffic] [and] [traffic] [isolation] [and] [contraction] joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.

1. Joint Sealant: [Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant] [Multicomponent pourable urethane sealant] [ES-<#2> or ES-<#4>].

2. Joint-Sealant Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

B. Joint-Sealant Application JS-[2]: Exterior vertical control and expansion joints in unit masonry.

1. Joint Sealant: [Single-component, nonsag, neutral-curing silicone sealant] [ES-<1>]. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

C. Joint-Sealant Application JS-[4]: Vertical control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.

1. Joint Sealant Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant ES-3. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].

D. Joint-Sealant Application JS-5: Interior perimeter joints of exterior openings.

1. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant ES-3. 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

E. Joint-Sealant Application JS-[7]: Interior joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.

1. Joint Sealant: Single-component mildew-resistant neutral - acid curing silicone sealant[ ES-2.

2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

F. Joint-Sealant Application JS-[8]: Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of interior walls and partitions.

1. Joint Sealant: [Multicomponent nonsag urethane sealant] [ES-<3>] . 2. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1

SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Standard hollow metal Frames.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware" for door hardware for hollow metal doors. 2. Division 09 Sections "Interior Painting" for field painting hollow metal doors and

frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

C. Custom Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, [fire-resistance rating,] [temperature-rise ratings,] and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.



C. Other Action Submittals:

D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at [positive pressure] according to [NFPA 252] [UBC Standard 7-2].

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: [At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways], provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

C. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to [NFPA 257 or UL 9]. Label each individual glazed lite.

D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with [NFPA 105 or UL 1784].


A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- (102-mm-) high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity.

1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6-mm) space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.




A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 10. Kewanee Corporation (The). 11. Mesker Door Inc. 12. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 13. Security Metal Products Corp. 14. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 15. Windsor Republic Doors.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.



1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

E. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet[ unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated].

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as [face welded] unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-) thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Wood Doors: [0.042-inch- (1.0-mm-)] thick steel sheet. 6. Frames for Borrowed Lights: [Same as adjacent door frame].

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.4 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (50 mm) wide by 10 inches (250 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, and as follows:



1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch (50-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.5 HOLLOW METAL PANELS

A. Provide hollow metal panels of same materials, construction, and finish as specified for adjoining hollow metal work.

2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch (16 mm) high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch (0.8 mm) thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

D. Terminated Stops: Where indicated on interior door frames, terminate stops 6 inches (152 mm) above finish floor with a [90]-degree angle cut, and close open end of stop with steel sheet closure. Cover opening in extension of frame with welded-steel filler plate, with welds ground smooth and flush with frame.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- (6.4-mm-thick by 25.4-mm-) wide steel.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch (0.4 mm) thick.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in [ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861].

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.



1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. [Sidelight] Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches (2286 to 3048 mm) high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches (3048 mm) high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches (457 mm) from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches (813 mm) o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches (1524 mm) high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches (1524 to 2286 mm) high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches (2286 to 2438 mm) high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches

(610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches (2438 mm) high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches (1066 mm) wide and

mounted in metal-stud partitions.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches (152 mm)

from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches (660 mm) o.c.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

E. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door



Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to [ANSI/SDI A250.8] [ANSI/NAAMM-HMMA 861].

2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware.

3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.

4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections.

F. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and

type of installation indicated.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with [ANSI/SDI A250.11] [HMMA 840].

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim

as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.



a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take

precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. and not more than 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. from each corner.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.



D. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction[, louvers,] and trim for openings.[ Include factory-finishing specifications.]

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data.

1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For [factory-finished doors].

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), for each material and finish.[ For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work.]

2. Frames for light openings, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material, type, and finish required.

E. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.




A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with [AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."]

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at [positive pressure] according to [NFPA 252].

1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.

2. Temperature-Rise Limit: [Where indicated] [At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways], provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.


A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in [cardboard cartons and wrap bundles of doors in plastic sheeting].

C. Mark each door on[ top and] bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F (16 and 32 deg C) and relative humidity between [25 and 55] percent during the remainder of the construction period.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:



a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm) section.

b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch (0.25 mm in a 76.2-mm) span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco, Inc. 3. Buell Door Company Inc.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: [Standard Duty].

C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf (3100 N).

D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals.[ Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals.] Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

E. Mineral-Core Doors:



1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.

2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in doors of fire-protection ratings indicated [as follows:]

a. 5-inch (125-mm) top-rail blocking. b. 5-inch (125-mm) bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates. c. 5-inch (125-mm) midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates. d. [4-1/2-by-10-inch (114-by-250-mm) lock blocks] [5-inch (125-mm) midrail

blocking], in doors indicated to have exit devices.

3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors :

1. Grade: [Custom (Grade A faces)]. 2. Species: [Select white birch]. 3. Cut: [Rift cut]. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: [Random] match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: [Center-balance] match. 6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening[ or separated only by

mullions]. 7. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate

room or area of building. 8. Exposed Vertical[ and Top] Edges: [Same species as faces]. 9. Core: [Structural composite lumber]. 10. Construction: [Five] plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive

planed before veneering.[ Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.] 11. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: [Standard Duty].

2.4 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES

A. Metal Louvers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Air Louvers Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek company. c. Hiawatha Incorporated.

2. Blade Type: [Vision-proof, inverted V].



3. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick,] [with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish].

B. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

a. Air Louvers Inc. b. Anemostat; a Mestek company. c. Hiawatha Incorporated.

2. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, [with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish].

C. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; [with baked-enamel- or powder-coated finish]; and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2. Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of fire-rated doors.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with

applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing." 3. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

2. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

3. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 4. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock edge; trim stiles and

rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency.

C. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1

SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Storefront framing for punched openings.

1.3 Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section – 084113 All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts for systems without aluminum support framing.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."


A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:

1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following:

a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and

structural movements to glazing. d. Glazing-to-glazing contact. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units.



B. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

C. Structural Loads:

1. Wind Loads:

a. Basic Wind Speed: 100 mph

D. Deflection of Framing Members:

1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to 13 feet 6 inches and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to amount not exceeding that which reduces glazing bite to less than 75 percent of design dimension and that which reduces edge clearance between framing members and glazing or other fixed components directly below them to less than 1/8 inch and clearance between members and operable units directly below them to less than 1/16 inch.

E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows:

1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.

2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.

F. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

G. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

H. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes.



I. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces. 2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,

anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F.

b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.

3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.

J. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

K. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having an average U-factor of not more than 0.69 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F when tested according to AAMA 1503.

L. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas having the following sound-transmission characteristics:

1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 35 STC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.

2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): Minimum 34 OITC when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 1332.

M. Structural Sealant: Capable of withstanding tensile and shear stresses imposed by aluminum-framed systems without failing adhesively or cohesively. When tested for preconstruction adhesion and compatibility, cohesive failure of sealant shall occur before adhesive failure.

1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind.

2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength.

N. Structural-Sealant Joints: Designed to produce tensile or shear stress of less than 20 psi.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminum-framed systems to match existing building systems.



B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of moisture in the system to the exterior.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems, made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:

1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

F. Other Action Submittals:

1. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware.

G. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems. 2. Include design calculations.

H. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer

I. Welding certificates.

J. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant.

K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance requirements.

L. Source quality-control reports.

M. Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Include reports.

N. Field quality-control reports.



O. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.

P. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems similar to those indicated for this Project.

D. Quality-Control Program for Structural-Sealant-Glazed System: Develop quality control program specifically for Project. Document quality-control procedures and verify results for aluminum-framed systems. Comply with ASTM C 1401 recommendations including, but not limited to, system material-qualification procedures, preconstruction sealant-testing program, procedures for system fabrication and installation, and intervals of reviews and checks.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.

1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

F. Preconstruction Sealant Testing: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, perform sealant manufacturer's standard tests for compatibility with and adhesion of each material that will come in contact with sealants and each condition required by aluminum-framed systems.

1. Test a minimum five samples each of metal, glazing, and other material. 2. Prepare samples using techniques and primers required for installed systems. 3. For materials that fail tests, determine corrective measures necessary to prepare each

material to ensure compatibility with and adhesion of sealants including, but not limited to, specially formulated primers. After performing these corrective measures on the minimum number of samples required for each material, retest materials.

G. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer.

H. Structural-Sealant Glazing: Comply with ASTM C 1401, "Guide for Structural Sealant Glazing" for design and installation of structural-sealant-glazed systems.

I. Structural-Sealant Joints: Design reviewed and approved by structural-sealant manufacturer.



J. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."

K. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Field testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality

Control" Article. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract

Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

L. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering. d. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. e. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. f. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal weathering.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Basis of Design, Kawneer North America; an alcoa company, Trifab VG 451 (thermal) Storefront system. 1. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company. 2. YKK AP America Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.

B. Steel Reinforcement: Internal, as required by system manufacturer for noted applications based on their internal system calculations for wind resistance. The intermediate verticals at the North entrances to be provided with internal reinforcement coated with manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Thermal Barrier (Trifab VG 451T)

1. Kawneer isolock thermal break with a ¼” separation consisting of a two-part chemically curing, high-density polyurethane which is mechanically and adhesively jointed to aluminum storefront sections.

a. Thermal break shall be designed in accordance with AAMA TIR-A8 and tested in accordance with AAMA 505.

B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.



C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials, where exposed shall be stainless steel.

D. Perimeter anchors: When steel anchors are used, provide insulation between steel material and aluminum to prevent galvanic action.

E. Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened containers with identification labels in tact.

F. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle storefront material and components to avoid damage. Protect storefront material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after storefront installation.

2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS

A. Glazing: As specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Manufacturer's standard TFE-fluorocarbon or polyethylene material to which sealants will not develop adhesion.

E. Glazing Sealants: For structural-sealant-glazed systems, as recommended by manufacturer for joint type, and as follows:

1. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 1184, single-component neutral-curing silicone formulation that is compatible with system components with which it comes in contact, specifically formulated and tested for use as structural sealant and approved by a structural-sealant manufacturer for use in aluminum-framed systems indicated.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

2. Weatherseal Sealant: ASTM C 920 for Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, G, A, and O; single-component neutral-curing formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components with which it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, and aluminum-framed-system manufacturers for this use.

a. Color: Matching structural sealant.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."



B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding.

C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:

1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture

migrating within the system to exterior. 4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to

maintain required glazing edge clearances. 6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior interior interior for vision

glass and exterior for spandrel glazing or metal panels. 7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest

extent possible.

D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

E. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. High-Performance Organic Finish: [3] []-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

1. Color and Gloss: Match Existing Storefront Finishes.

2. Apply one coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar materials.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure non-movement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic

deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.

B. Metal Protection:

1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.

2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.

D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack.

F. Install glazing as specified in Division 08 Section "Glazing."

G. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:

1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length.



2. Alignment:

a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.

B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch .


A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections. 1. Air Infiltration: Areas shall be tested for air leakage of 1.5 times the rate specified for

laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 783 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. or 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.

a. Test Area: [One bay wide, but not less than 30 feet, by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems] >.

b. A minimum of [] [three] > tests in areas as directed by Architect.

2. Water Penetration: Areas shall be tested according to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum [uniform] [and] [cyclic] static-air-pressure difference of [0.67 times the static-air-pressure difference specified for laboratory testing under "Performance Requirements" Article, but not less than 4.18 lbf/sq. ft, and shall not evidence water penetration.

a. Test Area: [One bay wide, but less than 30 feet, by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems. Retain one of two subparagraphs below.

b. A minimum of[three tests in areas as directed by Architect.

3. Water Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

a. Test Area: A minimum area of 75 feet by 1 story of aluminum-framed systems.

B. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

C. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

D. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer.

1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.



GLAZING 088000 - 1

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Interior borrowed lites. 3. Storefront framing.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal uses that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal uses that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.


GLAZING 088000 - 2


A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified based on manufacturer's published test data, as determined according to procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall

unit and for each lite. 3. Center-of-Glass Values: Based on using LBL-44789 WINDOW 5.0 computer program

for the following methodologies:

a. U-Factors: NFRC 100 expressed as Btu/ sq. ft. x h x deg F. b. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: NFRC 200. c. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Samples: For the following products, in the form of 12-inch- square Samples for glass. 1. Wired glass. 2. For each color (except black) of exposed glazing sealant indicated.

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings for glazed openings in preparing a schedule listing glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location.

D. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of glass and glazing products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

1. For solar-control low-e-coated glass, provide documentation demonstrating that manufacturer of coated glass is certified by coating manufacturer.

E. Qualification Data: For installers.


GLAZING 088000 - 3

F. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.

G. Product Test Reports: For each of the following types of glazing products: 1. Glazing sealants. 2. Glazing gaskets.

H. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain the following through one source from a single manufacturer for each glass type: clear float glass.

C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain glazing accessories through one source from a single manufacturer for each product and installation method indicated.

D. Glass Product Testing: Obtain glass test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing glass products.

1. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

E. Elastomeric Glazing Sealant Product Testing: Obtain sealant test results for product test reports in "Submittals" Article from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period.

1. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

2. Test elastomeric glazing sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods.

F. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

G. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and, for wired glass, ANSI Z97.1.


GLAZING 088000 - 4

1. Subject to compliance with requirements, obtain safety glazing products permanently marked with certification label of [the Safety Glazing Certification Council or manufacturer acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Where glazing units, including Kind FT glass and laminated glass, are specified in Part 2 articles for glazing lites more than 9 sq. ft. in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category II materials, for lites 9 sq. ft. or less in exposed surface area of one side, provide glazing products that comply with Category I or II materials, except for hazardous locations where Category II materials are required by 16 CFR 1201 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg .

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.

1. Warranty Period: [10] years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each glazing product is based on the product

named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified.


GLAZING 088000 - 5

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent flat glass); Quality-Q3; of class, kind, and condition indicated. 1. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass in place of annealed or Kind HS (heat-

strengthened) float glass where safety glass is indicated.

B. Wired Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type II (patterned and wired flat glass), Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q-6; and of form and mesh pattern specified.

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Silicone, ASTM C 1115.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned gaskets of material indicated below; complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal: 1. Silicone.

C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: to match existing colors at NMSU Carlsbad Campus.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Single-Component Neutral- and Basic-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants GS-<1>:

a. Products:

1) Dow Corning Corporation; 790.


GLAZING 088000 - 6

2) GE Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. 3) Tremco; Spectrem 1 (Basic). 4) GE Silicones; SilPruf SCS2000. 5) Pecora Corporation; 864. 6) Pecora Corporation; 890. 7) Polymeric Systems Inc.; PSI-641. 8) Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex, Inc.; Omniseal. 9) Tremco; Spectrem 3.

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: [50]. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing

substrates indicated, O.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.6 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites in a manner that produces square edges with slight kerfs at junctions with outdoor and indoor faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.


GLAZING 088000 - 7

2.7 MONOLITHIC FLOAT-GLASS UNITS

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units MG-<1>: Class 1 (clear) [Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass].

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm.

2.8 MONOLITHIC WIRED-GLASS UNITS

A. Polished Wired-Glass Units WG-<1>: Form 1 (wired glass, polished both sides), Quality-Q6, Mesh (Square)], 6.0 mm thick.

1. Manufacturers or approved equal:

a. Asahi/AMA Glass Corp.; affiliated with AFG Industries, Inc. b. Central Glass Co., Ltd.; distributed by Northwestern Industries Inc. c. Pilkington Sales (North America) Ltd.

B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with other requirements specified and with the following:

1. Interlayer: Polyvinyl butyral or cured resin of thickness indicated with a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after laminating glass lites and installation.

a. For polyvinyl butyral interlayers, laminate lites in autoclave with heat plus pressure.

b. For cured-resin interlayers, laminate lites with laminated-glass manufacturer's standard cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer.

2. Laminating Process: Fabricate laminated glass to produce glass free of foreign substances and air or glass pockets.

2.9 INSULATED GLASS UNITS

A. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass (1/4” clear tinted, 1/2” gap, ¼” clear tinted) separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with glass design requirements specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites where safety OR tempered glass is indicated. 3. Overall Unit Thickness (1 inch) and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for

insulating-glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge.


GLAZING 088000 - 8

4. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:

a. Manufacturer's standard sealants. 5. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction

complying with the following requirements:

a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with bronze, color anodic finish. b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both. c. Corner Construction: Manufacturer's standard corner construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.

2. Presence and functioning of weep system. 3. Minimum required face or edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing.


GLAZING 088000 - 9

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows:

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


GLAZING 088000 - 10

3.5 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING

A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide supplementary wet seal and weep system, unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels, and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations, including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.



2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter.

C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

D. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm) . b. Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92.1 mm) .

E. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0396 inch (1.00 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide[ one of] the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes

applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series as noted.

2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.



1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply

to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacing's indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.



a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, counter splaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacing's that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

1. Space studs as follows:

a. Single-Layer Application: 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated. c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

D. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.


1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch long length for each trim accessory indicated.

2. Textured Finishes: 4’-0” x 4’-0” for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Install mockups for the following:



a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wall coverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

1.5 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat to prevent sagging.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PANELS, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc.



c. G-P Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation.

B. Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered and featured for prefilling.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: As noted. 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints, or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.

2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.



3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use sandable topping compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."

2.6 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

1. Texture: Match Existing and Adjacent.

a. Flame Spread: Less than 25. b. Smoke Developed: Less than 450 .

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.



C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Regular Type: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Type X: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Flexible Type: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces. 5. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.



B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels parallel to framing, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints 1 framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate (other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

3.4 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.



C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: All walls and partitions.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.

E. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.

B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095000 - 1

SECTION 095000 – ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Drawings and general conditions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Divisions-1 Specification sections apply to work of this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Acoustical ceiling panels 2. Exposed grid suspension system 3. Wire hangers, fasteners, main runners, cross tees, and wall angle moldings 4. Perimeter Trim

B. Related Selections

1. Section 095100 - Acoustical Ceilings 2. Section 0953 00 - Acoustical Ceiling Suspension Assemblies 4. Section 0929 00 - Gypsum Board C. Alternates 1. Prior Approval: Unless otherwise provided for in the Contract documents, proposed product substitutions may be submitted no later than TEN (10) working days prior to the date established for receipt of bids. Acceptability of a proposed substitution is contingent upon the Architect's review of the proposal for acceptability and approved products will be set forth by the Addenda. If included in a Bid are substitute products that have not been approved by Addenda, the specified products shall be provided without additional compensation. 2. Submittals that do not provide adequate data for the product evaluation will not be considered. The proposed substitution must meet all requirements of this section, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: Single source materials suppliers (if specified in Section 1.5); Underwriters' Laboratories Classified Acoustical performance; Panel design, size, composition, color, and finish; Suspension system component profiles and sizes; Compliance with the referenced standards.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM A 1008 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability 2. ASTM A 641 Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire 3. ASTM A 653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process 4. ASTM C 423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method



5. ASTM C 635 Standard Specification for Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings 6. ASTM C 636 Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels 7. ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber 8. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 9. ASTM E 119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Material A. Armstrong Fire Guard Products 10. ASTM E 580 Installation of Metal Suspension Systems in Areas Requiring Moderate Seismic Restraint 11. ASTM E 1111 Standard Test Method for Measuring the Interzone Attenuation of Ceilings Systems 12. ASTM E 1414 Standard Test Method for Airborne Sound Attenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum 13. ASTM E 1264 Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products

B. International Building Code

C. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2004, Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality

D. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code

E. ASCE 7 American Society of Civil Engineers, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures

F. International Code Council-Evaluation Services - AC 156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic Qualification Testing of Non-structural Components

G. International Code Council-Evaluation Services Report - Seismic Engineer Report

1. ESR 1308 - Armstrong Suspension Systems

H. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials - Seismic Engineer Report

1. 0244 - Armstrong Single Span Suspension System

I. California Department of Public Health CDPH/EHLB Emission Standard Method Version 1.1 2010

J. LEED - Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design is a set of rating systems for the design, construction, operation, and maintenance of green buildings

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

Continuous/Wall-to-Wall



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each type of acoustical ceiling unit and suspension system required.

B. Samples: Minimum 6 inch x 6 inch samples of specified acoustical panel; 8 inch long samples of exposed wall molding and suspension system, including main runner and 4 foot cross tees.

C. Shop Drawings: Layout and details of acoustical ceilings show locations of items that are to be coordinated with, or supported by the ceilings.

D. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. For acoustical performance, each carton of material must carry an approved independent laboratory classification of NRC, CAC, and AC.

E. If the material supplied by the acoustical subcontractor does not have an Underwriter's Laboratory classification of acoustical performance on every carton, subcontractor shall be required to send material from every production run appearing on the job to an independent or NVLAP approved laboratory for testing, at the architect's or owner's discretion. All products not conforming to manufacturer's current published values must be removed, disposed of and replaced with complying product at the expense of the Contractor performing the work.


A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide acoustical panel units and grid components by a single manufacturer.

1. Fire Performance Characteristics: Identify acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: As follows, tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM E 1264 Classification.

3. Fire Resistance: As follows tested per ASTM E119 and listed in the appropriate floor or roof design in the Underwriters Laboratories Fire Resistance Directory

B. Acoustical Panels: As with other architectural features located at the ceiling, may obstruct or skew the planned fire sprinkler water distribution pattern through possibly delay or accelerate the activation of the sprinkler or fire detection systems by channeling heat from a fire either toward or away from the device. Designers and installers are advised to consult a fire protection engineer, NFPA 13, or their local codes for guidance where automatic fire detection and suppression systems are present.

C. Coordination of Work: Coordinate acoustical ceiling work with installers of related work including, but not limited to building insulation, gypsum board, light fixtures, mechanical systems, electrical systems, and sprinklers.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING



A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaged units in any way.


A. Space Enclosure:

Standard Ceilings: Do not install interior ceilings until space is enclosed and weatherproof; wet work in place is completed and nominally dry; work above ceilings is complete; and ambient conditions of temperature and humidity are continuously maintained at values near those intended for final occupancy. Building areas to receive ceilings shall be free of construction dust and debris.

1.9 ALTERNATE CONSTRUCTION WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Ceiling material being reclaimed must be kept dry and free from debris

B. Contact the Armstrong Recycle Center a consultant will verify the condition of the material and that it meets the Armstrong requirements for recycling. The Armstrong consultant with provide assistance to facilitate the recycling of the ceiling.

C. Recycling may qualify for LEED Credits:

a. LEED 2009 - Category 4: Material and Resources (MR)

i. Credit MRc2: Construction Waste Management

b. LEEDv4 - MRp2 - Construction Waste Management Planning Qualifies as a material stream (non-structural) targeted for diversion. Ceilings will be source-separated and diverted through the Armstrong Ceiling Recycling Program.

c. LEEDv4-MRc5 -

i. Option 1: Divert ceilings to qualify for one of the 3 material streams (50%)

ii. Option 2: Divert ceilings to qualify for one of the 4 material streams (75%)

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Acoustical Panel: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace panels that fail within the warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to the following:



1. Acoustical Panels: Sagging and warping

2. Grid System: Rusting and manufacturer's defects

B. Warranty Period:

1. Acoustical panels: One (1) year from date of substantial completion.

2. Cirrus: Ten (10) years from date of substantial completion.

3. Grid: One (1) year from date of substantial completion.

C. The Warranty shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and will be in addition to and run concurrent with other warranties made by the Contractor under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.11 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed. Packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Furnish quality of full-size units equal to 5.0 percent of amount installed.

2. Exposed Suspension System Components: Furnish quantity of each exposed suspension component equal to 2.0 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ceiling Panels:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. - Cortega Square Lay-in 24” x 24” # 770 or approved equal

B. Suspension Systems:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. - Prelude 15/16” Exposed Tee or approved equal

C: Perimeter Systems

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. or approved equal

2.2.1 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS

A. Acoustical Panels Type AP



1. Surface Texture: Medium 2. Composition: Mineral Fiber 3. Color: White 4. Size: 24IN x 24IN 5. Edge Profile: Square Lay-In 15/16IN 6. Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC): ASTM C 423; Classified with UL label on product carton 0.55. 7. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC) : ASTM C 1414; Classified with UL label on product carton 33. 8. Sabin: N/A 9. Articulation Class (AC): 10. Flame Spread: ASTM E 1264; Class A (UL) 11. Light Reflectance White Panel: ASTM E 1477; 0.82 12. Dimensional Stability: Standard 13. Recycle Content: Post-Consumer - 1% - 5% Pre-Consumer Waste - 23% - 40% 14. Acceptable Product: Cortega Lay-In, 770 as manufactured by Armstrong World Industries

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not proceed with installation until all wet work such as concrete, terrazzo, plastering and painting has been completed and thoroughly dried out, unless expressly permitted by manufacturer's printed recommendations. (Exception: HumiGuard Max Ceilings)

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less than half width units at borders, and comply with reflected ceiling plans. Coordinate panel layout with mechanical and electrical fixtures.

B. Coordination: Furnish layouts for preset inserts, clips, and other ceiling anchors whose installation is specified in other sections.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination of other work.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Follow manufacturer installation instructions.

B. Install suspension system and panels in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and in compliance with ASTM C 636 and with the authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Suspend main beam from overhead construction with hanger wires spaced 4-0 on center along the length of the main runner. Install hanger wires plumb and straight.



D. Install wall moldings at intersection of suspended ceiling and vertical surfaces. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect or install corner caps.

E. For reveal edge panels: Cut and reveal or rabbet edges of ceiling panels at border areas and vertical surfaces.

F. Install acoustical panels in coordination with suspended system, with edges resting on flanges of main runner and cross tees. Cut and fit panels neatly against abutting surfaces. Support edges by wall moldings.


A. Replace damaged and broken panels.

B. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch up of minor finish damage. Remove any ceiling products that cannot be successfully cleaned and or repaired. Replace with attic stock or new product to eliminate evidence of damage.

C. Before disposing of ceilings, contact the Armstrong Recycling Center at 877-276-7876, select option #1 then #8 to review with a consultant the condition and location of building where the ceilings will be removed. The consultant will verify the condition of the material and that it meets the Armstrong requirements for recycling. The Armstrong consultant with provide assistance to facilitate the recycle of the ceiling.


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section – 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring for resilient floor tile.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C).




A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,

a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries. b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. d. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. e. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. f. Flexco, Inc. g. Johnsonite. h. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. i. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. j. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. k. PRF USA, Inc. l. Roppe Corporation, USA. m. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.



1. Material Requirement: Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic]. 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: [Cove (base with toe)].

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inc.

D. Height: 4 inches

E. Lengths: Cut lengths, 48 inches long.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed .

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Finish: As selected by Architect to match exisiting

A. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect to match exisiting

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite. d. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). e. Roppe Corporation, USA. f. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

B. Description: Reducer strip for resilient floor covering .

C. Material: Rubber.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated .

E. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect to match exisiting

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.



1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacture. Proceed with

installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of[3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level measurement.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.



1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

3.4 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

A. Resilient Stair Accessories:



1. Use stair-tread-nose filler to fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours. 2. Tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. 3. For treads installed as separate, equal-length units, install to produce a flush joint

between units.

B. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.



RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1

SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 09 Section – 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories for resilient base, reducer

strips, and other accessories installed with resilient floor coverings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor tile indicated.

C. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this Project who are competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor tile installation and seaming method indicated.

1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by manufacturer for installation techniques required.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.




A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F ,in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F .

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Floor Tile: Furnish 1 box for every [50] boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern of floor tile installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work must match exisiting product at the NMSU Campus: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2,.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth .

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch .

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches.

F. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect to matcvh existile building tile.



2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Vinyl Composition Floor Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and

that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.



b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with installation only after substrates have a maximum 75% relative humidity level measurement.

C. Access Flooring Panels: Remove protective film of oil or other coating using method recommended by access flooring manufacturer.

D. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

E. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles to match exisiting floor patterns at the building.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install floor tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts, building expansion-joint covers, and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of tile installed on covers and adjoining tiles. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.

H. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.




A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:

1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

C. Protect floor tile products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coats.

E. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.



MODULAR CARPET TILE 096813 - 1

SECTION 096813 – MODULAR CARPET TILE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install carpet tile, vinyl base adhesives and accessories as shown on Construction

Drawings or as otherwise requested.

1.2 REFERENCES A. American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (AATCC)

AATTC 16 Test Method 16, Test Option 16E: Watercooled Xenon Arc Lamp, Continuous Light

AATTC 20 Fiber Analysis – Qualitative AATTC 134 Electrostatic Propensity of Carpets AATTC 165 Colorfastness to Crocking - AATCC Crockmeter Method

B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ISO 2551 Machine-made Textile Floor Coverings -- Determination of

Dimensional Changes Due to the Effects of Varied Water and Heat Conditions ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). (Previously DIN 54318, Aachen Dimensional Stability Test)

C. American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)

ASTM ASTM

D1335 D2859

Standard Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Yarn Floor CoveringsStandard Test Method for Ignition Characteristics of Finished

Textile Floor Covering Materials ASTM D3676 Standard Specification for Rubber Cellular Cushion Used

Carpet or Rug Underlay ASTM D3936 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Delamination of

the Secondary Backing of Pile Yarn Floor Covering



D.

E. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC) CPSC FF-1-70 Methenamine Pill Test

F. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 101 Life Safety NFPA 253 Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor

Covering Systems using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01330, “Submittal Procedures":

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions

for each type of carpeting material and installation accessory required. C. Samples:

1. Submit manufacturer's standard size samples showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of carpet tile required.

2. Submit a minimum of four 18-inch square samples for each type of carpet tile required. Submit samples that are large enough to show pattern repeat if beyond an 18-inch sample dimension.

3. Submit samples of each type exposed edge stripping, vinyl base, and accessory item.

D. Certification: 1. Submit certificate stating that the manufacturer and installer comply with

Quality Assurance requirements. Include a minimum of five (5) references, complete with addresses, telephone numbers and contact persons for installations within the time period indicated.

ASTM D5116 Standard Guide for Small-Scale Environmental Chamber Determinations of Organic Emissions from

d Materials/Products ASTM D5252 Standard Practice for the Operation of the Hexapod Drum Tester

ASTM D5417 Standard Practice for the Operation of the Vetterman Drum Tester

ASTM E648 Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source

ASTM E662 Standard Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials

Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI)

CRI Indoor Air Quality Testing Program

CRI TM101 Assessment of Carpet Surface Appearance Change

CRI TM102 Fluorochemical Finishes

CRI 104 Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet



2. Submit manufacturer's certificate stating that materials furnished comply with specified requirements. Include supporting independent certified laboratory testing data indicating that material meets specified test requirements.

3. Submit Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for adhesives, leveling compounds, and primers required.

4. Submit written warranty information stating compliance with requirements. E. Sustainability:

1. Submit manufacturer's documentation of recycled content for each product. 2. Submit documentation of manufacturer's buyback and/or recycling program. 3. Submit manufacturer's documentation that carpet, cushion and adhesives meet

the Carpet and Rug Institutes (CRI) Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Testing Programs Green Label or comply with the following total volatile organic compounds (VOC) emissions criteria:

a. Carpet not to exceed 0.5 milligrams per square meter per hour b. Cushion not to exceed 1.0 milligrams per square meter per hour c. Adhesive not to exceed 10.0 milligrams per square meter per hour

F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance

of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include precautions against materials and methods which may be detrimental to finishes and performance.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm (material producer) with not less than 5 years of

production experience, who’s published literature, clearly indicates general compliance of products with requirements of this section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years of experience in installation of commercial carpet tile of type, quantity and installation methods similar to work of this section.

C. Labeling: A label meeting the Federal Labeling Requirements, as stated in the Textile Products Identification Act under the Federal Trade Commission, shall be attached to the certification samples and the products delivered.

D. For each colorway, per floor, furnish carpet tile from one dye lot only.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, “Storage and Handling.” B. Deliver materials to site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled

with identification of manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade, fire hazard classification, and lot number or provide independent certificates.

C. Store materials in original undamaged packages and containers, inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity; laid flat, blocked off ground to prevent sagging and warping. Maintain temperature in storage area above 40 degrees F. Do not stack packages higher than recommended by manufacturer.

D. Comply with instructions and recommendations of manufacturer for special delivery, storage, and handling requirements.



E. Extra Materials: On projects over 100 square yards, furnish an additional 2 percent of carpet to be stored on SNL site for maintenance/replacement needs. Additional carpet shall be packaged for storage to prevent damage from sagging, warping, and other deleterious effects.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate work of this section with other work to ensure that installed carpeting materials

are not damaged or soiled. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, “Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity.”

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer and in compliance with the values outlined in 3.01A of this document. Refer to section 9699 for requirements for slabs and substrates with elevated vapor emission, RH, and pH levels.

D. When demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tile, install carpet tile before the installation of these items.

1.8 WARRANTY A. Warranties shall cover all labor and materials, including labor and installation costs

involved to replace defective product and workmanship. All warranty items are full term, not pro-rated.

B. General Installation Material Warranty: Provide single source installation product warranty covering moisture mitigation (if needed or required), surface preparation products (Section 3540), and appropriate adhesive product for flooring specified. All products to be sourced from a single manufacturer providing a system warranty of not less than 10 years.

C. Special Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: minimum, non-prorated years, from date of

construction complete. D. Special Installation Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile installer and

general contractor agreeing to correct faulty workmanship. 1. Installation Warranty Period: 2 years from date of construction complete.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, those listed below. 1. Lees Commercial Carpets Division/BurlingtonIndustries,

Inc. (www.leescarpets.com) 2. Mannington Mills Inc. (www.mannington.com) 3. Milliken Contract Carpets (www.milliken.com) 4. Shaw Contract Group (www.shawcontract.com) 5. Collins & Aikman Floorcoverings, Inc. (www.powerbond.com) 6. Interface Company (www.interfaceinc.com) 7. Beaulieu of America Carpets (www.beaulieu-usa.com) 8. Bentley Prince Street (www.bentleyprincestreet.com) 9. Mohawk Flooring (www.mohawkflooring.com) 10. J+J/Invision Commercial Carpets (www.jj-invision.com)

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide single source carpet, adhesives, and other related materials that

are compatible as a system and with substrates under conditions of service and application.

1. CHAPCO Safe-Set 2 Releasable Pressure Sensitive Adhesive. Install as recommended by CHAPCO / H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com. CHAPCO Safe-Set 2 Releasable Pressure Sensitive Adhesive will tolerate MVER levels of up to 10 lbs or RH readings up to 90% in new concrete slabs.

2. Appearance Retention Rating: Severe (short-term not less than 4.0, long-term not less than 3.5) based on ASTM D-5252 (Hexapod) using 3750-gram tumbler or ASTM D-5417 (Vettermann) test method. Carpets shall be tested without underlay. The exposure conditioned carpet shall be assessed according to CRI TM-101.

3. Tuft bind: minimum average value, 8.0 pounds (Loop Pile) 4. Dimensional Stability: maximum dimensional change ± 0.2 percent 5. Delamination Resistance of the Secondary Backing: not less than 2.5 pounds per

inch 6. Colorfastness (entire colorline):

a. To Crocking: Color transfer Class 4 minimum, wet and dry, when tested as specified

b. To light: Color contrast between the exposed and unexposed carpet areas equivalent to a minimum of Grade 4 on the Gray Scale for Color Change after an exposure to 60 AFU (AATCC fading units) for all colors



7. Fluorochemical finish: minimum average of 350 parts-per-million fluorine on the pile fiber when tested in accordance with CRI TM-102.

8. Antimicrobial Activity: Inherently antimicrobial, topical finishes not allowed. 9. Electrostatic Propensity: maximum 3.5 kV 10. Flammability:

a. Methenamine Pill Test: Self Extinguishing – compliance with Federal Flammability Standards CPSC FF-1-70 when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2859.

b. Radiant Panel: minimum critical radiant flux of 0.45 watts per square centimeter.

c. Smoke Density: maximum 450 11. Indoor Air Quality:

a. Carpet: shall be only those certified with the CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program Green Label, or tested for compliance to meet the CRI IAQ Carpet Testing Program requirements and criteria.

b. Adhesive: shall be only those certified with the CRI IAQ Adhesive Testing Program Green Label or tested for compliance to meet the CRI IAQ Adhesive Testing Program requirements and criteria.

c. All products (carpet, cushion and adhesives) from current production must be retested on a quarterly basis to ensure continuing compliance with CRI IAQ Test Program requirements.

C. Material Requirements: 1. Pile Fiber Type: 100 percent continuous filament nylon, Type 6 or Type 6,6 2. Backing Materials:

a. Primary Backing: 100 percent synthetic materials. b. Secondary Backing: Fiberglass reinforced secondary backing

consisting of a polymeric cushion or hard back compound consistent with all performance testing requirements.

3. Recycled Content: Renewed nylon carpet, which is cleaned, retextured, recolored, or otherwise reused to produce new nylon carpet is acceptable; otherwise comply with the following recycled content requirements: a. Nylon Carpet Face Fiber: 25 percent minimum total recovered

materials content. b. Nylon Carpet Backing: For vinyl primary backing, use the highest

percentage of total recovered materials content available; however 0% is not acceptable.

c. Polymeric Cushion: Preference will be given to recycled content cushion backings.

4. All materials must be 100% recyclable

D. Construction Requirements 1. Surface texture: level or textured loop, multi-level loop, or pattern 2. Yarn: Multi-ply



3. Tufting Machine Gauge: minimum 1/10 gauge 4. Number of Stitches: minimum 8 per inch 5. Finished pile thickness: minimum 0.125 inch, maximum 0.5 inch 6. Average Finished Pile Yarn Weight: minimum 20 ounces per square yard 7. Dye method: Yarn or solution dyed 8. Color: To be selected by the Architect or SDR from Vendor colorline of

product meeting this specification

2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Product shall have a lead-time of not more than six (6) weeks from the time the dealer receives the order to the time SNL receives the product.

B. Patterns and colorways shall be available for a minimum of ten (10) years. C. All products within the same floor of a project shall be from the same dye lot.

2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Carpet Edge Guard, Nonmetallic: Extruded or molded heavy-duty vinyl or rubber

carpet edge guard of size and profile required with minimum 2-inch wide anchorage flange; colors compatible with carpet furnished.

B. Surface Skim Coat: CHAPCO SmoothFinish Skim Coat. Install as recommended by CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com.

C. Vinyl Base: 4 inches high, coved, 0.080 inch gauge: CHAPCO Safe-Set 4 or CHAPCO Safe-Set 400-White Premium Cove Base Adhesive. Install as recommended by CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com.

D. Miscellaneous Materials: As recommended by manufacturers of carpet and other carpeting products for intended application.

E. Releasable Adhesive for Carpet: CHAPCO Safe-Set 2 Releasable Pressure Sensitive Adhesive. Provide water-resistant, 0 VOC, non-staining, carpet adhesive which complies with flame spread rating required for carpet installation. Install as recommended by CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com.

E. Concrete Sealer: Provide concrete sealer compatible with carpet backing material and adhesive.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Flammability Tests

1. Radiant Panel: ASTM E648, Class I 2. Smoke Density: ASTM E662 3. Methenamine Pill Test: Self Extinguishing (CPSC FF-1-70 or ASTM D 2859).

B. Lightfastness: AATCC 16E C. Crocking: AATCC 165 D. Static Electricity: AATCC 134 E. Dimensional Stability: ISO 2551 F. Turf Bind: ASTM D1335



G. Delamination Resistance: ASTM D3936 H. Fluorochemical Finish: CRI TM-102 I. Electrostatic Propensity: AATCC 134 J. Indoor Air Quality: ASTM D5116 K. Pile Fiber Identity: AATCC 20 L. Backing Material Identity: AATCC 20 M. Attached Backing:

1. Thickness: ASTM D3676 2. Volume Density: ASTM D3676 3. Compression Resistance: ASTM D3676 4. Compression Set: ASTM D3676

N. Test in accordance with NFPA 253 (ASTM E-648) when applying the floor finish requirements of the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) to DOE Facilities.

O. Carpets and rugs should have a critical radiant flux not less than the following: 1. 0.45 watts per square centimeter in areas unprotected by an automatic fire

suppression system; and 2. 0.22 watts per square centimeter in areas protected by an automatic fire

suppression system.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for moisture content alkaline presence and other conditions under

which carpet tile is to be installed. Provide Calcium Chloride test results to verify amount of moisture in new or existing slabs. Calcium Chloride shall be less than or equal to ten (10) pounds per one thousand (1000) square feet in 24 hours when using CHAPCO Safe- Set 2 Releasable Pressure Sensitive Adhesive. Alkalinity testing shall result in a pH range of 5–9. Notify GC in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. See section 9699. 1. CHAPCO DEFENDER Moisture Vapor Barrier. Install as recommended by

CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com. B. Field verifies all dimensions and other work conditions affecting the installation of

carpet tile. C. The carpet covered by this specification is intended for end use applications that have

a Severe Use Classification. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide only products compatible with adjacent materials in the assembly.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, “Site Conditions; Floor Preparation,” and carpet tile and installation system manufacturer’s written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. 1. Concrete shall be cured, clean and dry before installation proceeds.



2. Repair minor holes, cracks, depressions or rough areas using floor patching/leveling compound that is compatible with the adhesive to be used. Protrusions over 1/32 inch shall be leveled. Large patched areas shall be primed.

3. Whenever a powdery or porous surface is encountered, Scrub with a solution of white vinegar & water at a ratio of 1:1 and rinse with clean water. Install primer compatible with the adhesive. Primer shall be used to provide a suitable surface for glue-down installation.

a. CHAPCO Multipurpose Primer. Install as recommended by CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com.

4. Remove existing brass utility caps and install grout to fill caps; Grout level with existing substrate.

5. Remove grease, oils, loose particles, paint, dirt, curing and parting agents, and all other foreign substances. Clear away debris and scrape up cementitious deposits from surfaces to receive carpet tile; vacuum clean immediately before installation.

6. Subfloor shall be level and smooth and free from scaling and irregularities per Carpet and Rug Institute acceptable standards (CRI 104).

7. Coordinate carpet installation with any underfloor electrical/telephone/data so conductors and cables are pulled prior to carpet installation. Accessories (floor power/communications monuments) shall be installed on top of carpet after installation.

8. Sequence carpet tile installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling of carpet during remainder of construction period.

9. Maintain room temperature at minimum 65 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to installation and relative humidity at approximately that at which the area is to be maintained.

A. Concrete (No Previous Flooring Material): Apply a concrete sealer coat at the rate recommended by the sealer manufacturer. Use thin, fast drying primers that are compatible with adhesives. Apply adhesive only after primer is completely dry. 1. CHAPCO Multipurpose Primer. Install as recommended by CHAPCO/H.B.

Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com. B. Concrete (Previous Flooring Materials Removed): Remove existing adhesive by

grinding with a concrete grinding machine and moist sand. Do not use solvents to remove adhesive. Apply concrete sealer at rate recommended by the sealer manufacturer. Use thin, fast drying primers that are compatible with adhesives. Completely cover area with cutback neutralizer per manufacturer's recommendations. 1. CHAPCO Multipurpose Primer. Install as recommended by CHAPCO/H.B.

Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com. C. Wood: Patch all surface irregularities and seal with wood sealer as recommended by

manufacturer. 1. CHAPCO Multipurpose Primer. Install as recommended by CHAPCO/H.B.

Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com. 2. CHAPCO SmoothFinish Skim Coat. Install as recommended by

CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com.



D. Vinyl Tile: Replace all loose, missing, and broken tiles with tiles of equal thickness making note of any special requirements with respect to asbestos on the Jobsite Hazard Evaluation. Strip existing tile of wax, dirt and other foreign substances. Completely cover area with cutback neutralizer per manufacturer's recommendations and apply embossing leveler. 1. CHAPCO SmoothFinish Skim Coat. Install as recommended by

CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com. 2. CHAPCO ADDITIVE Patch Additive. Install as recommended by

CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com. E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 13, “Carpet Modules (Tiles),” and carpet tile manufacturer’s written instructions, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where project conditions require extra precautions or provisions to ensure satisfactory performance of the work. 1. Field verifies all dimensions and other work conditions affecting the installation

of carpet tile. 2. Unless otherwise noted or approved on drawings, begin laying tile at centerline 3. Comply with carpet tile instructions for direction of carpet tile. Unless

otherwise noted on drawings align pattern and pile in the same direction, parallel to the centerline of the area or room

4. Extend carpet tile under open-bottomed obstructions and under removable flanges and furnishings, and into alcoves and closets of each space. Existing systems furniture shall be raised or removed to accommodate continuous carpet installation.

5. Provide cut-out where required, and bind cut edges where not concealed by protective edge guards or overlapping flanges.

6. Install carpet edge guard where edge of carpet is exposed; anchor guards to substrate. Use full-length strips only.

7. Expansion Joints: Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet tile; provide for movement.

8. Carpet tile shall be free from movement when subjected to traffic. 9. Do not use pieces smaller than 1/3 of a standard tile without prior approval by

the SDR. 10. Provide mockup for approval by SDR of special cuts/effects such as

mitered corners at borders or graphic patters that are prepared and installed onsite.

11. Where there are floor finish material changes at doors, place centerline of abutting materials below door.



B. Glue Down Installation 1. Fit sections of carpet tile into each space prior to application of adhesive.

Trim edges. 2. Apply a full spread of adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. Follow MSDS instructions for ventilation requirements. Butt carpet tile edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Butt edges tightly to vertical surfaces. Eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Remove adhesive promptly from face of carpet tiles.

C. Self-adhesive installation: Install per manufacturer’s recommendation. D. Miscellaneous Installation, Stairway Carpeting: Install per

manufacturer's recommendation. Provide vinyl nosing at each riser. Match adjoining carpet installation.

E. Install vinyl base after completion of carpet work. Use adhesive as part of a single source system from a single manufacturer. 1. CHAPCO Safe-Set 4 or CHAPCO Safe-Set 400-White Premium Cove Base

Adhesive. Install as recommended by CHAPCO/H.B. Fuller Construction Products Inc. www.chapco-adhesive.com.

F. Coordinate adhesive blocking areas with GC when floating carpet tile over access flooring. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and dispose of debris and recycle all unusable scraps.

B. Remove excess adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Replace carpet tile where blemishes cannot be removed. Trim protruding face yarn from carpet tile surface. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial quality vacuum cleaner with face-beater element.

C. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, “Protection of

Indoor Installations.”

D. Protect installation with a heavy, non-staining building paper. Do not use a moisture barrier such as plastic film. Maintain protection intact until construction complete.

E. Advise SDR of protection methods and materials necessary to prevent deterioration

or damage until construction complete. 3.5 CARPET REMOVAL

A. All carpet tile and scraps removed from project shall be recycled or reapplied. Disposal of product in landfill is not permitted.

B. Vacuum in-place carpet with industrial vacuum prior to demolition or debris-producing renovation.

C. Remove carpet. D. Stack on pallets for handling. E. Store carpet off ground and under cover to prevent contamination of materials by

water, foreign matter or other causes. F. Coordinate with Inspector to deliver removed carpet to recycling program or contact



manufacturer for pick-up for recycle. In the case that the manufacturer does not have a recycling program, contact an independent recycling program such as:

1. BASF 6ix Again: (800 839-3233) or www.basf.com 2. Collins & Aikman floor carpet buyback program: (800)248-2878

or www.powerbond.com 3. Dupont-Partnership for Reclamation: (800)328-7719

or www.dupontcommercial.com 4. Honeywell/Evergreen Nylon Recycling: (804)520-3564 or www.n6recycling.com 5. Shaw Inc./Inforum: (877)502-7429 or www.shawcontract.com

END OF SECTION


ACCESS FLOORING 096900 - 1

SECTION 096900 - ACCESS FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Access-flooring panels. 2. Understructure. 3. Floor panel coverings.

B. Related Requirements:

1. "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for connection to ground of access-flooring understructure.

1.3 ALLOWANCES

A. Not Used

1.4 UNIT PRICES

A. Work of this Section is affected by cutouts in floor panels and service outlets.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of mechanical and electrical work in underfloor cavity to prevent interference with access-flooring pedestals.

B. Mark pedestal locations on subfloor using a grid to enable mechanical and electrical work to proceed without interfering with access-flooring pedestals.

1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site

1. Review connection with mechanical and electrical systems. 2. Review requirements related to sealing the plenum. 3. Review procedures for keeping underfloor space clean.




A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.4: For particleboard used in steel-encapsulated, wood-core

panels, documentation indicating that product contains no urea formaldehyde.

B. Shop Drawings: Include layout of access-flooring system and relationship to adjoining Work based on field-verified dimensions.

1. Details and sections with descriptive notes indicating materials, finishes, fasteners, typical and special edge conditions, accessories, and understructures.

2. Include starting point of installation and details of component panels and pedestals. 3. Where applicable, show edge details of ramps, steps, handrails, and anchoring of pedestal

bases to subfloor.

C. Samples:

1. Floor Covering: Full-size units for each color and texture specified. 2. Exposed Metal Accessories: Approximately 10 inches in length. 3. One complete full-size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for each type of

access-flooring system required.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product and exposed finish.

E. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Floor Covering: Full-size units. 2. Exposed Metal Accessories: Approximately 10 inches in length. 3. One complete full-size floor panel, pedestal, and understructure unit for each type of

access-flooring system required.

1.8 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of access-flooring system.

C. Product Test Reports: For each type of flooring material and exposed finish, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Indicate compliance with specified design criteria when tested and reported according to CISCA "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors."

D. Preconstruction Test Reports: For preconstruction adhesive field test.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS


1. Flooring Panels: TecCrete 1250



2. Pedestals: TecCrete Field Head FBHA-06-F, TecCrete Perimeter Head FBHA-06-P 3. Stringers: TecCrete Stringer 24-inches FBAX-24-S


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001 and ISO 13001 certified.

B. Installer Qualifications:

1. An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

2. A firm having at least five years experience in the installation of access floor systems on projects of comparable size and complexity.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of typical access-flooring assembly as shown on Drawings. Size to be an area no fewer than three (3) floor panels in length by three (3) floor panels in width.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.11 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Contractor will engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on field mockups.

1. 6’-0” by 6’-0” field mock-up. 2. Use personnel, materials, and methods of construction that will be used at Project site. 3. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of the dates and times when laboratory

mockups will be tested.

B. Preconstruction Adhesive Field Test: Before installing pedestals, field test their adhesion to subfloor surfaces by doing the following:

1. In areas representative of each subfloor surface, set typical pedestal assemblies in same adhesive and use methods required for the completed Work.

2. Allow test installation to cure for manufacturer's recommended cure time, with a pressure of 25 lbf applied vertically to pedestals during this period.

3. After curing, apply lateral load against a straight steel bar inserted 2 inches into pedestal stems. Measure the force needed to cause adhesive failure of pedestal base.

4. Remove and discard failed pedestals, and clean pedestals of adhered residue. 5. Proceed with installation only after tests show compliance with performance requirement

specified for pedestals' capability to resist overturning moment.



1.12 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install access flooring until spaces are enclosed, subfloor has been sealed, ambient temperature is between 40 and 120 deg F and relative humidity is not less than 20 and not more than 70 percent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Structural Performance: Provide access-flooring systems capable of complying with the following performance requirements according to testing procedures in CISCA's "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors":

1. Concentrated Loads: 1250 lbf with the following deflection and permanent set:

a. Top-Surface Deflection: 0.10 inch b. Permanent Set: 0.010 inch.

2. Ultimate Loads: 1800 lbf 3. Rolling Loads: With local or overall deformation not to exceed 0.040 inch.

a. CISCA Wheel 1: 10 passes at 1200 lbf. b. CISCA Wheel 2: 10,000 passes at 800 lbf.

4. Stringer Load Test: 450 lbf at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.010 inch.

5. Pedestal Axial Load Test: 5000 lbf. 6. Pedestal Overturning Moment Test: 1000 lbf x inches when bonded to clean concrete

slab. 7. Uniform Load Test: 600 lbf/sq. ft. with a maximum top-surface deflection not to exceed

0.040 inch and a permanent set not to exceed 0.010 inch. 8. Drop Impact Load Test: 150 lb.

B. Structural Performance: Provide access-flooring systems capable of complying with the following performance requirements according to testing procedures in CISCA's "Recommended Test Procedures for Access Floors":

1. Concentrated Loads: 1250 lbf with the following deflection and permanent set:

a. Top-Surface Deflection: 0.10 inch. b. Permanent Set: 0.010 inch.

2. Ultimate Loads: 1800 lbf. 3. Rolling Loads: With local or overall deformation not to exceed 0.040 inch.

a. CISCA Wheel 1: 10 passes at 1000 lbf. b. CISCA Wheel 2: 10,000 passes at 800 lbf.



4. Stringer Load Test: 350 lbf at center of span with a permanent set not to exceed 0.010 inch.

5. Pedestal Axial Load Test: 5000 lbf. 6. Pedestal Overturning Moment Test: 1000 lbf x inches when bonded to clean concrete

slab. 7. Drop Impact Load Test: 150 lb.

C. Fire Performance:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain access-flooring system from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Haworth, Inc,; TecCrete 1250 or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Tate Access Raised Floors.

2.3 FLOOR PANELS

A. Floor Panels, General: Provide modular panels interchangeable with other field panels without disturbing adjacent panels or understructure.

1. Size: Nominal 24 by 24 inches>. 2. Attachment to Understructure By gravity. 3. One-to-One Carpet Tile: Fabricate panels to accept one-to-one carpet tile.

B. Cementitious-Core Steel Panels: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet, with the die-cut flat top sheet and die-formed and stiffened bottom pan welded together, and with metal surfaces protected against corrosion by manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish. Fully grout internal spaces of completed units with manufacturer's standard cementitious fill.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Haworth, Inc.; TecCrete 1250 or comparable product by one of the following:



a. ASM Modular Systems, Inc. b. Bergvik North America, Inc. c. Camino Modular Systems, Inc. d. Computer Environments, Inc. e. Tate Access Floors, Inc.

C. Exposed-Concrete-Surface Panels: Fabricated with bottom pan that is die formed from metallic-coated steel sheet and filled with lightweight concrete that is reinforced and bonded to pan by shear ties.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Haworth, Inc.; TecCrete 1250 or comparable product by one of the following:

a. ASM Modular Systems, Inc. b. Bergvik North America, Inc. c. Camino Modular Systems, Inc. d. Computer Environments, Inc. e. Tate Access Floors, Inc.

2.4 UNDERSTRUCTURE

A. Pedestals: Assembly consisting of base, column with provisions for height adjustment, and head (cap); made of steel.

1. Provide pedestals designed for use in seismic applications. 2. Base: Square or circular base with not less than 16 sq. in of bearing area. 3. Column: Of height required to bring finished floor to elevations indicated. Weld to base

plate. 4. Provide vibration-proof leveling mechanism for making and holding fine adjustments in

height over a range of not less than 2 inches and for locking at a selected height, so deliberate action is required to change height setting and prevent vibratory displacement.

5. Head: Designed to support the panel system indicated.

a. Bolted Assemblies: Provide head with four holes aligned with holes in floor panels for bolting of panels to pedestals.

B. Stringer Systems: Modular steel stringer systems designed to bolt to pedestal heads and form a grid pattern. Protect steel components with manufacturer's standard galvanized or corrosion-resistant paint finish.

2.5 FLOOR PANEL COVERINGS

A. FloorScore Compliance: Floor panel coverings shall comply with requirements of FloorScore Standard.

B. Carpet Tile: Field applied, fabricated in one piece to cover each panel face.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,



2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Miliken. b. Mohawk. c. Shaw d. Interface e. Or approved equal

3. Electrical Resistance: Average no less than 1 megohm and no more than 20,000 megohms when installed floor coverings are surface-to-ground tested according to NFPA 99.

4. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range to match existing building carpet.

2.6 FABRICATION

A. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Size: Plus or minus 0.020 inch of required size. 2. Squareness: Plus or minus 0.015 inch between diagonal measurements across top of

panel. 3. Flatness: Plus or minus 0.035 inch, measured on a diagonal on top of panel.

B. Panel Markings: Clearly and permanently mark floor panels on their underside with panel type and concentrated-load rating.

C. Bolted Panels: Provide panels with holes drilled in corners to align precisely with threaded holes in pedestal heads and to accept countersunk screws with heads flush with top of panel.

1. Captive Fasteners: Provide fasteners held captive to panels.

D. Cutouts: Fabricate cutouts in floor panels for cable penetrations and service outlets. Provide reinforcement or additional support, if needed, to make panels with cutouts comply with structural performance requirements.

1. Number, Size, Shape, and Location: Refer to architectural and engineering drawings for location and size.

2. Grommets: Where indicated, fit cutouts with manufacturer's standard grommets; or, if size of cutouts exceeds maximum grommet size available, trim edge of cutouts with manufacturer's standard plastic molding with tapered top flange.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard adhesive for bonding pedestal bases to subfloor.

1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).



2. Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

B. Service Outlets: Standard UL-listed and -labeled assemblies, for recessed mounting flush with top of floor panels; for power, communication, and signal services; and complying with the following requirements:

1. Structural Performance: Cover capable of supporting a 300-lbf concentrated load. 2. Cover and Trim Ring Type: Painted steel cover with opening for passage of cables when

cover is closed and including trim ring frame for use with steel box assembly for mounting electrical receptacles and/or communications outlets.

3. Location: In center of panel quadrant unless otherwise indicated. 4. Receptacles and Wiring: Electrical receptacles and wiring for service outlets are

specified elsewhere. 5. Receptacles and Wiring: Equip each service outlet with power receptacles to comply

with the following requirements:

a. Type of Receptacle: Heavy-duty duplex, two-pole, three-wire grounding, 20 A, 125 V, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R unless otherwise indicated.

b. Number of Receptacles for Outlet Two. c. Wiring Method: Power-in modular connectors, built into outlet housing, for use

with modular power distribution assemblies which are listed in compliance with UL 183, Safety Standard for Manufactured Wiring Systems.

C. Cavity Dividers: Provide manufacturer's standard metal dividers located where indicated to divide underfloor cavities.

D. Ramps: Contractor to provide a ramp as per architectural drawings. Contractor can use an manufacturer's standard ramp construction of width and slope indicated, but not steeper than 1:12, with raised-disc or textured rubber or vinyl-tile floor coverings, and of same materials, performance, and construction requirements as access flooring.

E. Railings: Standard extruded-aluminum railings at ramps and open-sided perimeter of access flooring where indicated. Include handrail, intermediate rails, posts, brackets, end caps, wall returns, wall and floor flanges, plates, and anchorages where required.

1. Provide railings that comply with all applicable ADA and Building Code requirements

F. Perimeter Support: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard method for supporting panel edge and forming transition between access flooring and adjoining perimeter walls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer and manufacturer's representative present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



1. Verify that substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, foreign deposits, and debris that might interfere with attachment of pedestals.

2. Verify that concrete floor sealer and finish have been applied and cured.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Lay out floor panel installation to keep the number of cut panels at floor perimeter to a minimum. Avoid using panels cut to less than 6 inches.

B. Locate each pedestal, complete any necessary subfloor preparation, and vacuum subfloor to remove dust, dirt, and construction debris before beginning installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install access-flooring system and accessories under supervision of access-flooring manufacturer's authorized representative to produce a rigid, firm installation that complies with performance requirements and is free of instability, rocking, rattles, and squeaks.

B. Adhesive Attachment of Pedestals: Set pedestals in adhesive, according to access-flooring manufacturer's written instructions, to provide full bearing of pedestal base on subfloor.

C. Mechanical Attachment of Pedestals: Attach pedestals to subfloor with post-installed mechanical anchors.

D. Adjust pedestals to permit top of installed panels to be set flat, level, and to proper height.

E. Stringer Systems: Secure stringers to pedestal heads according to access-flooring manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Install flooring panels securely in place, properly seated with panel edges flush. Do not force panels into place.

G. Scribe perimeter panels to provide a close fit with adjoining construction with no voids greater than 1/8 inch where panels abut vertical surfaces.

H. Grounded Flooring Access Panel Systems: Ground flooring system as recommended by manufacturer and as needed to comply with performance requirements for electrical resistance of floor coverings.

1. Panel-to-Understructure Resistance: Not more than 10 ohms as measured without floor coverings.

I. Underfloor Dividers: Scribe and install underfloor-cavity dividers to closely fit against subfloor surfaces and floor panels, and seal with mastic.



J. Closures: Scribe closures to closely fit against subfloor and adjacent finished-floor surfaces. Set in mastic and seal to maintain plenum effect within underfloor cavity.

K. Clean dust, dirt, and construction debris caused by floor installation, and vacuum subfloor area as installation of floor panels proceeds.

L. Seal underfloor air cavities at construction seams, penetrations, and perimeter to control air leakage, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

M. Install access flooring without change in elevation between adjacent panels and within the following tolerances:

1. Plus or minus 1/16 inch> in any 10-foot distance. 2. Plus or minus 1/8 inch from a level plane over entire access-flooring area.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic on access flooring for 24 hours and removal of floor panels for 72 hours after installation to allow pedestal adhesive to set.

B. After completing installation, vacuum access flooring and cover with continuous sheets of reinforced paper or plastic. Maintain protective covering until time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace access-flooring panels that are stained, scratched, or otherwise damaged or that do not comply with specified requirements.



INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates:

1. Gypsum Board Surfaces patched as part of fire alarm installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in

Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft.. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.



2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

1.8 SURFACES TO BE PAINTED

A. All exposed, visible surfaces patched and repaired.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. Dunn-Edwards Corporation. 3. The Sherwin-Williams Company. 4. Kwal Paint.



2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by

weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.

C. Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range].



2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

1. VOC Content: E Range of [E1]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1].

B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI #45.

1. VOC Content: E Range of [E1].

C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems indicated.

2.4 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).

1. VOC Content: E Range of [E1]. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: [EPR 1].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.



B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.

Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.



B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex - primer and sealer. b. Topcoat: Interior latex - eggshell.


NMSU CARLSBAD – IT RENOVATION, EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND BOILER

REPLACEMENT (AIM # 2779)

CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM 21 2200 - 1

SECTION 21 2200 – CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 REFERENCES

The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only.

ASTM INTERNATIONAL (ASTM)

ASTM A53/A53M (2012) Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-

Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless

ASTM B88 (2009) Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water

Tube

MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS

INDUSTRY (MSS)

MSS SP-58 (2009) Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and

Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation

NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)

NFPA 101 (2012; Amendment 1 2012) Life Safety Code

NFPA 2001 (2012; AMD 1 2012) Standard on Clean Agent Fire

Extinguishing Systems

NFPA 70 (2014; AMD 1 2013; Errata 1 2013; AMD 2 2013; Errata 2

2013) National Electrical Code

NFPA 72 (2013) National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code

UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES (UL)

UL 2127 (2012; Reprint Jul 2013) Inert Gas Clean Agent

Extinguishing System Units

UL 2166 (2012; Reprint Jul 2013) Halocarbon Clean Agent

Extinguishing System Units

UL 536 (1997; Reprint Jun 2003) Flexible Metallic Hose


1.2.1 Design Requirements




Submit Installation Drawings for Clean Agent Fire Protection Systems in accordance with the

requirements of NFPA 2001. Include details of equipment layout and design. Indicate the general

physical layout of all controls, manual actuation station[s], and internal tubing and wiring details.

Provide electronic drawings in AutoCAD format, only use standard AutoCAD fonts and line styles and

furnish the pcp file.

Submit Design Analysis and Calculations for Fire-Protection Systems including spray areas, hazard by

class, and pressure calculations.

1.2.1.1 System Layout

Give full consideration to built-in spaces, piping, electrical equipment, ductwork, and all other

construction and equipment for the layout of the system.

1.2.1.2 Mandatory System Approvals

Provide devices and equipment of make and type listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), or

Factory Mutual (FM) approved. In the UL and FM publications, consider the advisory provisions to be

mandatory.

Provide an approved high-pressure total flooding type Fire-Extinguishing system conforming to NFPA

2001. Acceptable product trade names are FM-200,Pyro-Chem, Intergen, or approved equal.

Conform electrical work associated with the system to comply with electrical specifications.

1.2.2 Performance Requirements

Provide construction type, test, and mark of high-pressure cylinders in accordance with U.S.

Department of Transportation specifications for seamless steel cylinders.

Each cylinder is to be provided with a safety device to relieve excess pressure safely, in advance of the

rated cylinder test pressure. Devices are to be Interstate Commerce Commission approved frangible

safety disks.

Provide cylinder support racks that anchor to walls and floors.

Main System: Arrange system for fully automatic and manually operated electric control operation,

with operating controls of the enclosed release type to prevent accidental operation. Also provide for

manual actuation stations and keyed override operations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

Shop Drawings

High-Pressure Cylinders

Piping Materials

Pipe Hangers and Supports

Pressure Alarm Switch




Nozzle

Manual Actuation Stations

Installation Drawings

Product Data

Calculations

Escutcheons

Smoke Detectors

Audible Alarms

Visual Alarms

Annunciator Panels

Electromagnetic Door Holder Release

Design Data

Design Analysis and Calculations

Test Reports

Test Procedure

Formal Tests

Operation and Maintenance Data

Operating Instructions

Operation and Maintenance Manuals

Closeout Submittals

Record Drawings


The project services of the kind indicated being provided by the State Certified Contractor, are to

include but not limited to, supervision of the installation, all necessary balancing and adjustments, and

performance of all testing at the project site.

System Specialist is considered certified when the specialist holds a valid Special Hazards Suppression

Systems, Level IV Certification from the National Institute for Certification in Engineering




Technologies (NICET) 1014-7, or is licensed by the State of NM as a Contractor Class I in accordance

with State statutes and holds a current Certificate of Competency.

Design clean agent extinguishing system as per NFPA 2001. Submit plans and calculations for

approval by the Government before installation. Submit Certificates of Compliance for the following

items showing conformance with the referenced standards contained in this section:

a. Piping Materials and Supports

b. High-Pressure Cylinders

c. Escutcheons

d. Pipe Hangers and Supports

e. Pressure Alarm Switch

f. Internal Cleaning and Swabbing of Pipe

1.4.1 Previous Product Installation

Submit the names, locations, and client contact information of five (5) successful previous projects of

similar size and scope that the installer has constructed using the manufacturer's submitted products for

this project.

1.4.2 Installation Drawings

Annotate clean agent extinguishing system piping layout with reference points for design. In field

wiring diagrams, show locations of devices and points of the system. Prepare working drawings on

sheets not smaller than 30 by 42 inches, in accordance with the requirements for "Plans" as specified in

NFPA 2001. Include data essential to the proper installation of each system. Integrate with alarm and

detection system specified.

1.4.3 Calculations

Submit clean agent discharge calculations verifying total storage requirements, flooding

concentrations, discharge times, flow through the piping network, pipe sizes, and nozzle orifice sizes,

in accordance with the manufacturer's listed design manual and NFPA 2001.

1.4.4 Record Drawings

Upon completion, and before final acceptance of the work, submit a complete set of as-built (record)

working drawings, including complete as-built circuit diagrams, of each clean agent system for record

purposes. Provide record working drawings [no smaller than 30 by 42 inches, reproducible with title

block 8 by 4 inches similar to full size contract drawings in electronic format.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT

Only use UL-listed or FM-approved equipment and devices in the systems.




Design and construct the system as a total-flood system to include a fixed supply of extinguishing

agent connected to properly sized, fixed piping with fittings and nozzles to direct this agent into the

protected area.

2.2 COMPONENTS

2.2.1 Piping

Conceal piping to the maximum extent possible. Inspect and test pipe; receive Contracting Officer

approval before pipe is concealed. Provide only galvanized, ferrous piping, Schedule 40 manifolds and

distribution piping materials conforming to ASTM A53/A53M, nonferrous drawn seamless copper

tubing conforming to ASTM B88, and flexible metallic hose conforming to UL 536.

Provide fittings for changes in direction of piping and for all connections. Reduce pipe sizes in the

fitting. Do not use flush bushings. Fuse brazed joints, when used, with an alloy with a melting point

above 1,000 degrees F.

Provide pipe and fittings having a minimum bursting pressure of 5,000 psi. For 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch

iron pipe size (ips), provide Schedule 40. For 1 inch or greater, use only Schedule 80 pipe. Standard

malleable iron banded fittings or ductile iron fittings are to be used up through 3/4-inch ips. Use extra

heavy malleable iron or ductile iron fittings through 2-inch ips. Use forged steel fittings in all sizes

over 2 inches.

Permanently mark discharge nozzles to identify the nozzle and to show the equivalent single orifice

diameter regardless of shape and number of orifices. Design discharge nozzles to uniformly distribute

the clean agent throughout the hazard area.

2.2.1.1 Pipe Hangers And Supports

Provide pipe hangers and supports conforming to MSS SP-58, adjustable type, zinc-coated. Space as

follows:

Nominal Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Spacing (feet)

1 and under 7

1.25 8

1.5 9

2.0 10

2.5 11

3.0 12

3.5 13

4.0 14

5.0 15




Nominal Pipe Size (inches) Maximum Spacing (feet)

6.0 16

2.2.1.2 Pipe Sleeves

Provide where piping passes through masonry or concrete walls, floors, roofs and partitions. Use

standard weight zinc coated steel pipe sleeves in outside walls below and above grade, in floor, and in

roof slabs. Zinc coat sheet steel sleeves in partitions having a nominal weight of not less than 0.90

pounds per square foot. Ensure space between piping and the sleeve, is not less than 0.5 inch. Use

sleeves of sufficient length to pass through the entire thickness of walls, partitions and slabs. Extend

sleeves in floor slabs 2 inches above the finished floor. Pack space between the pipe and sleeve with

asbestos free insulation and calk at both ends of the sleeve with plastic waterproof cement.

2.2.2 Escutcheons

Provide approved-type escutcheons for piping passing through floors, walls, and ceilings, consisting of

one-piece or split-type. Provide chrome plated escutcheons where pipe passes through finished

ceilings. Other escutcheons may be steel or cast iron, with aluminum paint finish. Securely fasten

escutcheons in place with setscrews or other positive means.

2.3 SUPERVISORY SWITCH

2.3.1 Low Pressure Alarm Switch

Provide the clean agent tanks with a low pressure alarm switch to warn of clean agent tank

depressurization.

2.4 CONTROL PANEL

Provide a separate control panel for the clean agent system. Route all supervision and control through

the facility fire alarm panel.

Provide the suppression system control panel with all components necessary to monitor and supervise

all initiating device circuits. When any detector, manual alarm station (pull box), pressure switch, etc.,

connected to the control panel is activated, activate the control panels visual alarm indication and

audible signal. (This causes all notification appliances to be activated, including all associated

auxiliary control functions.) The control panel is to visually indicate the addressable device or zone in

alarm and transmit an alarm condition to the remote Central Fire Monitoring System. Separate audible

and visual notification appliance circuits. Provide audible and visual notification appliance circuits

having sufficient capacity to operate all devices connected, plus 25 percent minimum spare capacity.

Visual notification appliances are to remain operational until the panel has been reset.

Provide the control panel containing all components necessary to monitor and supervise all supervisory

device circuits. When any valve tamper switch, pressure switch, or other supervisory device connected

to the control panel is activated, they are to activate the control panel supervisory visual indication and

supervisory audible device. The control panel is to visually indicate the addressable device or zone in

supervisory alarm and transmit a supervisory condition to the remote Central Fire Monitoring System.




Provide the control panel containing all components necessary to operate and supervise the circuits for

annunciator panels indicated and auxiliary devices controlling equipment such as ventilating fans, air

handling units, fan coil units, damper motors, solenoids, magnetic door holders, etc. Provide circuits

for auxiliary control relays which are supervised to within 3 feet of the the device controlled in

accordance with NFPA 101. Include a maintenance by-pass switch for all auxiliary control devices.

Supervise the by-pass to report trouble when in the maintenance by-pass position.

Design the panel to monitor and report as trouble, open supervised circuits, ground faulted supervised

circuits, removal of detector or device, removal or failure of control panel module, maintenance by-

pass switch activated, loss of primary power, power supply trouble, low battery voltage, loss of battery

voltage, and activation of the alarm silence switch. All trouble signals are to be identified by initiating,

notification appliance, auxiliary control, or signaling line device. Trouble signals are to activate the

control panel trouble visual indication and trouble audible devices, and send a trouble signal to the

remote Central Fire Monitoring System.

Provide alarm/trouble reset switches to reset a cleared device in alarm or trouble. Alarm or trouble

signals are not to be self-restoring without activating the switch.

Alarm, supervisory, and trouble silence switches are to silence the alarm and trouble audible's. Either

switch placed in other than the normal position is to provide the following:

a. Report as an alarm, supervisory, or a trouble to the Central Fire Monitoring System.

b. Transfer audible signal to a panel lamp visual indication.

c. Re-ring the trouble audible if the problem has been cleared, but the switch has been left in the

silence position.

When the alarm silencing switches are in the silence position, subsequent alarms are to reactivate the

notification appliances, with the strobes remaining operational until the reaction control panel is reset.

Control panel is to be suitable for use with the detectors and manual alarm stations, and other preaction

devices specified in this section.

Provide a control panel having a normally closed set of dry contacts, single pole, double throw (SPDT),

which opens for trouble conditions and a normally open set of dry contacts single pole, double throw

(SPDT), which closes under alarm conditions for connection to the Central Fire Monitoring System.

Provide continuous duty relays with self-cleaning contacts of silver or an alloy of equivalent

performance. Suitably protect supervisory relays against dust by individual covers. For all relays that

provide external functions, such as remote reporting, control device activation, notification appliance

activation, ensure at least one (1) set of space contacts are provided. Permanently mark relays with the

coil resistance, operating-current range, and internal pin connections using standard pin numbers.

Control panel, terminal cabinets and battery cabinets (when used) are to be steel, provided with a

hinged cover and an integral pin-tumbler cylinder lock with removable core that accepts the key

presently in use with other control units existing in the area; lock core is provided by the government.

Paint cabinets with a prime coat and one or more finish coats of scratch-resistant baked enamel.

Provide red finish coat unless otherwise indicated. An etched metal or engraved laminated plastic

identification plate labeled, "Suppression Control Cabinet", is to be permanently affixed to the cabinet




door of the preaction control unit to identity the cabinet as a preaction control system cabinet. For

cabinets painted red, provide an identification plate with white letters on a black background. For

cabinets not painted red, the identification plate is to have white letters on a red background.

Provide a system which operates from a power supply with 120 grounded Vac int and 24 Vdc output,

satisfactorily with power input voltage varying from 85 to 110 percent of nominal value. Ensure that

the power supply output is capable of powering all initiation, signaling, annunciation, and control

devices during alarm condition with 25 percent minimum spare capacity.

2.4.1 Secondary Power Supply

Provide batteries, charger, and power transfer equipment which supplies the means of automatically

supplying the entire preaction system with battery backup power in event of a primary power system

failure, and switches to battery power in the event of AC power failure, and switches back to AC power

upon return of primary power. Provide a control panel which operates when the backup batteries are

disconnected for any reason, and controls charging currents and floating voltage levels to maintain

batteries in optimum condition. Provide capability to recharge batteries in event of discharge. Fuse

wiring to protect against battery over-current and polarity reversal. Primary power, battery, or

charging equipment failure is to activate a preaction control panel trouble signal and visual indication.

2.4.1.1 Storage Batteries

Provide batteries of adequate ampere-hour rating to operate the system under supervisory conditions

for 60 hours, at the end of which time batteries are capable of operating the entire system in a full

alarm condition for not less than 30 minutes. Provide calculations substantiating the battery capacity.

Provide reliable separation between cells to prevent contact between terminals of adjacent cells and

between battery terminals and other metal parts.

Provide sealed and spill-proof battery modules (no corrosive fumes). Utilize only batteries which are

listed for preaction service and suitable for high discharge currents required under alarm conditions,

sized to operate the suppression and detection system (including voice evacuation systems and UV/IR

flame detectors) in normal supervisory condition for 24 hours minimum, then operate the system in the

alarm mode for 5 minutes, minimum.

2.4.1.2 Battery Charger

Provide completely automatic high/low charging rate type charger capable of battery recovery from

full discharge to full charge in 24 hours or less. Provide an ammeter for recording rate of charge and a

voltmeter to indicate the state of battery charge. Provide a red pilot light to indicate when batteries are

manually placed on a high rate of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high-rate switch is provided.

2.5 MANUAL ACTUATION STATIONS

Provide actuation stations for systems at the exits from the protected areas. Ensure manual station

operation causes the control panel to go into full alarm condition and discharge Clean Agent into the

protected area following the adjustable time delay. Provide separate, clearly labeled, manual stations

for control of underfloor discharge and room flooding. Install stations of a type not subject to

operation by jarring or vibration. Ensure stations have a dual action release configuration to prevent

accidental system discharge. Break-glass-front stations are not permitted; however a pull lever break-

glass-rod type is acceptable. Station color is yellow or orange. Place warning signs, "Agent Trade

Name" manual release, at each station indicating that operation of the station initiates immediate Fire




Suppression Agent discharge. Where building fire alarm pull stations are also mounted at the exits

from the protected areas, separated them from Fire Suppression Agent actuation stations by at least 3

feet horizontally, provide labels to clearly distinguish building fire alarm stations from Fire

Suppression Agent stations. Ensure Fire Suppression Agent stations are a different color from building

fire alarm pull stations.

2.6 SMOKE DETECTORS

Design for detection of abnormal smoke densities by the [ionization] [photoelectric] principle.

Necessary control and/or power modules required for operation of the device is integral with the main

control panel. Ensure detectors are compatible with the main control panel provided and are suitable

for use in a supervised circuit. Ensure detectors do not draw power from the initiating circuit. Take

operating power from a separate supervised power supply circuit. Malfunction of the electrical

circuitry to the detector or its control or power units results in the operation of the system trouble

devices. Provide detectors not susceptible to operation by changes in relative humidity. Each detector

contains a visible indicator lamp to show when the unit is activated. Use plug-in type detectors in

which the detector base contains screw terminals for making all wiring connections. Provide remote

indicator lamps for each detector that is located above suspended ceilings, beneath raised floors or

otherwise concealed from view.

2.6.1 Ionization Detectors

Multiple chamber type which is responsive to both visible and invisible products of combustion. The

sensitivity of each detector is field adjustable to compensate for the specific operating conditions.

2.6.2 Photoelectric Detectors

Operate on a multiple cell concept using a light-emitting diode (LED) light source. Failure of the LED

does not cause an alarm condition but operates the detector trouble indicating lamp.

2.6.3 Detector Spacing and Location

Ensure detector spacing and location is in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 72, the

manufacturer's recommendations and the requirements stated herein. Spacing and location of detectors

takes into account the airflow into the room and supply diffusers. Do not place detectors closer than 5

feet from any discharge grille. Spacing of detectors on room ceilings is not to exceed 450 square feet

per detector. Spacing of detectors under raised floors is not to exceed250 square feet per detector.

Mount detectors installed beneath raised floors with the detector base within 2 inches of the underside

of the raised floor framing, with the detector facing downward. Where the space under the raised floor

is less than 12 inches in height, mount detectors with their bases either horizontal or vertical, with the

detection chambers mounted in the upper half of the underfloor space. Under no circumstances, mount

detectors facing upward.

2.7 ALARM SIGNALING DEVICES

Provide each protected area with audible and visual alarms located where shown. Electrically

supervise all alarm circuits. Provide separate and distinct audible and visual pre-discharge and

discharge signals. Where the building is equipped with a separate fire evacuation alarm system, ensure

the discharge signals is distinct from those used by the building fire evacuation system. Provide each

signal device with a rigid plastic or metal identification sign with lettering a minimum of 1.5 inches

high. Label the pre-discharge alarm "FIRE" and the discharge alarm labeled "Fire Suppression Agent




DISCHARGE." Locate post-discharge visual alarms outside all entrances to the protected areas, and

provided with signs reading "Fire Suppression Agent DISCHARGED WHEN FLASHING - DO NOT

ENTER.

2.7.1 Audible Alarms

a. Alarm bells

10 inch surface mounted with matching mounting back box. Install bells of the vibrating type suitable

for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Install bells of the underdome type and produce a sound

output rating of at least 90 decibels at 10 feet.

b. Alarm horns

Provide surface mounted, vibrating type alarm horns suitable for use in an electrically supervised

circuit and have a sound output rating of at least 90 decibels at 10 feet.

2.7.2 Visual Alarms

Surface mounted lamp assembly suitable for use in an electrically supervised circuit. Provide flashing

stroboscopic type lamps, powered from the control panel alarm circuit. Provide lamps with a minimum

of 50 candle power. Flash rate is between 60 and 120 flashes per minute. Protect lamps by a thermo-

plastic lens, red for pre-discharge alarms and blue for discharge alarms.

2.8 MAIN ANNUNCIATOR

Annunciator is integral with the main control panel. Provide separate alarm and trouble lamps for each

zone alarm initiating circuit located on the exterior of the cabinet door or visible through the cabinet

door. Supervision is not be required provided a fault in the annunciator circuits results only in loss of

annunciation and does not affect the normal functional operation of the remainder of the system. Each

lamp provides specific identification of the zone]by means of a permanent label. In no case does zone

identification consist of the words "Zone 1," "Zone 2," etc., but consists of the description of the zone.

2.8.1 Annunciator Panels

a. Remote annunciator panels

Locate as shown. Ensure panel duplicates all requirements specified for the main control panel

annunciator, except that in lieu of individual zone trouble lamps a single common system trouble lamp

may be provided. Provide a panel lamp test switch. Zone identification is by means of permanently

attached rigid plastic or metal plate(s). Provide interior type, flush panel.

2.9 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER RELEASE

Provide where shown. Mount the armature portion on the door and have an adjusting screw for setting

the angle of the contact plate. Wall mount the electro-magnetic release, with a total horizontal

projection not exceeding 4 inches. Ensure all doors release to close upon first stage (pre-discharge)

alarm. Electrical supervision of wiring external of control panel for magnetic door holding circuits is

not required.




2.10 ELECTRICAL WORK

2.10.1 Wiring

Provide control and fire alarm wiring, including connections to fire alarm systems, under this section

and conform to NFPA 70. Wiring for 120 volt circuits is No. 12 AWG minimum. Wiring for low

voltage DC circuits is No. 14 AWG minimum. Color code all wiring. Use rigid metal conduit or

intermediate metal conduit, except electrical metallic tubing may be used in dry locations not enclosed

in concrete and where not subject to mechanical damage.

2.10.2 Operating Power

Power is 120 volts AC service, transformed through a two winding isolation type transformer and

rectified to 24 volts DC for operation of all signal initiating, signal sounding, trouble signal and

tripping circuits. Provide secondary DC power supply for operation of system in the event of failure of

the AC supply. Ensure transfer from normal to emergency power or restoration from emergency to

normal power is fully automatic and not cause transmission of a false alarm. Obtain AC operating

power to control panel and battery charger from the line side of the incoming building power source

ahead of all building services. Provide independent properly fused safety switch, with provisions for

locking the cover and operating handle in the "POWER ON" position for these connections and locate

adjacent to the main distribution panel. Paint switch box red and suitably identify by a lettered

designation.

2.10.3 Conductor Identification

Identify all circuit conductors within each enclosure where a tap, splice or termination is made.

Conductor identification is by plastic coated self sticking printed markers or by heat-shrink type

sleeves. Attach the markers in a manner that does not permit accidental detachment. Properly identify

control circuit terminations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

Install materials and equipment in accordance with NFPA 2001. Provide each system complete and

ready for operation.

Provide each system with an approved pressure-relief device designed to operate between 2,000 and

3,300 psi and located between the storage cylinder manifolds and any normally closed valve.

3.1.1 Warning Signs

Provide 3-layer red-white-red micarta, engraved to show white letters on a red background, warning

signs. Letters are to be uppercase. Warning signs are to be 1/8-inch thick with beveled edges.

3.1.1.1 Inside Control Room

Permanently affix a sign adjacent to every audible/visual alarm activated due to agent discharge,

reading:




WARNING

WHEN THIS STROBE IS LIT,

RELEASE OF FIRE SUPPRESSION AGENT WILL OCCUR WITHIN 60 SECONDS

Make letters for "WARNING" 1-1/2-inch tall, and all other lettering 1-inch tall.

3.1.1.2 Protected Space

Permanently affix a sign adjacent to every audible/visual alarm activated due to agent discharge,

reading:

WARNING

THIS SPACE IS PROTECTED BY A CLEAN AGENT

EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM. DO NOT ENTER

WITHOUT AUTHORIZATION DURING OR

AFTER DISCHARGE. THIS STROBE

INDICATES DISCHARGE.

Make letters for "WARNING" 1-1/2-inch tall, and all other lettering 1-inch tall.

3.1.1.3 Manual Activation or Release Station

Place a sign at every location where manual operation of the system may occur, reading:

WARNING

ACTUATION OF THIS DEVICE WILL CAUSE

FIRE SUPPRESSION GAS TO DISCHARGE. BEFORE

ACTUATING, ENSURE THAT PERSONNEL ARE

CLEAR OF THE AREA.

Make letters for "WARNING" 3/4-inch tall, and all other lettering 3/8-inch tall.

3.1.2 System Control

3.1.2.1 Controls

Provide an electrical and mechanical actuating control system contained in a fire alarm panel.

3.1.2.2 Suppression System Saving/Disconnect Switch

Connect the positive and negative conductors of the Class B solenoid/actuator/electric release head

circuitry in series to a lock switch. Provide and install the switch in an enclosure inside the facility. A

clearly visible sign on the enclosure, or immediately adjacent, is to explicitly indicate its purpose as

"FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM SAFING SWITCH".

3.1.3 Electrical Work

Electrical work is specified in Electrical Sections.




3.1.4 Operating Instructions

Submit Operating Instructions for Clean Agent Fire Protection Systems consisting of raised or

embossed white letter on red rigid plastic or enameled steel background and of adequate size to permit

them to be easily read.

Provide operating instructions at each remote control station. Instructions are to clearly indicate

necessary steps for the operation of the system.

Submit the Operation and Maintenance Manuals 14 days prior to testing the Clean Agent Fire

Protection Systems. Update and resubmit data for final approval no later than 30 days prior to contract

completion.

3.1.5 Field Painting

Touch-up painting is to match equipment manufacturer's original paint.


Conduct testing to determine conformance with the requirements in the presence of the Contracting

Officer.

3.2.1 Test Procedure

Prepare and submit the clean agent system test procedure to the Engineer/Owner for approval 30 days

prior to the planned preliminary tests.

3.2.2 Preliminary Tests

Pneumatically test each piping system at 150 psi gage to ensure no leakage or reduction in gage

pressure after 2 hours. Use the discharge of breathing air from each system discharge nozzle to test

discharge nozzles. Remote control stations, and all other components and accessories are to be tested

individually to demonstrate proper functioning. At the completion of tests and corrections, submit a

signed and dated certificate to the owner attesting to the satisfactory completion of all testing and that

the system is in operating condition.

3.2.3 Formal Tests

At a time to which the owner has agreed, the Engineer and owner will witness formal tests and approve

systems before they are accepted. Ensure the presence of an experienced technician regularly

employed by the system installer during the inspection. At this inspection, repeat any or all of the

required tests, as directed by the Engineer and owner. Suppression agent, instruments, personnel,

appliances, and equipment for testing are to be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. Perform a

fan test witnessed by the Government wherein the enclosure integrity is required to perform in

accordance with NFPA 2001, Annex C.




3.2.4 Manufacturer's Representative

Provide an experienced manufacturer's field engineer to supervise installation and testing of the

system.

END OF SECTION 21 2200



BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 22 0500 - 1

SECTION 22 0500 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Work covered by this Division shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment, supplies and

materials and in performing all operations necessary for the installation of mechanical

systems as required by these specifications and/or shown on the drawings, subject to the

terms and conditions of the contract. The work shall also include the alteration of such

mechanical and electrical details not mentioned or shown which are necessary for the

successful installation of all systems described on the drawings or required by these

specifications.

B. Prior Approvals:

1. Prior Approvals – Most major equipment will require a complete dimensional and

performance submittal for manufacturer’s other than those listed as approved.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Basic Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to Division 21, 22 and 23 work.

Note that the Contractor will also be subject to the Basic Requirements and General

Conditions outlined in other Sections of these Specifications.

B. INDEX – (BREAKDOWN OF SECTIONS)

PART 1. GENERAL

Scope of Work

Section Includes

Index

Related Documents

General Qualifications and Guidelines

Permits, Utility Connections and Inspections

Qualifications

Qualification Procedures

Guarantee – Warranty

Contract Documents

Work Sequence

Submittals and Shop Drawings

Substitutions

Products, Materials and Workmanship

Regulatory Requirements

General Materials and Equipment Requirements

Wall, Floor and Ceiling Plates

Sleeves, Inserts and Fastenings

Electrical Arrangement of Motors and Equipment

Project Site Conditions




Cooperation Between Trades and with Other Contractors

Supervision

Site Observation

Records for Owner

Existing Facilities

Demolition and Relocation

Altitude Ratings

Roof/Equipment Interface

Fire and Smoke Rating Requirements

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

Pipe Pressure Tests

Concrete Bases And Housekeeping Pads

Alignment Of Flexible Couplings

Manufacturer’s Recommendations

Space And Equipment Arrangement

Protection

Installing Methods

Cutting And Patching

Excavation, Trenching And Backfill

Access Doors

Operation Prior To Completion

Cooperation And Clean Up

Clean And Painting

Tests

Log Of Tests

Start-Up And Training

Operation And Maintenance Data


A. Related Sections – Coordinate the requirements of this specification with requirements in

other sections. See other sections including:

1. Specification Sections for Cutting and Patching.

2. Specification Sections for Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples.

3. Specification Sections for Storage and Protection.

4. Specification Sections for Product Options and Substitutions.

5. Specification Sections for Project Record Documents.

6. Specification Sections for Utilities Excavating and Backfilling.

7. Specification Sections for Concrete.

8. Specification Sections for Rough Carpentry.

9. Specification Sections for Flashing and Sheet Metal.

10. Specification Sections for Painting.

11. Specification Sections for Electrical.




B. All work covered by this Section shall be accomplished in accordance with all applicable

provisions of the Contract Documents and any addenda or directives which may be issued

herewith, or otherwise.

C. All work covered by this section shall be accomplished in accordance with all applicable

codes. The Contractor will be expected to be familiar with the codes in addition to practices

and workmanship standard to the industry.

1.4 GENERAL QUALIFICATIONS AND GUIDELINES

A. The Contractor shall be skilled in his trade. The Contractor shall execute all work hereinafter

specified or indicated on accompanying Drawings. Contractor shall provide all equipment

necessary and usually furnished in connection with such work and systems whether or not

mentioned specifically herein or on the Drawings. Contractor’s requirements should be

considered performance based in addition to the prescriptive requirements of these

specifications. It is the general intent that a complete and fully operational system be

provided. The Contractor’s bid for the work shall carry the intent that all systems are

furnished complete and operational unless specifically indicated otherwise.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting the material and apparatus into the building

and shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, to

avoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation and thereby to provide a

neat, integrated, satisfactory, complete and operating installation.

C. The Mechanical, Electrical, and associated Drawings are necessarily diagrammatic by their

nature, and are not intended to show every connection in detail or every pipe or conduit in its

exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of code, industry standard

practice and workmanship, structural and architectural conditions. The Contractor shall

carefully investigate structural and finish conditions and shall coordinate the separate trades

in order to avoid interference between the various phases of work.

D. When the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of

pipe, conduit and ducts, the Contractor shall physically arrange the systems to fit in the space

available at the elevations intended with proper grades for the functioning of the system

involved. Piping, exposed conduit and the duct systems are generally intended to be

installed true and square to the building construction, and located as high as possible against

the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner. The Drawings do not show all required

offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details. Work shall be concealed in all

finished areas with access provided where required for proper operation of the system. See

the section titled “Contract Documents” for further information on this topic.

E. Existing Utilities –

1. The drawings indicate the locations, type and sizes of various utilities

and conditions within the site where known. These utilities and conditions are

indicated as accurately as possible. If the Contractor encounters any utilities during

construction, which are not shown on the drawings, they shall ask for written

instructions from the Engineer. Any relocation or remodeling required will then be

directed by a change order. This Contractor shall assume all responsibility for

protection of all utilities, shown or not, and for repair required by this construction.

2. Contractor shall verify location, size, elevation, pressure and any




other pertinent data of the existing utilities and conditions. Additional costs incurred

due to failure to verify such data and to coordinate associated work with respective

utility providers shall not be the Owner’s responsibility but shall be borne by the

Contractor.

3. All costs associated with providing utilities and conditions including,

but not limited to, inspection fees, abatement fees, permitting fees, boring under

roads, etc., shall be included in the Contractor’s bid price whether such costs are

incurred by contractor or charged by the utility company.

4. Submission of a bid by the Contractor shall be considered an acknowledgment by

the Contractor of his compliance with this section.

5. The Contractor shall coordinate with Owner’s Facility Management, Architect, and

this Engineer’s office any work that has the potential to hinder mechanical and

plumbing services to areas inside or outside this Contract. All shut downs or tie-ins

relating to these systems shall be scheduled and submitted in writing to be approved

by the Owner’s Facility Management, Architect, and this Engineer’s office.

Contractor shall submit in writing a schedule of construction phasing that indicates

areas of first priority during each phase and anticipated completion times. Schedules

shall be submitted a minimum of seven days before commencing work. Owner’s

Facility Management, Architect, and this Engineer’s office shall review these

schedules and notify the Contractor of acceptance prior to commencement of

work.

F. Insurance –

1. The Contractor shall have required insurance. Required insurance shall be provided

by this Contractor for protection against public liability and property damage for

the duration of work.

2. The Contractor shall provide insurance as required in the architectural section of the

specifications.

G. Conflicts and Correction –

1. Promptly correct work rejected or failing to conform to the requirements of the

Contract, whether observed before or after substantial completion and whether or

not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear cost of correcting

such rejected and nonconforming work including additional testing and inspections

and including compensation for observing mechanical and electrical engineering

firm’s services and expenses made necessary thereby.

2. If a conflict occurs on the bid documents, the Contractor shall contact the

Architect’s and Engineer’s offices with a written request for clarification. If the

conflict is un-resolvable at the time of bid, the most expensive interpretation of the

conflict shall be bid so the conflict can be resolved in a deductive manner at a later

time if necessary.

3. If a conflict is discovered during construction, the Contractor shall stop work on that

portion of the project and contact the appropriate party for clarification. The request

for clarification shall be in written form. The Contractor shall bare the burden of

replacing work that has been incorrectly demolished/removed as a result of a

conflict on the drawings where he has not sought the Architect’s and Engineer’s

guidance for clarification.




H. DEFINITIONS (Note: These definitions are included here to clarify the direction and

intention of this specification. The list given here is not by any means complete. For further

clarification as required, Contractor shall contact the designated Owner’s representative.)

1. Concealed/Exposed – Concealed areas are those areas, which cannot be seen by the

building occupants. Exposed areas are all areas, which are exposed to view by the

building occupants, including under counters, inside cabinets and closets, plus all

mechanical rooms. All systems, whether concealed or exposed shall be provided

with access as required for proper operation of the system.

2. General Requirements – Provisions of requirements in Division 1 as well as other

sections, which apply, to the entire work of the Contract and/or project. Basic

Contract definitions are included in the General Conditions.

3. Indicated – The term “indicated” is a cross reference to graphic representations,

notes or schedules on drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the

Specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements on Contract

documents. Where terms such as “shown”, noted”, “scheduled”, and “specified” are

used in lieu of “indicated”, it is for the purpose of helping reader locate the cross

reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

4. Directed, requested, etc. – Where not otherwise explained, terms such as “directed”,

“requested”, “authorized”, “selected”, “approved”, “required”, “accepted, and

“permitted” mean directed by Engineer/Architect, “requested by

Engineer/Architect” and similar phrases. However, no such implied meaning will

be interpreted to extend Engineer’s/Architect’s

responsibility into Contractor’s area of construction supervision and job safety.

5. And/Or – Where “and/or” is used in these Specifications or on the Drawings, it shall

mean “that situations exist where either one or both conditions occur or are required

and shall not be interpreted to permit on option on the part of the Contractor.

6. Approve – Where used in conjunction with Engineer’s/Architect’s response to

submittals, requests, applications, inquiries, reports and claims by Contractor, the

meaning of term approved” will be held to limitations to Engineer’s/Architect’s

responsibilities and duties as specified in General and Supplementary Conditions. In

no case will “approval” by Engineer/Architect be interpreted as a release of

Contractor from responsibilities to fulfill requirements of Contract documents or to

extend Engineer’s/Architect’s responsibility into Contractor’s area of construction

supervision and job safety.

7. As required – Where “as required” is used in these Specifications or on the

drawings, it shall mean “that situations exist that are not necessarily described in

detail or indicated, that may cause the Contractor certain complications in

performing the work described or indicated.

These complications entail the normal coordination activities expected of the

Contractor where multiple trades are involved and new or existing construction

causes deviations to otherwise simplistic approaches to the work to be performed.

The term shall not be interpreted to permit an option on the part of the Contractor to

achieve the end result. The term shall also carry the general requirement that work

be performed with good workmanship and that it result in a complete and

operational system.

8. Furnish – The term “furnish” is used to mean “supply and deliver to project site,

ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.”

9. Where “furnish” applies to work for which the installation is not otherwise

specified, “furnish” in such case shall mean, “furnish and install”.




10. Install – The term “install” is used to describe operations at project site including

“unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring,applying, working to

dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operation.”

11. Provide – The term “provide” means “to furnish and install, complete and ready

for intended use”.

12. Detail – The term “detail” when used in the context of a drawing element used to

isolate the work requirements of a specific element in the project (e.g. Exhaust Fan

Detail), is interchangeable with the terms “diagram”, “schematic”, etc. A Detail is

generally conceptual in nature and is not to be construed as a literal, prescriptive,

comprehensive set of instructions. The responsibility remains with the Contractor

to adapt the information in the drawings to the project such that the work is fully

integrated with all project require drawings to the project such that the work is fully

integrated with all project requirements, fully operational, and performed in a

manner that meets code and generally accepted industry standard practices.

13. Division 15 Disciplines – In various places on the drawings, work is called for to be

done by a certain trade (e.g. Div. 15 Sheet Metal, Div. 15 Controls). These

indications carry with them, the understanding that the project contract is with the

General or Prime Contractor. The ultimate responsibility for the accomplishment of

work lies with the General or Prime Contractor and these indications shall be

regarded as suggestions based on standard practice and discipline competence.

The General or Prime Contractor will be held responsible and shall thus carry the

decision making authority for the accomplishment of all work on the drawings.

1.5 PERMITS, UTILITY CONNECTIONS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Fees and Costs: If, during the course of the construction, a need arises to buy utilities, the

Contractor shall pay all fees attendant thereto. If City or privately owned utility piping or

electrical cable needs to be extended, relocated, or terminated, the Contractor will pay all

permits and construction/inspection fees associated with that particular work. The Contractor

shall remove and properly dispose of all construction waste.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. All mechanics shall be skilled in their respective trade.

B. All welders shall be certified in accordance with the ASME Boiler Test Code, Section IX,

latest issue.

1.7 QUALIFICATION PROCEDURES

A. The storage, handling, and transportation of all refrigerants, oils, lubricants, etc. shall be

accomplished in strict compliance with all State, local, and Federal Regulations including all

requirements set forth by the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) for the safe handling

of regulated refrigerants and materials. The Contractor shall utilize qualified and/or certified

personnel and equipment as prescribed by these requirements. In no situation shall any

refrigerant be discharged to the atmosphere.

1.8 GUARANTEE – WARRANTY

A. The following guarantee is a part of the specifications and shall be binding on the

Contractor:




“The Contractor guarantees that this installation is free from mechanical defects. He agrees

to replace or repair to the satisfaction of the Engineer Architect any part of the installation

that may fail within a period of one year after date established below, provided that such

failure is due to defects in the materials or workmanship or failure to follow the

specifications and drawings. Warranty of the Contractor-furnished equipment or systems

shall begin on the date of substantial completion.”

B. The extent of guarantees or warranties by Equipment and/or Materials Manufacturers shall

not diminish the requirements of the Contractor’s guarantee-warranty to the Owner.

1.9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Compliance: The Contractor shall comply in every respect with all requirements of National

Fire Protection Association, local Fire Department regulations and utility company, and any

other authorities having jurisdiction. In no case does this relieve the Contractor of the

responsibility of complying with these Specifications and Drawings where specified

conditions are of higher quality than the requirements of the above-specified authorities.

Where requirements of the Specifications and Drawings are more lenient than the

requirements of the above authorities having jurisdiction, the

Contractor shall make installations in compliance with the requirements of the above

authorities with no extra compensation.

B. The interrelation of the Specifications, the Drawings, and the schedules are as follows: The

Specifications determine the nature and setting of the various materials, the Drawings

establish the quantities, dimensions and details, and the schedules give the performance

characteristics. If the Contractor requires additional clarification, he shall request it in

writing, following the contractually prescribed information flow requirements.

C. Should the Drawings or Specifications conflict within themselves, or with each other, the

better quality, or greater size or quantity of work or materials shall be performed or

furnished.

D. Capacities of equipment furnished may exceed those specified as long as there is no

detriment to the project as deemed by the Engineer (e.g. short cycling, exceeding electrical

limits). There is no tolerance for shortage of capacity. Equipment must at least meet 100% of

the design condition.

1.10 WORK SEQUENCE

A. The mechanical schedule shall be coordinated with the Owner and Engineer/Architect.

1.11 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS – Procedures

A. General – Within thirty days after the date of Contract award or work order, whichever is

later, and before purchasing or starting installation of materials or equipment, the Contractor

shall submit for review, a complete list of suppliers, contractors and manufacturers for all

materials and equipment which will be submitted for incorporation into the project. The list

shall be arranged in accordance with the organization of the Specifications. This initial list

shall include the manufacturer’s name and type or catalog number as required to identify the

quality of material or equipment proposed. This list will be reviewed by the Engineer and




the Owner and will be returned to the Contractor with comments as to which items are

acceptable without further submittal data and which items will require detailed submittal

data for further review and subsequent approval. The initial list shall be submitted as herein

specified. Materials and equipment requiring detailed submittal data shall be submitted with

sufficient data to indicate that all requirements of these Specifications have been met and

samples shall be furnished when requested. All manufacturer’s data used as part of the

submittal shall have all inapplicable features crossed out or deleted in a manner that will

clearly indicate exactly what is to be furnished and key specified features shall be

highlighted.

B. Products Submittal List: Include Products specified in the following Sections as well as all

equipment listed on the equipment schedules:

a. Specification Section for Piping, Valves and Fittings

b. Specification Section for Sleeves, Flashings, Supports and Anchors

c. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification

d. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping

e. Specification Section for Ductwork

f. Specification Section for Ductwork Accessories

C. Timeliness – The burden of timeliness in the complete cycle of submittal data, shop

drawings, and sample processing is on the Contractor. The Contractor shall allow a

minimum of two (2) weeks time frame for review of each submission by the office of the

design discipline involved after receipt of such submissions by that design discipline. The

Contractor is responsible for allowing sufficient time in the construction schedule to cover

the aforementioned cycles of data processing, including time for all re-submittal cycles on

unacceptable materials, equipment, etc. covered by the data submitted. Construction delays

and/or lack of timeliness in the above regard are the responsibility of the Contractor and will

not be considered in any request for scheduled construction time extensions and/or

additional costs to the Owner.

D. All equipment installed on this project shall have local representation; local factory

authorized service, and a local stock of repair parts.

E. Acceptance of materials and equipment will be based on manufacturer’s published data and

will be tentative subject to the submission of complete shop drawings indicating compliance

with the Contract documents and that adequate and acceptable clearance for entry, servicing,

and maintenance will exist. Acceptance of materials and equipment under this provision

shall not be construed as authorizing any deviations from the Specifications, unless the

attention of the Engineer has been directed in writing to the specific deviations. Data

submitted shall not contain unrelated information unless all pertinent information is properly

identified.

F. Submittals

1. Submit shop drawings and product data grouped to include complete submittals of

related systems, products, and accessories in a single submittal.

2. Mark dimensions and values in units to match those specified. Highlight and provide

drawing and specification references for all features and values. Inapplicable features

shall be crossed out.




a. Submittals shall be grouped and submitted in a three ring binder in a manner

where all project submittals can be kept under one cover. Supplemental

submittal information shall be marked and dated for coordination with the

original submittal, including Engineer’s comments and referencing.

G. Fabrication Shop Drawings

1. Submit Shop Drawings whenever (1) equipment proposed varies in physical size and

arrangement from that indicated on the Drawings. Rearrangement of equipment as laid

out, will only be considered as a last resort. Submitting on equipment that does not

properly fit is cause for rejection. Requests to rearrange must be forwarded to the

Engineer before submitting. The Contractor shall provide detailed drawings of any space

approved for rearrangement, (2) where tight spaces require extreme coordination

between ductwork, piping, conduit, and other equipment, (3) where called for elsewhere

in these Specifications; and (4) where specifically requested by the Engineer.

Fabrication Drawings shall be made at no additional charge to the Owner or the

Engineer. Shop drawings shall be required for duct, piping, structural and architectural

coordination at all air handling unit locations to indicate all runs to and from these units.

Shop drawings shall also be required for piping layout in the mechanical rooms.

2. Eight (unless otherwise indicated) complete sets of coordination drawings shall be

submitted to the Engineer prior to the scheduled start of the work in the area illustrated

by the drawings, for the purpose of showing the Contractor’s planned method of

installation. The objectives of such drawings are to promote carefully planned work

sequence and proper coordination, in order to assure the expeditious solutions of

problems, and the installation of lines and equipment as contemplated by the Contract

documents while avoiding or minimizing additional costs to the Contractor and to the

Owner.

3. In the event the Contractor, in coordinating the various installations and in planning the

method of installation, finds a conflict in location or elevation of any of the mechanical

systems, with the structural items or with other construction items, such conflicts shall

immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer.

1.12 SUBTITUTIONS

A. It is not the intent of the Drawings and/or Specifications to discriminate against an

“approved equal” product as produced by another manufacturer. However, the list

manufacturers are known acceptable providers. Substitutions will require prior approval 10

days prior to bid date. Prior approval requests shall be done in “Submittal” format indicating

complete dimensional, capacity, and specification data. Approvals will be listed by

Addendum. Specific manufacturer’s products are mentioned to set a definite standard for

acceptance and to serve as a reference in comparison with other products. The successful

manufacturer or supplier shall meet all of the provisions of the appropriate specification(s)

and shall also be held to the reasonable standard of the specified manufacturer’s product.

B. When a manufacturer’s name appears in these Specifications, it is not to be construed that

the manufacturer is unconditionally acceptable as a provider of equipment for this project.

Nor should the named manufacturer infer that he is exempt from any specified requirement.

C. The specified products have been used in preparing the Drawings and Specifications and

thus establish minimum qualities with which substitutes must at least equal to be considered




acceptable. The burden of proof of equality rests with the Contractor. The decision of the

designer is final.

D. When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall provide a sample of the proposed

substitute item. In some cases, samples of both the specified item and the proposed item

shall be provided for comparison purposes.

E. Should a substitution be accepted, and should the substitute material prove defective, or

otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended within the guarantee period, this material or

equipment shall be replaced with the material or equipment specified at no additional cost to

the Owner.

F. If a proposed substitution has been rejected a third time, it will no longer be considered.

Further considerations on the equipment item shall be with the specified item or pre-

approved equal.

1.13 PRODUCTS, MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be new, free from all defects, suitable for the

intended use, and of the best quality of their respective kinds. Materials and equipment shall

be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the best standard

practice for the type of work involved. All work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in

their respective trades, and the installations shall provide a neat, precise appearance.

Materials and/or equipment damaged in shipment or otherwise damaged prior to installation

shall not be repaired at the job site but shall be replaced with new materials and/or

equipment.

B. The responsibility for the furnishing of the proper equipment and/or material and seeing that

it is installed as intended by the manufacturer, rests entirely upon the Contractor who shall

request advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of specific manufacturers

during the installation. The Contractor shall not begin work on any item without a work plan

that includes a scheme for a complete and operational system.

Flame Spread Properties Of Materials – Materials and adhesives incorporated in this project

shall conform to NFPA Standard 255 (1984), "Method of Test of Surface Burning

Characteristics of Building Materials". The classification shall not exceed a flame spread

rating of 25 for all materials, adhesives, finishes, etc., specified for each system, and shall

not exceed a smoke developed rating of 50.

1.14 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS:

The following agencies of jurisdiction, codes, standards, and industry specifications should be

considered integral parts of the project documents. The Contractor will be expected to be familiar

with and to adhere to the requirements of this information.

A. It is required that the installation shall meet the minimum standards prescribed in the latest

editions of the following listed codes and standards, which are made a part of these

Specifications. All referenced codes and standards shall be those current at the date of issue

of the design documents.




B. National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA) –

1. NFPA No. 54, Gas Appliances, Piping, National Fuel Gas Code.

2. NFPA No. 70, National Electrical Code.

3. NFPA No. 101, Life Safety Code.

4. NFPA No. 258, Standard Research Test Method for Determining Smoke

Generation of Solid Materials.

C. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) –

1. A40.8, National Plumbing Code.

2. B31.1, Power Piping.

3. B9.1, Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

D. American Gas Association Publications (AGA) – Directory of Approved Gas Appliances

and Tested Accessories.

E. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute Standards (ARI) – All standards related to

refrigeration and air conditioning equipment and piping furnished under these

Specifications.

F. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) – All

current editions of applicable manuals and standards (See Sections 15890 and 15910).

G. Air Moving and Conditioning Association (AMCA) – All current editions of applicable

manuals and standards.

H. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) – All current editions of applicable manuals

and standards.

I. National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA) – All current editions of applicable

manuals and standards.

J. City of local Fire Departments as may be applicable to construction on these sites.

K. Uniform Building Code (includes the Uniform Mechanical and Uniform Plumbing Codes).

L. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

M. ADA and ANSI Standards – All work shall be in accord with all regulations and

requirements of the Standards and Specifications for Handicapped and Disabled for the

Construction of Public Buildings and Facilities in the State of Texas Usable by Physically

Handicapped and Disabled persons, ANSI Standards and the requirements of the American

Disabilities Act.

N. Underwriter’s Laboratory, Inc. (UL)

O. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA)

P. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)




Q. Refer to Specification Sections hereinafter bound for additional Codes and Standards.

R. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable State and National codes,

Specifications, and industry standards. In all cases where Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

have established standards for a particular type material, such material shall comply with

these standards. Evidence of compliance shall be the UL "label" or "listing" under

Re-Examination Service.

S. The Contract Documents are intended to comply with the aforementioned rules and

regulations; however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discrepancies occur, the

Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer/Architect in writing of said discrepancies

and apply for an interpretation. Should the discovery and notification occur after the

execution of a contract, any additional work required for compliance with said regulations

shall be paid for as covered by Division 1 of these Contract Documents, providing no work

of fabrication of materials has been accomplished in a manner of noncompliance. Should

the Contractor fabricate and/or install materials and/or workmanship in such a manner that

does not comply with the applicable codes, rules and regulations, the Contractor who

performed such work shall bear all costs arising in correcting these deficiencies to comply

with said rules and regulations.

1.15 GENERAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Storage at Site: The Contractor shall not receive material or equipment at the job site until

there is suitable space provided to properly protect equipment from rust, drip, humidity, and

dust damage.

B. Capacities shall be not less than those indicated, but shall otherwise be such that no

component or system becomes inoperative or is damaged because of startup or other

overload or underload conditions.

C. Conformance with Agency Requirements: Where materials or equipment are specified to be

approved, listed, tested, or labeled by the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or constructed

and/or tested in accordance with the standards of the American Society of Mechanical

Engineers or the Air Moving and Conditioning Association, or any similar listing or testing

requirement, the Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished under this Section of

the Specifications conform to such requirements. For example, the label of the Underwriters

Laboratories, Inc., applied to the item will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items

conform to such requirements. The ASME stamp or the AMCA label will be acceptable as

sufficient evidence that the items conform to the respective requirements.

D. Nameplates: Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name,

address, and catalog number on a plate securely attached to the item of equipment. All data

on nameplates shall be legible at the time of Final Inspection.

E. Prevention of Rust: Standard factory finish will be acceptable on equipment specified by

model number; otherwise, surfaces of ferrous metal shall be given a rust inhibiting coating.

The treatment shall withstand 200 hours in salt spray fog test, in accordance with Method

6061 of Federal Standard No. 141. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen

shall show no signs of wrinkling or cracking and no signs of rust creepage beyond 1/8" on

either side of the scratch mark. Where rust inhibitor coating is specified hereinafter, any

treatment that will pass the above test is acceptable unless a specific coating is specified




except that coal tar or asphalt type coating will not be acceptable unless so stated for a

specific item. Where steel is specified to be hot-dip galvanized, mill-galvanized sheet steel

may be used provided all raw edges are painted with a zinc-pigmented paint conforming to

Military Specification MIL-P-26915.

F. Protection from Moving Parts: Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews,

keys, and other rotating parts shall be fully enclosed or properly guarded for personnel

protection.

G. Verification of Dimensions: The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and

proper relation of his work to the building structure and to the work of all trades. The

Contractor shall visit the premises and become thoroughly familiar with all details of the

work and working conditions, to verify all dimensions in the field, and to advise the

Engineer of any discrepancy before performing any work. Adjustments to the work required

in order to facilitate a coordinated installation shall be made at no additional cost to the

Owner or the Engineer.

1.16 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES

A. See Specification Section for Supports and Anchors

1.17 SLEEVES, INSERTS, AND FASTENINGS

A. See Specification Section for Supports and Anchors

1.18 ELECTRICAL ARRANGEMENT OF MOTORS AND EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor shall note that the electrical design and Drawings are based on the equipment

scheduled and indicated on the Drawings, and should any mechanical equipment be

provided requiring changes to the electrical design, the required electrical changes shall be

made at no cost to the Owner.

B. The Electrical Trades shall provide all interconnecting wiring for the installation of all power

to equipment. By code, all equipment must be served and protected by proper electrical

equipment such as disconnect switches and starters. Further, it is the intent of the design that

all equipment be served and protected in a manner that meets code. All combination

starters, individual starters, disconnect switches and other motor starting and safety

apparatus not specifically scheduled or specified as provided by the equipment manufacturer

under the scope of Division 15, or otherwise indicated under the scope of Division 16, shall

be implied to be furnished with these components under Division 15.

1.19 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Install Work in locations shown on Drawings, unless prevented by Project conditions. Notify

the Engineer if site conditions indicate that locations should be changed.

B. In the event that changes are necessary, prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement

of Work to meet Project conditions, including changes to Work specified in other Sections.

See section on fabrication shop drawings for additional requirements on this item. Obtain

permission of Owner before proceeding.




1.20 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES AND WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

A. The Contractor shall be familiar with and responsible for mechanical requirements that may

appear throughout the entirety of the specifications and drawings. Each trade, subcontractor,

and/or Contractor must work in harmony with the various other trades, subcontractors and/or

Contractors on the job as may be required to facilitate the progress to the best advantage of

the job as a whole. Each trade, subcontractor, and/or Contractor must pursue its work

promptly and carefully so as not to delay the general progress of the job. This Contractor

shall work in harmony with Contractors working under other contracts on the premises.

1.21 SUPERVISION

A. Each Contractor and subcontractor shall keep a competent superintendent or foreman on the

job at all times. Only licensed master, journeyman and helpers shall be allowed to perform

the work.

B. It shall be the responsibility of each superintendent to study all Drawings and familiarize

himself with the work to be done by other trades. He shall coordinate his work with other

trades and before material is fabricated or installed, make sure that his work will not cause

an interference with another trade. Where interferences are encountered, they shall be

resolved at the job site by the superintendents involved. Where interferences cannot be

resolved without major changes to the Drawings, the matter shall be referred to the A/E for

ruling.

1.22 SITE OBSERVATION

A. Site observation by the Engineer/Architect is for the express purpose of verifying

compliance by the Contractor with the Contract Documents, and shall not be construed as

construction supervision nor indication of approval of the manner or location in which the

work is being performed, or as being a safe practice or place.

1.23 RECORDS FOR OWNER

A. The Contractor shall maintain a set of “blueline” prints in the Field Office for the sole

purpose of recording “demolition” conditions. Daily note all changes made in these

Drawings in connection with the final project condition including exact dimensioned

locations of all underground utilities, services and systems affected by the work and all

uncovered existing active and inactive piping related to the building.

B. At Contract completion the Contractor shall provide a set of reproducible drawings. The

Contractor shall transfer the information from the “blueline” prints maintained as described

above, and turn over this neatly marked set of reproducible Drawings representing the “as

installed” work to the Engineer/Architect for verification and subsequent transmittal to the

Owner. These Drawings shall include as a minimum:

1. Addendum written drawing changes.

2. Addendum supplementary drawings.

3. Accurate, dimensioned locations of all underground utilities, services and systems.

4. Identification of equipment work shown on Alternates as to whether alternates were

accepted and work actually performed.

5. Change Order written Drawing changes.




6. Change Order supplementary Drawings.

C. In addition to the above, the Contractor shall accumulate during the progress of the job, 3

copies of the following data, prepared in a neat brochure or packet folder and turned over to

the Engineer for review, and subsequent delivery to the Owner.

1. All warranties, guarantees, and manufacturer’s directions on equipment and material

covered by the Contract.

2. Four (4) sets of operating and maintenance instructions for heating and cooling and

other mechanical and electrical systems. Instructions shall also include

recommended preventative maintenance and seasonal changeover procedures.

3. Valve tag charts and diagrams specified herein.

4. Control diagrams representing “as installed” conditions.

5. Certifications of tests such as piping system pressure tests, backflow prevention

certification and required factory testing of equipment.

6. Copies of approved Shop Drawings.

7. Any an all other data and/or Drawings required as submittals during construction.

8. Repair parts list of all major items and equipment including name, address and

telephone number of local supplier or agent.

9. Testing and Balancing Report.

10. “As-Built Drawings.”

11. Documentation on Start-up and Training.

D. All of the above data shall be submitted to the Engineer/Architect for approval, and shall be

corrected as instructed by the Engineer/Architect before submission of the final request for

payment.

1.24 EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities caused by

him and his workmen, and shall be responsible for repairing or replacing such loss or

damage. The Contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, and

perform other services required for the care, protection and in service maintenance of all

plumbing, heating, air conditioning, and ventilating services for the existing facility. The

Contractor shall erect temporary barricades, with necessary safety devices, as required to

protect personnel from injury, removing all such temporary protection upon completion of

the work.

B. The Contractor shall provide temporary or new services to all existing facilities as required

to maintain their proper operation when normal services are disrupted as a result of the work

being accomplished under this project.

C. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access to existing

utilities, Contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, light fixtures,

air conditioning ductwork and equipment, etc., to provide this access and shall reinstall same

upon completion of work in the areas affected.

D. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are indicated to be

removed, all Contractors shall remove and reinstall in locations approved by the Engineer all

devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existing




construction. This is to include but is not limited to temperature controls system devices,

electrical switches, relays, fixtures, piping, conduit, etc.

E. Outages of services as required by the new installation will be permitted but only at a time

approved by the Owner. The Contractor shall allow the Owner two weeks in order to

schedule required outages. The time allowed for outages will not be during normal working

hours unless otherwise approved by the Owner. All costs of outages, including overtime

charges, shall be included in the contract amount.

1.25 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION

A. The Contractor shall modify, remove, and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated on

the Drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. All removals and/or

dismantling shall be conducted in a manner as to produce maximum salvage. Salvage

materials shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be delivered to such destination

or otherwise disposed of as directed by the Owner. Materials and/or items scheduled for

relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassembly operations shall be

repaired and restored to good operative condition. The Contractor may, at his discretion,

and upon the approval of the Owner, substitute new materials and/or items of like design and

quality in lieu of materials and/or items to be relocated.

B. All items, which are to be relocated, shall be carefully removed in reverse to original

assembly or placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean, repair, and

provide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocations

and to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmen

skilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved.

C. When items scheduled for relocation and/or reuse are found to be in damaged condition

before work has been started on dismantling, the Contractor shall call the attention of the

Owner to such items and receive further instructions before removal. Items damaged in

repositioning operations are the Contractor's responsibility and shall be repaired or replaced

by the Contractor as approved by the Owner, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Service lines to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed to points

indicated on the Drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines not

scheduled for reuse shall be removed to the points at which reuse is to be continued or

service is to remain. Such services shall be sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-off or

disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Owner. All disconnections or connections

into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result in minimum

interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas or facilities,

which must remain in operation during the construction period, shall not be interrupted

without prior specific approval of the Owner as hereinbefore specified.

1.26 ALTITUDE RATINGS

A. Unless otherwise noted, all specified equipment capacities are for actual site altitude above

sea level and adjustments to manufacturer’s ratings must be made accordingly.

1.27 ROOF/EQUIPMENT INTERFACE




A. Piping – Penetration shall be accomplished with factory-made assemblies designed

specifically for the purpose. The use of pitch pans or pitch pockets is not allowed.

B. Ductwork without Equipment – Unless otherwise indicated, penetration shall be

accomplished with a factory-made insulated roof curb designed for use as duct penetration

through roof.

C. Ductwork with Equipment – Each piece of roof mounted equipment such as packaged

rooftop air conditioners, air handlers, shall be provided and installed with an insulated roof

curb designed to mate with the equipment and provide a weatherproof enclosure. In the

event that pre-insulated curb is not available, an un-insulated curb is acceptable if the

Contractor provides and installs field insulation per the manufacturer’s instructions.

Contractor shall coordinate the roof curb(s) with the Roofing Contractor for installation.

D. General – All roof flashing assemblies, equipment supports and roof curbs shall be closely

coordinated with other work through the Roofing Contractor to insure that the flashing,

canting, insulation type, installation and location, etc., is correct and appropriate for the

particular roof construction type.

E. Each roof curb shall be selected and provided so that the top of the curb shall be level after

installation. The curb shall provide a minimum clearance of 10 inches between the top of the

finished roof surface and the top of the wood nailer, continuous around the curb perimeter

unless noted otherwise.

F. Each roof penetration location shown on the drawing is approximate. Refer to the

Architectural and Structural drawing for the structural openings. Refer to cutting and

patching section of this Specification for more information.

G. Provide each roof curb with other options as scheduled on the drawings.

1.28 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor shall review and become familiar with all the project documents as they

pertain to fire and smoke rating requirements.

B. All penetrations of fire or smoke barriers shall be sealed with dampers, sleeves (if any),

insulation (if any), and vibration isolation (if any) that maintain the fire or smoke resistance

of the barrier in accordance with the latest edition of NFPA 101 Life Safety Code.

C. Contractor shall verify locations and type of all partition penetrations from the drawings.

Sealing material and methods shall be per UL recommendations.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS – Not Used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE PRESSURE TESTS

A. See the Specification Sections relevant to each type piping system for testing requirements

of the system. Also comply with any code required testing procedures.




B. Where leaks occur, the pipe shall be repaired and the tests repeated. No leaks shall be

corrected by peening. Defective piping joints shall be removed and replaced.

C. The Engineer shall be notified in advance of the tests so that the test can be witnessed. Tests

shall be performed with a chart recorder and charts shall be submitted to the Engineer.

D. These test requirements shall be considered in concert with the requirements indicated in

sections specific to these systems.

3.2 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

A. The manufacturer's published directions shall be followed in the delivery, storage,

protection, installation, piping, wiring, start-up, testing and operation of all equipment and

material. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer, in writing, of any conflict

between the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturers' directions, and

shall obtain the Engineer’s instructions before proceeding with the work. Should the

Contractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturers' directions

or such instructions from the Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with the

deficiencies.

3.3 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT

A. The size of mechanical and electrical equipment indicated on the Drawings is based on the

dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may be acceptable, it is

the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment he proposes to furnish will

fit in the space. Fabrication Shop Drawings shall be prepared when required by the

Engineer or Owner to indicate a suitable arrangement (see other specification sections

related to fabrication shop drawings.

B. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves,

motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allow

removal for service without disassembly of another part and incompliance with code.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly

protect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until the

completion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters

and supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from the weather,

the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of the

construction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other

protective covering; the installation of electric heaters in electrical switchgear and similar

equipment to prevent moisture damage. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with

the above will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question.

B. Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finished

floors, step treads, and finished surfaces shall be covered to prevent any damage by

workmen or their tools and equipment during the construction of the building.




C. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any

equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final inspection must be

cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these Specifications.

D. The contract shall also protect the facility in general. For example, damage to the facility

caused by an unprotected roof opening or wall penetration will be the responsibility of this

Contractor.

3.5 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. Where to Conceal: All pipes, conduits, etc., shall be concealed in pipe chases, walls, furred

spaces, or above the ceilings of the building unless otherwise indicated. Suitable access shall

be provided at all access points such as service valves.

B. Where to Expose: In mechanical rooms, janitor's closets tight against pan soffits in exposed

"Tee" structures, or storage spaces, but only where necessary, piping may be run exposed.

All exposed piping shall be run in the most aesthetic, inconspicuous manner, and parallel or

perpendicular to the building lines.

C. Support: All piping, ducts and conduits shall be adequately and properly supported from the

building structure by means of hanger rods or clamps to walls as herein specified.

D. Maintaining Clearance: Where limited space is available above the ceilings below concrete

beams or other deep projections, pipe and conduit shall be sleeved through the projection

where it crosses, rather than hung below them in a manner to provide maximum above-floor

clearance. Sleeves shall be as herein specified. Approval shall be obtained from the

Engineer for each penetration not indicated in the Contract Documents.

E. All pipe, conduits, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building

and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All ducts, pipes and conduits

run exposed in machinery and equipment rooms shall be installed parallel to the building

lines, except that piping, flues, etc., shall be sloped to obtain the proper pitch. Piping, and

ducts run in furred ceilings, etc., shall be similarly installed, except as otherwise shown. All

pipe openings shall be kept closed until the systems are closed with final connections.

1. Prior to the installation of any ceiling material, gypsum, plaster or acoustical board,

the Contractor shall notify the construction supervisor so that arrangement can be

made for an inspection of the above-ceiling area about to be “sealed” off. The

Contractor shall give as much advance notice as possible no less than ten (10)

working days.

2. All above-ceiling areas will be subject to an inspection before ceiling panels are

installed, or installation is otherwise concealed from view. All mechanical and

electrical work at and above the ceiling, including items supported by the ceiling

grid, such as air inlets or outlets and lighting fixtures, shall be complete and installed

in accordance with Contract requirements, including power to lighting fixtures, fans,

and other powered items. Adequate lighting shall be provided to permit thorough

inspection of all above-ceiling items. Areas to be included and time of inspection

shall be coordinated with the Engineer.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING




A. General: Cut and patch walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existing construction.

Coordinate all cutting and patching with the requirements of the Engineer/Architect. Any

mention of “repair, restoration, replacement.” in the following sections apply to only those

areas described by architect to remain after the demolition portion of this project is complete.

B. Methods of cutting: Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with

masonry saws and/or core drills and at such locations acceptable to the Engineer/Architect.

Impact-type equipment shall not be used except where specifically acceptable to the

Engineer/Architect. Openings in pre-cast concrete slabs for pipes, conduits, outlet boxes,

etc., shall be core drilled to exact size.

C. Restoration: All openings shall be restored to "as-new" condition under the appropriate

Specification Section for the materials involved, and shall match remaining surrounding

materials and/or finishes. Coordinate all finish work with the requirements of the

Engineer/Architect.

D. Masonry: Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other

structural supports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided

during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the

operation. All structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and

shall be installed in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.

E. Plaster: All mechanical work in areas containing plaster shall be completed prior to the

application of the finish plaster coat. Cutting of finish plaster coat will not be permitted.

F. Special Note: No cutting, boring, or excavating, which will weaken the structure, shall be

undertaken.

3.7 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILL:

A. Excavation (See Division 0 and 1 for special requirements related to

excavation and trenching):

1. The Contractor shall thoroughly review the entire project set for site excavation

work. The contractor shall note coordination items such as structural elements and

site drainage and submit points of concern to the architect.

2. The Mechanical and Electrical subcontractors shall perform all excavations of every

description, for their particular installations and of whatever substances

encountered, to the depths indicated on the Drawings and/ or required for the

installation of piping, conduit, utility systems, etc. All exterior lines shall be

installed with a minimum cover of 24”, unless otherwise indicated. Generally, more

cover shall be provided if grade will permit. All excavation materials not required

for backfill or fill shall be removed and wasted as acceptable to the Construction

Inspector. All excavations shall be made only by open cut. The banks of trenches

shall be kept as nearly vertical as possible and where required, shall be properly

sheeted and braced. Trenches shall be not less than 12” wider nor more than 16”

wider than the outside edges of the pipe to be laid therein, and shall be excavated

true to line so that a clear space no t less than 6” or more than 8” in width is

provided on each side of the pipe. For sewers, the maximum width of trench

specified applies to the width at and below the level may be made as wide as

necessary for sheeting and bracing, and the proper installation of the work.




3. The bottom of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide proper fall and

uniform bearing and support for each section of the pipe on undisturbed soil or 2” if

sand fill at every point along its entire length, except for portions of the pipe

sections where it is necessary to excavate for bell holes and for the proper sealing of

pipe joints. Bell holes shall be dug after the trench bottom has been graded. Where

inverts are not shown, grading shall be determined by the National Plumbing Code

for the service intended and the size used. Bell holes for sewer title and water pipe

shall be excavated only to an extent sufficient to permit accurate work I the making

of the joints and to insure that the pipe, for a maximum of its length, will rest upon

the prepared bottom of the trench. Depressions for joints other than bell-and spigot

shall be made in accordance with the recommendations of the joint manufacturer for

the particular type of joint used. In general, grading for electrical ductbanks and

conduits shall be from building to manhole, and from a high point between

manholes to each manhole. Special pipe beds shall be provided as specified

hereinafter.

4. The lower 4” of the pipe trenches measuring from an overhead line set parallel to

the grade line of the sewer shall be excavated only a few feet in advance to the pipe

laying, by men especially skilled in this type of work. Where damage is likely to

result from withdrawing sheeting, the sheeting shall be left in place. Expect at

locations where excavation of rock

from the bottom of trenches is required, care shall be taken not to excavate below

the depths required. Where rock excavation is required, the rock shall be excavated

to a minimum overdepth of 6” below the trench depths specified. The overdepth

rock excavation and all excess trench excavation shall be properly supporting the

pipe is encountered in the trench bottom, such soil shall be remove to a depth and

for the trench lengths required, and then backfilled to trench bottom grade, as

hereinafter specified, with sand.

5. All grading in the vicinity of excavation shall be controlled to prevent surface

ground water from flowing into the excavations. Any water accumulated in the

excavations shall be removed by pumping or other acceptable method. During

excavation, material suitable for backfilling shall be stacked in an orderly manner a

sufficient distance back from edges of trenches to avoid overloading and prevent

slides or cave-ins. Material unsuitable for backfilling shall be wasted and removed

form the job site as directed by the Construction Inspector.

6. All shoring and sheeting required to perform and protect the excavations and to

safeguard employees and/ or adjacent structures shall be provided.

7. Excavate as required under the building in order that all piping, ductwork, etc., shall

clear the structure a minimum of 12” for a distance of 24” on either side. Edges of

such excavations shall slope at an angle of not over 45 degrees with the horizontal

unless otherwise approved by the Construction Inspector. The bottom of such

excavation shall be graded to drain in a manner acceptable to the Construction

Inspector.

8. Trenches for cast iron drain, storm, water and sewer lines inside the building shall

be properly excavated, following, in general, the procedures set out of r exterior

lines. Where floors are to be poured over these lines, they shall be backfilled,

tamped and settled with water. Where no flooring is to cover the lines, they shall be

backfilled to form a level grade.

9. All surplus materials removed in these trenching operations becomes the property of

the contractor, and shall be disposed of at the expense of the contractor, at a legal

disposal site, off the site.




B. Backfilling:

1. Trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed and until

piping, utilities systems, etc., as installed are certified by the Owner’s inspector to

conform to the requirements specified hereinafter. The trenches shall be carefully

backfilled with sand to a depth of 12 inches above the top of the pipe. The next

layer and subsequent layers of backfill may be excavated material approved for

backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel, soft shale, or

other approved materials free from large clods of earth or stones larger than 1 ½” in

diameter, flooded until the pipe has cover of not less than one foot. The remainder

of the backfill material shall then be thrown into the trenches, moistened, and

tamped or flooded in one foot layers. Blasted rock, broken concrete or pavement,

and large boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Any trenches improperly

boulders shall not be used as backfill material. Any trenches improperly backfilled,

or where settlement occurs, shall be reopened to the depth required for proper

compaction, then refilled and mounded over, and smoothed out.

2. Backfill under concrete slabs-on-fill shall be as specified above, shall be gravel, or

shall be other such materials more suitable for the application. Installation and

compaction shall be as required for compatibility with adjacent materials.

C. Opening and Reclosing Pavement and Lawns: Where excavation requires the opening of

existing walks, streets, drives, other existing pavement, or lawns, such surfaces shall be cut

as required to install new lines and to make new connections to existing lines. The sized of

the cut shall be held to a minimum, consistent with the work to be accomplished. After the

installation of the new work is completed and the excavation has been backfilled and

flooded, the area shall be patched, using materials to match those cut out. The patches shall

thoroughly bond with the original surfaces and shall be level with them, and shall meet all

the requirements established by the authorities having jurisdiction over such areas.

D. Excavation in Vicinity of Trees: All trees including low hanging limbs within the

immediate area of construction shall be adequately protected to a height of at least 5ft. to

prevent damage from the construction operations and/ or equipment. All excavation within

the outermost limb radius of all trees shall be accomplished with extreme care. All roots

located within this outermost limb radius shall be brought to the attention of the

Construction Inspector before they are cut or damaged in any way. All stumps and roots

encountered in the excavation, which are not within the outermost limb radius of existing

trees, shall be cut back to a distance of not less than 18” form the outside of any concrete

structure or pipeline. No chips, parts of stumps and roots have been cut out of the

excavation, clean compacted dyr bank sand shall be backfilled and tamped.

3.8 ACCESS DOORS

A. General: This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to

all concealed items of mechanical equipment or devices.

B. Doors: Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be of Milcor (Inland-Ryerson

Construction Products Company) manufacture, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style M or

DW for non-plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finished surface of

the door is even with the finished surface of the adjacent finishes. Access doors mounted on

tile surfaces shall be of similar construction as noted above, except they shall be of stainless




steel materials. Access doors shall be a minimum of 12" x 12" in size, but will otherwise be

required to provide full and free access such that valves fully stroke, equipment doors open

fully, and all service points on the equipment can be reached and parts can be replaced.

3.9 OPERATION PRIOR TO COMPLETION

A. When any piece of mechanical equipment is operable and it is to the advantage of the

Contractor to operate the equipment, he may do so, providing that he follows the

recommended start-up procedures, and properly supervises the operation, and has the Owner

and Engineer’s written permission to do so. The warranty period, however, shall not

commence until the equipment is operated for the beneficial use of the Owner, or date of

substantial completion, whichever occurs first.

B. Regardless of whether or not the equipment has or has not been operated, the contractor shall

properly clean the equipment, install clean filter media, properly adjust, and complete all

deficiency list items before final acceptance by the Owner. The date of acceptance and

performance certification will be the same date.

3.10 CHECKING AND TESTING MATERIALS AND/OR EQUIPMENT

A. Before the work is accepted, an authorized representative of the manufacturer of the installed

materials and/or equipment shall personally inspect the installation, start-up and operation of

his materials and/or equipment to determine that it is properly installed and in proper

operating order. The representative shall also conduct training sessions for each piece of

equipment as required by the Owner. The qualifications of the representative shall be

appropriate to the technical requirement of the installation. The qualifications of the

representative shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The decision of the Engineer

concerning the appropriateness of the representative shall be final. Testing and checking

shall be accomplished during the course of the work where required by work being

concealed, and at the completion of the work otherwise. In addition, the Contractor shall

submit to the Engineer a signed statement from each representative certifying as follows: “I

certify that the materials and/or equipment listed below have been personally inspected by

the undersigned authorized manufacturer’s representative and is properly installed and

operating in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations”.

B. Check inspections shall include plumbing equipment, heating, air conditioning equipment,

insulation, ventilating equipment, controls, mechanical equipment and such other items

hereinafter specified or specifically designated by the Engineer.

C. Start-up, Testing and Checking shall be seasonally deferred where required such that it can

be operated under load.

3.11 COOPERATION AND CLEANUP

A. It shall be the responsibility of each trade to cooperate fully with the other trades on the job

to help keep the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, each

trade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment and materials and shall clean his debris

from the job. Upon the completion of the job, each trade shall immediately remove all of his

tools, equipment, any surplus materials and all debris caused by that portion of the work.

3.12 CLEANING AND PAINTING




A. All equipment, piping, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., furnished and installed in exposed

areas under Division 15 of these Specifications and as hereinafter specified shall be cleaned,

prepared, and painted as indicated.

B. All equipment furnished by the mechanical subcontractor shall be delivered to the job with a

suitable factory protective finish and shall be painted (if required), after installation, with the

color hereinafter specified. The following materials shall not be painted: copper, galvanized

metal, stainless steel, fiberglass, and PVC.

C. Before painting, materials and equipment surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement,

plaster, and other foreign materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Such

surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. Exposed metal

work shall be carefully brushed down with the steel brushes to remove rust and other spots

and left smooth and clean.

D. Aluminum jacketing on insulation shall not be painted.

E. No nameplates on equipment shall be painted, and suitable protection shall be afforded to

the plates to prevent their being rendered illegible due to the painting operation.

3.13 TESTS

A. The Contractor shall make, at no additional cost to the Owner, any tests deemed necessary

by the Engineer, the inspection departments having jurisdiction, and in the National Fire

Protection Association, ASTM, etc. Standards listed. The Contractor shall provide all

equipment, materials, and labor for making such tests, Reasonable amounts of fuel and

electrical energy costs for system tests will be paid by the Contractor.

B. Additional tests specified hereinafter under the various Specification Sections shall be made.

C. The Engineer shall be notified in writing at least 10 working days before each test and other

Specification requirements requiring action on the part of the Engineer. All equipment shall

b placed in operation and tested for proper automatic control requirements before the

balancing agency starts their work. These activities will be seasonally deferred as required to

properly operate, load and test the equipment (e.g., evaporative coolers and chillers shall be

tested in the summer; boilers and furnace sections shall be tested in the winter.)

D. Maintain Log of Tests as hereinafter specified.

E. See Specifications hereinafter for additional tests and requirements.

3.14 LOG OF TESTS

A. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shall

include date, time, personnel, description, and extent of system tested, test conditions, test

results, specified results, and other pertinent data. Data shall be delivered to the Engineer as

specified under “Requirements for Final Acceptance”. All Test Log entries shall be legibly

signed by the Project Contractor or his authorized job superintendent.

3.15 START-UP AND TRAINING




A. “Start-up” and “Training” shall be considered formal and distinct periods in the project,

regardless of when they occur in the construction process.

B. Each piece of equipment and system (whether new, existing, by others, etc.) shall be started-

up by authorized personnel using manufacturer’s recommendations or industry standard

practice. Start-up procedures shall be neatly documented in report form and included with

operation and maintenance materials for the project.

C. Each piece of equipment and system shall also include training designed to cover the depth

of knowledge required to operate and maintain the respective item. Training sessions shall

be documented and included with operation and maintenance materials for the project.

3.16 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND

MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of

contents.

B. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of

product and major component parts of equipment.

C. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of

Engineer, Subconsultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of

products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.

D. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of

Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

E. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts,

and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

F. Each Item of Equipment and Each System: Include description of unit or system, and

component parts. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting

conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete

nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

G. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and

communications.

H. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.

I. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating

instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and

emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

J. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative

maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and

alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

K. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.




L. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams

required for maintenance.




PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION 22 0516 - 1

SECTION 22 0516 - PIPING EXPANSION COMPENSATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Flexible pipe connectors.

B. Expansion joints and compensators.

C. Pipe loops, offsets, and swing joints.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Specification Section for Fire Protection Piping.

B. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping.

C. Specification Sections for Hydronic Piping.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. MIL-E-17814E - Expansion Joints, Pipe, Slip-Type, Packed.


A. Verify that structural work and equipment required to control expansion and contraction

of piping are adequate. Verify that anchors, guides, and expansion joints provided,

adequately protect system.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Specification Section 013300 for Submittals

B. Product Data:

1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating,

face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot

(meter) and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure,

and total number of wires in braid.

C. Design Data: Indicate selection calculations.

D. Manufacturer’s Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and external

controls.




1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum three years experience.


A. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and

packaging in place until installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS

A. Steel Piping – Hydronic Systems

1. Manufacturers - Metra-Flex Model MM or Equal

2. Inner Hose – Stainless Steel.

3. Exterior Sleeve – Single braided, thru 4”, double braided above, stainless steel.

4. Pressure Rating – 250 psig (862 kPa) Working pressure and 450 degrees F (232

degrees C).

5. Joint – As specified for pipe joints.

6. Size – Use pipe sized units.

7. Maximum offset – 3/8 inch (20mm) on each side of installed center line.

8. If Flexible Pipe Connectors are used on copper piping, copper and steel shall be

separated by di-electric unions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Construct spool pieces to exact size of flexible connection for future insertion.

C. Install flexible pipe connectors on pipes connected to equipment supported by vibration

isolation. Provide line size flexible connectors.

D. Install flexible connectors at right angles to displacement. Install one end immediately

adjacent to isolated equipment and anchor other end. Install in horizontal plane unless

indicated otherwise.

E. Provide expansion loops, anchors, and guides as indicated on drawings.




3.2 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Provide inspection services by flexible pipe manufacturer's representative for final

installing and certify installation is in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations

and connectors are performing satisfactorily.




GAGES AND METERS 22 0519 - 1

SECTION 22 0519 - GAGES AND METERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pressure gages.

B. Thermometers and Thermometer Supports.

C. Test Plugs.

D. Filter gages.


A. Specification Sections for Hydronic and Plumbing Piping.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Division 01 Requirements for references and standards.

B. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.

C. ASTM E1 - Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers.

D. ASTM E77 - Standard Test Method for Inspection and Verification of Thermometers.

E. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data, which indicates use operating range, total

range, accuracy, and location for manufactured components.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and instrumentation.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include instructions for calibrating instruments.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Specification Section for - Material and Equipment, Environmental conditions affecting

products on site.

B. Do not install instruments when areas are under construction, except for required rough-

in, taps, supports and test plugs.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Manufacturer – Marsh Model “W” or Equal.

B. Gage: ASME B40.1, with bourdon tube with adjustable pointer, rotary brass movement,

brass socket, front recalibration adjustment, 4 ½” dial with black scale on white

background.

C. Case: Painted Steel with chrome ring.

D. Mid-Scale Accuracy: One percent.

E. Scale: Psi.

F. Range: Max indication shall be approximately twice the expected pressure such that the

unit will operate at “Mid Scale”. The Contractor shall furnish the expected system

pressure. Gauges that do not operate at “Mid Scale” will be replaced.

G. ¼” Brass Ball Valve rated for 250 psi, and ¼” Brass Snubber.

2.2 STEM TYPE THERMOMETERS

A. Manufacturer: Trerice – Model BX or Equal.

B. Thermometer: ASTM E1, red appearing mercury, lens front tube, cast aluminum case

with enamel finish and adjustable angle.

C. Size: 9 inch (229 mm) scale.

D. Window: Clear Lexan.

E. Stem: Brass, 3/4 inch (20 mm) NPT, length to match application.

F. Accuracy: ASTM E77 2 percent.

G. Calibration: Degrees F.

2.3 THERMOMETER SUPPORTS

A. Socket: Brass separable sockets for thermometer stems with or without extensions as

required.

2.4 TEST PLUGS

1. Manufacturers: Super Seal – Model 5525 or Equal.

2. 1/4 inch (6 mm) NPT or 1/2 inch (13 mm) NPT brass fitting and cap for

receiving 1/8 inch (3 mm) outside diameter pressure or temperature probe with:




3. EPDM core for temperatures up to 350 degrees F (176 degrees C).

4. Minimum rating 1000 psi @ 250F.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Specification Section for - Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install one pressure gage per pump, with taps before strainers and on suction and

discharge of pump; pipe to gage. Coordinate this requirement with drawings and

specification on pumps.

C. Install gage taps in piping; refer to Section for piping. See drawings for additional

locations and requirements.

D. Provide ball valve to isolate each gage. Extend nipples to allow clearance from

insulation.

E. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes

smaller than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm) for installation of thermometer sockets. Ensure

sockets allow clearance from insulation.

F. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service.

G. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal

operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

H. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to

zero.

I. Locate test plugs where indicated.




SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 0529 - 1

SECTION 22 0529 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pipe and equipment hangers and supports.

B. Roof Pipe Supports

C. Equipment bases and supports.

D. Sleeves and seals.

E. Flashing and sealing equipment and pipe stacks.


A. Specification Section for Cast-In-Place Concrete, Equipment bases.

B. Specification Section for Firestopping, Joint seals for piping and duct penetration of fire

rated assemblies.

C. Specification Section for Painting.

D. Specification Section for Piping Insulation.

E. Specification Section for Equipment Insulation.

F. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping

B. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping

C. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping

D. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

E. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

F. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

G. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

H. ASTM B633- Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel.




I. ASTM A123- Specification for Zinc (Hot-Galvanized) Coatings on Products Fabricated

from Rolled, Pressed, and Forged Steel Shapes, Plates, Bars, and Strip.

J. ASTM A653 G90- Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section 01300 for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate system layout with location and detail of all types of hangers.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data including load capacity.

D. Design Data: Indicate load carrying capacity of trapeze, multiple pipe, and riser support

hangers.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and assembly of

components.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable local code for support of plumbing piping.

B. Hangers and supports used in fire protection piping systems shall be listed and labeled by

Underwriters Laboratories.

C. Steel pipe hangers and supports should have the manufacturers name, part number, and

applicable size stamped in the part itself for identification.

D. Hangers and supports shall be designed and manufactured in conformance with MSS

SP58.

E. Supports for sprinkler piping shall be in conformance with NFPA 13.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with these specifications, pipe hanger and support

systems shall be as manufactured by B-Line Systems, Inc.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. HANGERS

1. Uninsulated pipes 2 inch and smaller:

a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170.

b. Adjustable steel swivel J-hanger, B-Line B3690.

c. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198R or hinged ring hanger, B3198H.




d. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173 with B3222.

e. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104 or B3100.

2. Uninsulated pipes 2-1/2 inch and larger:

a. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3100.

b. Pipe roll with sockets, B-Line B3114.

c. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll, B-Line B3110.

3. Insulated pipe- Hot or steam piping:

a. 2 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal

shield.

B-Line B3100 with B3151 series.

b. 2-1/2 inch and larger pipes:

i. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection. B-Lin

B3110

with B3160-B3165 series.

ii. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle, B-Line

B3114 with B3160-B3165 series.

4. Insulated pipe- Cold or chilled water piping:

a. 5 inch and smaller pipes: use adjustable steel clevis with galvanized sheet metal

shield. B-Line B3100 with B3151 series.

b. 6 inch and larger pipes:

i. Pipe roll with sockets with pipe covering protection saddle, B-Line


ii. Adjustable steel yoke pipe roll with pipe covering protection. B-Line


B. PIPE CLAMPS

1. For flexibility in the hanger assembly due to horizontal movement, use pipe clamps

with weldless eye nuts, B-Line B3140 or B3142 with B3200. For insulated lines use

double bolted pipe clamps, B-Line B3144 or B3146 with B3200.




C. MULTIPLE OR TRAPEZE HANGERS

1. Trapeze hangers shall be constructed from 12 gauge roll formed ASTM A570 Gr. 33

structural steel channel, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” minimum, B-Line B22 strut or stronger as

required.

2. Mount pipes to trapeze with 2 piece pipe straps sized for outside diameter of pipe, B-

Line B2000 Series.

3. For pipes subjected to axial movement:

a. Strut mounted roller support, B-Line B3126. Use pipe protection shield or

saddles on insulated lines.

b. Strut mounted pipe guide, B-Line B2417.

D. WALL SUPPORTS

1. Pipes 4 inch and smaller:

a. Carbon steel hook, B-Line B3191.

b. Carbon steel J-hanger, B-Line B3690.

2. Pipes larger than 4 inch:

a. Welded strut bracket and pipe straps, B-Line B3064 and B2000 series.

b. Welded steel brackets, B-Line B3066 or B3067, with roller chair or

adjustable steel yoke pipe roll. B-Line B3120 or 3110. Use pipe protection

shield or saddles on insulated lines.

E. FLOOR SUPPORTS

1. Hot piping under 6 inch and all cold piping:

a. Carbon steel adjustable pipe saddle and nipple attached to steel base stand

sized for pipe elevation. B-Line B3093 and B3088T or B3090 and B3088.

Pipe saddle shall be screwed or welded to appropriate base stand.

2. Hot piping 6 inch and larger:

a. Roller stand with base plate, B-Line, B3117SL

b. Adjustable roller support and steel support sized for elevation B-Line B3124.

F. VERTICAL SUPPORTS

1. Steel riser clamp sized to fit outside diameter of pipe, B-Line B3373.




G. COPPER TUBING SUPPORTS

1. Hangers shall be sized to fit copper tubing outside diameters.

a. Adjustable steel swivel ring (band type) hanger, B-Line B3170CT.

b. Malleable iron ring hanger, B-Line B3198RCT or hinged ring hanger

B3198HCT.

c. Malleable iron split-ring hanger with eye socket, B-Line B3173CT with

B3222.

d. Adjustable steel clevis hanger, B-Line B3104CT.

2. For supporting vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps, B-

Line B3373CT or B3373CTC.

3. For supporting copper tube to strut use epoxy painted pipe straps sized for copper

tubing, B-Line B2000 series, or plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps, B-

Line BVT series.

H. PLASTIC PIPE SUPPORTS

1. V-Bottom clevis hanger with galvanized 18gauge continuous support channel, B-

Line B3106 and B3106V.

I. SUPPLEMENTARY STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS

1. Fabricate supports using structural quality steel bolted framing materials as

manufactured by B-Line Systems. Channels shall be roll formed, 12 gauge

ASTM A570 Grade 33 steel, 1-5/8” x 1-5/8” or greater as required by loading

conditions. Use clamps and fittings designed for use with the strut system.

2.3 UPPER ATTACHMENTS

A. BEAM CLAMPS

1. Beam clamps shall be used where piping is to be suspended from building steel.

Clamp type shall be selected on the basis of load to be supported, and load

configuration.

2. C-Clamps shall have locknuts and cup point set screws, B-Line B351L, or

B3036L. Top flange c-clamps shall be used when attaching a hanger rod to the

top flange of structural shapes, B-Line B3034 or B3033. Refer to Manufacturers

recommendation for setscrew torque. Retaining straps shall be used to maintain

the position on the beam where required.




B. TOGGLE BOLTS

1. Note that levels 1, 2, and 3 are hollow core concrete panels. Support

arrangement is critical. See structural, mechanical, and plumbing drawings for

additional requirements.

2. Hanger supports shall be drilled into the hollow portion of concrete panels.

Support shall be done with B-line ATH-37 or Equal Toggle Bolts. Arrange

hangers for a maximum load of 200 pounds each.

2.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND SUPPORTS

A. For air conditioning, and other vibrating system applications, use a clamp that has a

vibration dampening insert and a nylon inserted locknut. For copper and steel tubing use

B-Line BVT series Vibraclamps, for pipe sizes use BVP series.

B. For larger tubing or piping subjected to vibration, use neoprene or spring hangers as

required.

C. For base mounted equipment use vibration pads, molded neoprene mounts, or spring

mounts as required.

D. Vibration isolation products as manufactured by B-Line, Vibratrol systems.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Hanger Rods shall be threaded both ends, or continuous threaded rods of circular cross

section. Use adjusting locknuts at upper attachments and hangers. No wire, chain, or

perforated straps are allowed. Hanger rods shall be galvanized or painted in exposed

area.

B. Shields shall be 180o galvanized sheet metal, 12” minimum length, 18 gauge minimum

thickness, designed to match outside diameter of the insulated pipe, B-Line B3151.

C. Pipe protection saddles shall be formed from carbon steel, 1/8 inch minimum thickness,

sized for insulation thickness.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Hangers not in direct contact with copper pipe shall be zinc plated in accordance with

ASTM B633, SC3 or have a green epoxy finish, B-Line Duragreen.

C. Strut channels shall be electro-deposited green epoxy finish, B-Line Duragreen.

D. Hangers and strut located outdoors shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication in

accordance with ASTM A123.

E. Hangers and clamps for support of bare copper piping shall be painted with copper

colored epoxy, B-Line Duracopper or PVC coated.




2.7 FLASHING

A. Lead Flashing:

1. Waterproofing: 5 lb/sq ft (24.5 kg/sq m) sheet lead

2. Soundproofing: 1 lb/sq ft (5 kg/sq m) sheet lead.

3. Caps: Steel, 22 gage (0.8 mm) minimum; 16 gage (1.5 mm) at fire resistant elements.

2.8 ALUMINUM PIPE FLASHING SYSTEM FOR ROOF PENETRATIONS

Note: For new roofs or roof under an existing warranty, the roof manufacturer’s and

installers requirements override any roof penetration system specified here. The roof

manufacturer’s system or a system approved by the roof manufacturer shall be used.

A. Manufacturers: Portals-Plus, Inc. Alumi-flash system or Equal.

B. Pipe sizes ½” to 2”: Provide C412 EPDM cap that is mechanically sealed to an 8”

aluminum base.

C. Pipe sizes 2” to 8”: Provide C126 EPDM cap that is mechanically sealed to t 9”

aluminum base.

2.9 ROOF PIPE SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturer’s: Miro Industries Model 4-RAH-7 or field fabricated as required or

approved equal.

B. Plumbing Hydronic heating, chilled water and condensate drain lines. Piping sizes from

½” to 4”: Miro Industries Model 4-RAH-7 pipe stand with spacers.

C. Base and pipe support construction shall be polycarbonate material.

2.10 EQUIPMENT CURBS

A. Fabrication: Welded 18 gage (1.2 mm) galvanized steel shell and base, 1-1/2 inch thick

insulation, factory installed wood nailer. Minimum of 18 inches in height.

2.11 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for pipes penetrating exterior walls: Innerlynx Model IL-CB or Equal.

B. Steel sleeve with water stop hub.

C. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage (1.2 mm thick) galvanized

steel.

D. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet

Floors: Steel pipe.




E. Sleeves for Pipes Through Fire Rated and Fire Resistive Floors and Walls, and Fire

Proofing: Prefabricated fire rated sleeves including seals, UL listed.

F. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

G. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

H. Firestopping Insulation: Glass fiber type, non-combustible.

I. Sealant: Acrylic rated for fire stopping where applicable

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


3.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

B. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm) space between finished covering

and adjacent work.

C. Place hangers within 12 inches (300 mm) of each horizontal elbow.

D. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) minimum vertical adjustment.

E. Support horizontal cast iron pipe adjacent to each hub or coupling, with 5 feet (1.5 m)

maximum spacing between hangers.

F. Support vertical piping at every floor. Support vertical cast iron pipe at each floor at hub.

G. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or

trapeze hangers.

H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping.

I. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

J. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe.

K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl

spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

3.3 EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 4 inches (100 mm) thick and extending

6 inches (150 mm) beyond supported equipment. Refer to Related Section for Concrete

Work.

B. Provide templates, anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.




C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed.

3.4 FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping and ductwork penetrate

weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches (75 mm) minimum above finished roof

surface with lead worked one inch (25 mm) minimum into hub, 8 inches (200 mm)

minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm) sheet size. For pipes

through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and calk, metal counterflash, and seal.

Locate vents 10’ (ten feet) away from outside air intakes or 3’ (three feet) above top of

intake.

C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches (250

mm) clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch (910 x 910 mm) sheet size. Fasten

flashing to drain clamp device.

D. Seal floor drains watertight to adjacent materials.

E. Provide curbs for mechanical roof installations 18 inches minimum height above roofing

surface. Flash and counterflash with sheet metal; seal watertight. Attach counterflashing

mechanical equipment and lap base flashing on roof curbs. Flatten and solder joints.

F. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; calk around top edge. Use storm collars

above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.

3.5 SLEEVES

A. Set sleeves in position in formwork. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

B. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction.

Provide for continuous insulation wrapping.

C. Extend sleeves through floors one inch (25 mm) above finished floor level. Calk sleeves.

D. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe

or duct and adjacent work with fire stopping insulation and calk air tight and to meet fire

rating of the assembly where exposed to view. Provide close fitting metal collar or

escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

E. Install stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.




3.6 SCHEDULES

PIPE SIZE MAX. HANGER HANGER MAX PIPE

SPACING SPACING ROD ROOF

DIAMETER SUPPORT

SPACING

Inches (mm) Feet (m) Inches (mm) Feet (m)

1/2 to 1-1/4 6 3/8 (9) 6 (1.8)

(12 to 32)

1-1/2 to 2 6 3/8 (9) 6 (1.8)

(38 to 50)

2-1/2 to 3 6 1/2 (13) 6 (1.8)

(62 to 75)

4 to 6 6 5/8 (15) 6 (1.8)

(100 to 150)

PVC (All Sizes) 3 3/8 (9) ------




MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 22 0553 - 1

SECTION 22 0553 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Stencils.

D. Pipe Markers.


A. Specification Section for Painting, Identification painting.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.

B. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Specification Section for Submittals, Procedures for submittals.

B. Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical

identification.

C. Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and

valve manufacturer's name and model number.

D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION


B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and

installation.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag

numbers.

B. Valve Tag Chart.





A. Conform to NFPA 99 requirements for labeling and identification of medical gas piping

systems and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Type: UV Resistant engraved phenolic placards.

B. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters on light contrasting

background color.

2.2 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags:

1. Manufacturers:

2. Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters on light contrasting background

color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) square.

B. Metal Tags:

1. Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) diameter with

smooth edges.

C. Information Tags:

1. Manufacturers:

2. Clear plastic with printed "Danger," "Caution," or "Warning" and message; size 3-

1/4 x 5-5/8 inches (83 x 143 mm) with grommet and self-locking nylon ties.

D. Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.3 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers:

1. Manufacturers:

2. Factory fabricated, flexible, semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe

covering. Larger sizes may have maximum sheet size with spring fastener.

C. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers:




3. Manufacturers: Brady stick-on or snap-on type with flow arrows or equal.

4. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed

markings.

D. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers:

5. Manufacturers:

6. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches (150

mm) wide by 4 mil (0.10 mm) thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

2.4 LABELS

A. Manufacturer:

B. Description: Laminated mylar, size 1.9 x 0.75 inches (48 x 19 mm), adhesive backed

with printed identification.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations for stencil

painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Specification Section for - Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install identifying devices after completion of coverings and painting.

C. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

D. Install labels with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear

lacquer. For unfinished canvas covering, apply paint primer before applying labels.

E. Install tags using corrosion resistant chain. Number tags consecutively by location.

F. Apply stencil painting in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

G. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished

grade, directly above buried pipe.

H. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment

devices and all other major mechanical equipment with plastic nameplates.

I. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic

nameplates.




J. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

K. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

L. Tag automatic controls, instruments, and relays. Key to control schematic.

M. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Identify service,

and flow direction, install in clear view and align with axis of piping. Locate

identification not to exceed 20 feet (6 m) on straight runs including risers and drops,

adjacent to each valve and tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at

each obstruction. For outdoor piping, labels shall be UV resistant, but shall otherwise be

placed on north (or more shaded) side of pipe where it does not otherwise obstruct

visibility.

N. Identify ductwork with plastic tape duct markers. Locate identification every 20 feet

(6m) and at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at

each obstruction.

O. Provide ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above T-bar type panel ceilings. Locate

in corner of panel closest to equipment.




PIPING INSULATION 22 0700 - 1

SECTION 22 0700 - PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Piping insulation.

B. Jackets and accessories.


A. Specification Section for Firestopping.

B. Specification Section for Painting, Painting insulation jacket.

C. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

D. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping, Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

E. Specification Sections for Hydronic Piping, Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

B. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate (ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate).

C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus.

D. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement.

E. ASTM C240 - Standard Test Methods of Testing Cellular Glass Insulation Block.

F. ASTM C449/C449M - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-Setting

Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.

G. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

H. ASTM C533 - Standard Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal

Insulation.

I. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.




J. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.

K. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

L. ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Preformed, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal

Insulation.

M. ASTM C591 - Standard Specification for Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular

Polyurethane Thermal Insulation.

N. ASTM C610 - Standard Specification for Expanded Perlite Block and Pipe Thermal

Insulation.

O. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with

Austenitic Stainless Steel.

P. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials

for Thermal Insulation.

Q. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or

Expanded Rubber.

R. ASTM D1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride

Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam).

S. ASTM D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds.

T. ASTM D2842 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics.

U. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

V. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

W. NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

X. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

Y. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


A. Specification Section 01300 for Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and

thickness for each service, and locations.




C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable

workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products

specified in this section with minimum three years experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section

with minimum three years experience.


A. Conform to maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with

ASTM E84, NFPA 255.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Specification Section for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, store, and protect

products.

B. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and

thickness.


A. Specification Section for Material and Equipment, Environmental conditions affecting

products on site.

B. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

C. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS FIBER

A. Manufacturer: Knauf Pipe Insulation or equal

B. Insulation: ASTM C547, ASTM C 585, NFPA 90A & 90B; rigid molded,

noncombustible.

1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177,0.24 at 75 degrees F ambient temperature (0.035 at

24 degrees C).

2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C.

3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume (.02 perms).

C. Insulation: ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket.




1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24 degrees C).

2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F (343 degrees C.

3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume (.02 perms).

D. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. ASTM C1136, White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film

(ASJ/SSL Jacketing).

2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perms.

E. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch

(300 mm) centers.

F. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:

1. Manufacturers: Papco CP-10 or CP-11

2. Compatible with ASJ lap tape.

G. Insulating Cement/Mastic:


2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting.

H. Fibrous Glass Fabric:

1. Manufacturers: Knauf Fiberglass Insert

2. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM C177,0.24 at 75 degrees F ambient temperature (0.035 at

24 degrees C).

3. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F

I. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:


2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation.

2.2 UNICELLULAR FOAM (Allowed only where scheduled below)

A. Manufacturer: Armstrong Armaflex 2000.

B. Insulation: ASTM C591, rigid molded modified self sealing cellular foam.

1. 'K' ('Ksi') value: ASTM 518; 0.27 at 75 degrees F (0.020 at 24 degrees C).




2. Minimum service temperature: -40 degrees F (-70 degrees C).

3. Maximum service temperature: 220 degrees F (104 degrees C).

4. Maximum moisture absorption: ASTM D2842; 0.054 percent by volume.

5. Moisture vapor transmission: .1 perm-inches.

1. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive.

2.4.1 ALUMINUM JACKETING

A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209.

1. Thickness: 0.025 inch sheet.

2. Finish: Smooth.

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps. Finish all joints and

seams with weatherproof sealant. Install all lap joints on the bottom of the pipe.

4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective

liner.

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 thick aluminum.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Specification Sections for Coordination and Meeting, Verification of existing conditions

before starting work.

B. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

C. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Specification Section for Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature (including domestic water,

condensate drains, and roof drains and overflows): Insulate entire system including

fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and

expansion joints.

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:




1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-

sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure

with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and

thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers.

F. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions

at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

G. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F insulate flanges and unions at

equipment.

H. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:

1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-

applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure

sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as

adjoining pipe. Finish with PVC fitting covers.

I. Inserts and Shields:

1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches (40 mm) diameter or larger.

2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.

3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.

4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and

contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.

5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density

insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

J. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations.

Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Sections

for Fire Separations.

K. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces. Finish with PVC

jacket and fitting covers up to 6’ – 6” above finished floor.

L. Pipe exposed to outdoors shall be finished with aluminum jacketing with seams on the

underside for piping.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Plumbing Systems:




1. Domestic Hot Water Supply:

a. Glass Fiber Insulation: (Unicellular foam not allowed)

1) Thickness: 1 inch for pipe sizes thru 1-1/2”.

2) Thickness: 2 inch for pipe sizes over 1-1/2”.

2. Domestic Hot Water Recirculation:




3. Domestic Cold Water:

a. Glass Fiber or Unicellular foam Insulation with vapor barrier:

1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.

2) Thickness: 1/2 inch for all cold water piping.

B. Heating and Cooling Systems:

1. Heating Water Supply and Return: (Field Installed)




2. Condensate Drains from Cooling Coils (interior):

a. Glass Fiber Insulation or Cellular Foam with vapor barrier:

1) Pipe Size Range: All sizes.

2) Thickness: 3/4 inch (25 mm).




PLUMBING PIPING 22 1000 - 1

SECTION 22 1000 - PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.

B. Domestic water.

C. Condensate drains.

D. Natural Gas.


A. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

B. Specification Section for Piping Insulation.

C. See Specifications for Trenching and Backfilling.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AGA Z21.22 - Relief Valves and Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices for Hot Water Supply

Systems.

B. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings Class 25, 125, 250 and 800.

C. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings.

D. ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Class 125 and 250.

E. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

F. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

G. ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

H. ASME B16.26 - Cast Bronze Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes.

I. ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage

Fittings - DWV.

J. ASME B16.32 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Fittings for Sovent Drainage Systems.

K. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.

L. ASME B31.2 - Fuel Gas Piping.




M. ASME B31.9 - Building Service Piping.

N. ASME SEC IV - Construction of Heating Boilers.

O. ASME SEC IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

P. ASTM A47 - Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings (ASTM A47M - Ferritic Malleable Iron

Castings).

Q. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

R. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

S. ASTM A234/A234M - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for

Moderate and Elevated Temperatures.

T. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

U. ASTM B42 - Seamless Copper Pipe.

V. ASTM B43 - Seamless Red Brass Pipe.

W. ASTM B68 - Seamless Copper Tube (ASTM B68M - Seamless Copper Tube).

X. ASTM B75 - Seamless Copper Tube (ASTM B75M - Seamless Copper Tube).

Y. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube (ASTM B88M - Seamless Copper Water

Tube).

Z. ASTM B251 - Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube (ASTM B251M -

Wrought Seamless Copper and Copper-Alloy Tube).

AA. ASTM B280 - Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field

Service.

BB. ASTM B302 - Threadless Copper Pipe (TP).

CC. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

DD. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

EE. ASTM D1785 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120.

FF. ASTM D2241 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series).

GG. ASTM D2466 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

HH. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and

Fittings.

II. ASTM D2665 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and

Fittings.




JJ. ASTM D2729 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

KK. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe

and Fittings.

LL. ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.

MM. ASTM F477 - Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.

NN. ASTM F679 - Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe

and Fittings.

OO. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

PP. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

QQ. AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-Lined

Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.

RR. AWWA C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 in. Through 12 in. for Water

Distribution.

SS. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.

TT. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

UU. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

VV. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer.

WW. MSS SP-67 - Butterfly Valves.

XX. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

YY. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

ZZ. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

AAA. MSS SP-78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

BBB. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

CCC. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

DDD. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

EEE. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared

Ends.

FFF. NCPWB - Procedure Specifications for Pipe Welding.





A. Specification Section 01300 for Submittals, Procedures for submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.

Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings.


A. Specification Section 01700 for Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data,

Warranties, Bonds, Procedures for submittals.

1. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves, piping, cleanouts.


A. Perform Work in accordance with standards.

B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC IX.

D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ASME SEC IX.

E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, water pressure

rating.


A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable plumbing code.

B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.

C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval

of installation of backflow prevention devices.


A. Specification Section 01600 for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, store, and

protect products.

B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until

installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing

sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.





A. Specification Section 01600 for Material and Equipment, Environmental conditions

affecting products on site.

B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Specification Section 01700 for Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn or annealed.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.2 CONDENSATE DRAIN LINE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, hard drawn:

1. Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2.3 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black.

a. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding type.

b. Joints: welded.

c. Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil (0.25 mm)

polyethylene tape.

B. Polyethylene Pipe: ASTM D2513, SDR 11.5.

a. Fittings: ASTM D2683 or ASTM D2513 socket type.

b. Joints: Fusion welded.

2.4 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 Schedule 40 black.

a. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, forged steel welding

type.

b. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded.




Note: Indoor Natural Gas Piping Operating pressure shall not exceed 1 psig unless

specifically authorized by the Engineer and the authorities having jurisdiction.

Above Grade Piping within 6” of the ground shall be welded and wrapped.

B. See drawings Pipe Material Schedule for allowed alternates.

2.5 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 3 Inches (80 mm) and Under:

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions.

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints.

B. Pipe Size Over 3 Inch (25 mm):

1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges;

preformed neoprene gaskets.

2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene

gaskets.

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper

solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. Clear flow – or Equal.


A. See Specification Section for Supports and Anchors.

2.7 BALL VALVES

A. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, class 150, 400 psi, bronze, two piece

body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out

proof stem, lever handle, solder or threaded ends. Nibco or Equal.

2.8 PLUG VALVES

A. Construction 2-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-78, 175 psi CWP, cast iron body and

plug, pressure lubricated, teflon or Buna N packing, flanged or grooved ends. Provide

lever operator with set screw. Nibco or Equal.

2.9 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Construction 1-1/2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-67, 200 psi CWP, cast or ductile iron

body, elastomer coated ductile iron disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug or

grooved ends, extended neck, infinite position lever handle with memory stop. Provide

gear operators for valves 8 inches and larger, and chain-wheel operators for valves

mounted over 8 feet above floor. Nibco or Equal.

2.10 SWING CHECK VALVES




A. MSS SP-80 class 125,bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder or

threaded ends. Nibco or Equla.

B. 2 Inches and Larger: MSS SP-71, class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc

seal and seat, flanged or grooved ends.

2.11 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A. Up to 2 inches: class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc

Buna N Seals, solder or threaded ends. Nibco or Equla.

B. 2-1/2 inches and larger: iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc Buna

N Seals, wafer style ends. Nibco or Equal.

2.12 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Up to 2 Inches:

MSS SP-80, bronze body, stainless steel and thermoplastic internal parts, fabric

reinforced diaphragm, strainer, threaded and single union ends. Wilkins or Equal.

B. Over 2 Inches:

MSS SP-85, cast iron body, bronze fitted, elastomeric diaphragm and seat disc, flanged.

Wilkins or Equal.

2.13 RELIEF VALVES

A. Pressure Relief:

1. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, steel stem and springs,

automatic, direct direct pressure actuated.

B. Temperature and Pressure Relief:

1. AGA Z21.22 certified, bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs,

automatic, direct pressure actuated, temperature relief maximum 210 degrees F,

capacity ASME SEC IV certified and labelled.

2.14 STRAINERS

A. Size 2 inch and Under:

1. Threaded brass body for 175 psi CWP, Class 150, threaded bronze body 300 psi,

Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel perforated screen. Nibco or Equal.

2. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch:

3. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated

screen.

4. Size 5 inch (125 mm) and Larger: Class 125, flanged iron body, basket pattern

with 1/8 inch stainless steel perforated screen.




2.5 FIRE STOP SYSTEMS

A. General Purpose Fire Stopping Sealant:

1. Water based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, rated

for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

B. General Purpose Vibration Resistant Fire Stopping Sealant:

1. Silicone based, nonslumping, premixed sealant with intumescent properties,

vibration and moisture resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479.

C. DWV Plastic Pipe Systems Fire Stopping Sealant:

D. Silicone based, premixed sealant with intumescent properties, vibration and moisture

resistant, rated for 3 hours per ASTM E814 and UL 1479 with metal collars.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular

to walls.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or

connected equipment. Refer to Sections on expansion compensation where applicable.

G. Where waste and vents are exposed at fixtures, pipes shall be chrome plated brass and

shall have chrome plated escutcheons where they pass through floors, walls, or ceilings.

H. Install underground gas piping at a minimum depth of 12 inches below grade.




I. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of

insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Sections on insulation.

J. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

K. Establish elevations of buried water and sewer piping outside the building to ensure not

less than 6 inches below the frost line and not less than 12 inches below grade.

L. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

M. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush

clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

N. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

O. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish

painting. Refer to sections on painting.

P. Excavate in accordance with Sections for excavation and trenching.

Q. Backfill in accordance with Sections for backfilling.

R. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

S. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

T. Pipe vents from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weather proof

hood.

U. Install water piping to ASME B31.9.

V. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Seal and provide firestopping

as indicated by Sections on penetrations, sealing, and firestopping.

W. No bushings shall be used in conjunction with any gas or water piping. All branch outlet

gas pipes shall be taken from the top or sides of running horizontal lines.

3.4 INSERTS

A. See Specification Section 22 05 29 on Supports and Anchors.


A. See Specification Section 22 05 29 for Supports and Anchors.

3.6 APPLICATION

A. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations.

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.




C. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to

pipe.

D. Install ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or

vertical risers.

E. Install ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

F. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when provided to isolate

equipment.

G. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

H. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service.

I. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.

3.7 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Specification Section for Quality Control; Tolerances.

B. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to ¼ inch per foot minimum. Maintain

gradients.

C. Slope water piping minimum 0.25 percent and arrange to drain at low points.

3.8 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or

soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system

to obtain 50 to 80 ppm (50 to 80 mg/L) residual.

D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at

minimum 15 percent of outlets.

E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 ppm (25 mg/L), repeat treatment.

G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 ppm

(1.0 mg/L.)

H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from

water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

I. The engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of this procedure so that it may be

witnessed. Regardless of whether the engineer is available to witness the results, the

contractor shall document the procedure and the results and provide it to the engineer.




3.9 SERVICE CONNECTIONS

A. Provide new sanitary sewer services. Before commencing work check invert elevations

required for sewer connections, confirm inverts and ensure that these can be properly

connected with slope for drainage and cover to avoid freezing.

B. Provide new water service complete with approved reduced pressure backflow preventer

and sand strainer where indicated. In addition, provide an insulated, lockable backflow

preventer enclosure in accordance with code (See ASSE Standard #1060).

C. Provide test of backflow preventer in compliance with code and furnish test results to the

engineer and provide results with O&M Data.

D. Provide new gas service. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum

pressure of 1PSI outside of building shell, pressure shall be regulated to 11 inch wg prior

to penetrating building shell.

3.10 TESTING

A. Natural Gas – For system pressure less than 1 psi – Test at 10 psi or pressure required by

per local codes, whichever is greater, for 24 hour. For system pressure 1 psi or greater –

Test at 100 psi for 24 hours.

All openings shall be tightly sealed. The system shall be filled with air and pressurized to

10psi or pressure required by per local codes, whichever is greater, for systems that

operate at less than 1psig, and 100psi for systems that operate at 1psig or greater. The

test shall be documented on a chart recorder and held for 24 hours with no loss in

pressure. The test shall otherwise comply with code requirement.

C. Domestic Hot and Cold Water – All openings shall be tightly sealed. The system shall be

filled with water and/or air and pressurized to 150 psig. The test shall be documented on

a chart recorded and held for 24 hours with no loss in pressure. The test shall otherwise

comply with code requirements. Also see disinfection requirements.

D. The engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of this procedure so that it may be






PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 1010 - 1

SECTION 22 1010 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Cleanouts.

B. Hose bibs.

C. Hydrants.

D. Backflow preventers.

E. Water hammer arrestors.

F. Thermostatic mixing valves.


A. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping.

B. Specification Section for Plumbing Fixtures.

C. Specification Section for Plumbing Equipment.

D. Specification Section for Cast in Place Concrete or Execution requirements for concrete

bases.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.

B. ASME A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arrestors.

C. ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.

D. ASSE 1012 - Backflow Preventers with Immediate Atmospheric Vent.

E. ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.

F. ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types.

G. AWWA C506 - Backflow Prevention Devices - Reduced Pressure Principle and Double

Check Valve Types.

H. PDI G-101 - Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with Appendix of

Sizing and Installation Data.




I. PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arrestors.


A. Specification Section 01300 for Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and

finishes.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate

assembly and support requirements.

D. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.


A. Specification Section 01700 for Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data,

Warranties and Bonds, Procedures for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow

preventers, water hammer arrestors.

C. Operation Data: Indicate frequency of treatment required for interceptors.

D. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly

views.





A. Specification Section 01600 for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, storage, and

protection of products.

B. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 See the Plumbing Fixture Schedules.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION





B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs

with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of

drainage system.

C. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

D. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

E. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where

contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms,

fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and

exterior hose bibs.

F. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.

G. Install air chambers on hot and cold water supply piping to each fixture or group of

fixtures (each washroom). Fabricate same size as supply pipe or 3/4 inch (20 mm)

minimum and minimum 18 inches (450 mm) long.




TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 0593 - 1

SECTION 23 0593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems.

C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.

D. Confirmation and reporting of the operation of the HVAC control system.


A. Specification Sections for starting of systems.

B. Specification Sections for controls and the various equipment.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance.

B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.

C. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of

Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.

D. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental

Systems.

E. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within days after award of

Contract.

B. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,

adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

C. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting,

balancing, and equipment data required.

D. Prior to commencing work, submit evidence of coordination with the control system and

various devices that will be checked for accuracy, calibration, and functional capability to

perform control sequence.

E. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final

copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.




F. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page

and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced

drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and

indicating thermostat locations.

G. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance

forms or NEBB forms.


A. Perform total system balance in accordance with AABC National Standards for Field

Measurement and Instrumentation, Total System Balance or NEBB Procedural Standards

for Testing, Balancing and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.

B. Maintain copies of document on site.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Agency: Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems

specified in this Section with minimum three years experience and engaged by contractor

to perform this work.

B. Perform Work under supervision of registered Professional Engineer experienced in

performance of this Work and licensed in the State of New Mexico.

1.7 PRE-BALANCING CONFERENCE

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of

work before Substantial Completion of Project. Coordinate with any phasing

requirements for the project. Notify the Controls operators of work requirements that he

will need to perform to support the testing, adjusting, and balancing, and controls

verification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - Not used

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 AGENCIES

A. Agency shall be independent and not legally or formally affiliated with any other entity

involved with the project.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the

following conditions:




1. Systems are started and certified (where required) and operating in a safe and

normal condition.

2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.

3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

4. Final filters are clean and in place.

5. Duct systems are clean of debris.

6. Fans are rotating correctly.

7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.

8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.

9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.

10. Air outlets are installed and connected.

11. Duct system leakage is minimized.

12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.

13. Pumps are rotating correctly.

14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.

15. Service and balance valves are open.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of

services which prevent system balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

D. Check the drawings for test and balance requirements that are not listed in the

specification.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make

instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.

B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply

systems and plus or minus 5 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.




B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of

design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of

design.

C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus 10 or minus 5 percent of design.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. Verify and

report the accuracy and calibration of thermometers, sensors, and other control outputs.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing

settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such

disruption has been rectified.

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,

closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points

or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.

F. Check and adjust systems approximately six months after final acceptance and submit

report.

3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Systems Concept – In the fan coil scheme, any given unit shown shall be balanced with

“normal” fans on. Normal means the fresh air system, the central toilet exhaust fans (not

the various single toilet exhaust fans), and all fan coils in a given area should be on, and

the doors should be closed. From there system flows and pressures are expected to

fluctuate as fans go off and doors are open.

B. Note that certain systems are installed in areas with gypsum board ceilings, which will

make balancing devices inaccessible. The balancer shall perform a preliminary balance

of these systems prior to the installation of the ceilings in order to get a preliminary

(conservative) setting on the volume dampers. At final balancing, the airflows shall be

set using the opposed blade dampers.

C. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return,

and exhaust air quantities. Verify and report on the accuracy and calibration of control

related items associated with the air systems.

D. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional

area of duct. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration flow measuring devices in

the control system.

E. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.




F. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable

drafts and noise. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of space temperature

sensors.

G. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do

not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct

internal devices such as dampers and splitters.

H. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes

required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. Verify and report the

accuracy and calibration of the control devices such as current transformers, differential

pressure switches, VFDs, etc.

I. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet

or inlet.

J. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil

pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading

of filters. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of control devices such as

differential pressure switches.

K. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for

design conditions. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of control limits

associated with these devices.

L. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to

check leakage. Verify and report the accuracy and calibration of control related

temperature sensors.

M. It is generally the intent that air systems are set to create a slight positive pressure in the

facility. In the absence of any other criteria, the contractor shall set the supply air system

to provide approximately 10% more air than the combination of return and exhaust air

respective to each system. Any questions regarding this criteria should be brought to the

engineer’s attention prior to commencing any work.

3.7 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Systems Concept – In the fan coil scheme, approximately 30% of the control valves have

been specified to be 2-way, with the remaining valves being 3-way. It is expected that

the 2-way valves should be closed in order to balance the 3-way valves. The 2-way can

then be balanced individually. From there the systems flows and pressures will be

expected to fluctuating as the 2-ways cycle.

B. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. Verify and report on the

accuracy and calibration of control related items associated with the water systems.

C. Use calibrated fittings and pressure gages to determine flow rates for system balance.

Where flow-metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature

difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. Verify and report on the

accuracy and calibration of system sensors, thermometers and gauges.




D. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer

elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature

differential in conjunction with air balancing.

E. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements.

Verify and report on the accuracy and calibration of the control valves with respect to

their ability to control flow throughout the stroke range.

F. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and

fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance

point.

G. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system

parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other

parts.

3.8 SCHEDULES

A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing

Plumbing Pumps

HVAC Pumps

Air Coils

Fans

Air Filters

Air Inlets and Outlets

B. Report Forms

1. Title Page:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency

b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency

c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and

C. Balancing Agency

a. Project name

b. Project location

c. Project Architect

d. Project Engineer

e. Project Contractor

f. Project altitude

g. Report date

1. Summary Comments:

a. Design versus final performance

b. Notable characteristics of system

c. Description of systems operation sequence




d. Summary of out door and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building

pressurization

e. Nomenclature used throughout report

f. Test conditions

2. Instrument List:

a. Instrument

b. Manufacturer

c. Model number

d. Serial number

e. Range

f. Calibration date

3. Electric Motors:

a. Manufacturer

b. Model/Frame

c. HP/BHP

d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load

e. RPM

f. Service factor

g. Starter size, rating, heater elements

h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

4. Pump Data:

a. Identification/number

b. Manufacturer

c. Size/model

d. Impeller

e. Service

f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP

g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP

h. Discharge pressure

i. Suction pressure

j. Total operating head pressure

k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures

l. Shut off, total head pressure

5. Cooling Coil Data:


b. Location

c. Service

d. Manufacturer

e. Air flow, design and actual

f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual

g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual

h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual

i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual




j. Water flow, design and actual

k. Water pressure drop, design and actual

l. Entering water temperature, design and actual

m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual

n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual

o. Air pressure drop, design and actual

6. Heating Coil Data:


b. Location

c. Service

d. Manufacturer

e. Air flow, design and actual

f. Water flow, design and actual

g. Water pressure drop, design and actual

h. Entering water temperature, design and actual

i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual

j. Entering air temperature, design and actual

k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual

l. Air pressure drop, design and actual

7. Air Moving Equipment

a. Location

b. Manufacturer

c. Model number

d. Serial number

e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge

f. Air flow, specified and actual

g. Return air flow, specified and actual

h. Outside air flow, specified and actual

i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

j. Inlet pressure

k. Discharge pressure

l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

m. Number of Belts/Make/Size

n. Fan RPM

8. Return Air/Outside Air Data:

a. Identification/location

b. Design airflow

c. Actual airflow

d. Design return airflow

e. Actual return air -flow

f. Design outside airflow

g. Actual outside air flow

h. Return air temperature

i. Out side air temperature

j. Required mixed air temperature




k. Actual mixed air temperature

l. Design outside/return air ratio

m. Actual outside/return air ratio

9. Exhaust Fan Data:

a. Location

b. Manufacturer

c. Model number

d. Serial number

e. Air flow, specified and actual

f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

g. Inlet pressure

h. Discharge pressure

i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

j. Number of Belts/Make/Size

k. Fan RPM

10. Duct Traverse:

a. System zone/branch

b. Duct size

c. Area

d. Design velocity

e. Design air -flow

f. Test velocity

g. Test airflow

h. Duct static pressure

i. Air temperature

j. Air correction factor

11. Air Distribution Test Sheet:

a. Air terminal number

b. Room number/location

c. Terminal type

d. Terminal size

e. Area factor

f. Design velocity

g. Design airflow

h. Test (final) velocity

i. Test (final) air -flow

j. Percent of design air flow




DUCTWORK INSULATION 23 0700 - 1

SECTION 23 0700 - DUCTWORK INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Ductwork insulation.

B. Insulation Jackets.


A. Specification Section for Roofing, Finishing outdoor insulation jacket.

B. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

C. Specification Section for Ductwork.

D. Specification Section for Roofing, Installation and finishing of outdoor insulation jacket

under roofing.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM B209 – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate (ASTM B209M – Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate).

B. ASTM C518 – Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and

Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.

C. ASTM C553 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Commercial and Industrial Applications.

D. ASTM C612- Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation.

E. ASTM C921- Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for

Thermal Insulation.

F. ASTM C1071 – Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass

Fiber, Duct Lining Material).

G. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

H. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

I. ASTM E162 - Standard Test Method for Surface Flammability of Materials Using a

Radiant Heat Energy Source.




J. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric

Materials to Fungi.

K. NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

L. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

M. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

N. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


A. Specification Section 01300 for Submittals, Procedures for submittals.


thickness for each service, and locations.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures, which ensure acceptable








A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM

E84, NFPA 255.


A. Specification Section 01600 for Material and Equipment, Transport, storage and


B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's

identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and

mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics, and insulation cements.




B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE (DUCT WRAP)

A. Manufacturer: Knauf Duct Wrap or Equal.

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.

1. R-Factor @ 75F mean temperature as rated installed at 25% compression.

2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C).

3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.

2. Moisture vapor transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm.

3. Secure with vapor barrier tape pressure sensitive foil type tape.

D. Outdoor Vapor Barrier Mastic:

1. Manufacturers: PAPCO CP-10 or CP-11.

2. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic or mastic, compatible with insulation,

black color, weatherproof.

E. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage (1.5 mm).

2.2 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Manufacturer: Knauf Rigid Fiber Glass Board or Equal.

B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.

1. R-Factor @ 75F mean temperature as rated installed at 25% compression.

2. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees f (121 degrees C).

3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.


1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film 0.0032 inch

(0.081 mm) vinyl.

D. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:




1. Manufacturers: PAPCO, CP-10 or CP-11.

2. Cloth: Untreated: 9 oz/sq yd (305 g/sq m) weight, glass fabric.

3. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

2.3 JACKETS

A. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209).

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.

2. Finish: Smooth.

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50 mm) laps.

4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached

protective liner.

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide; 0.015 inch (0.38 mm) thick

aluminum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Specification Sections for Coordination and Meetings, Verification of existing conditions


B. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.

C. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Specification Section for Quality Control, Manufacturers instructions.

B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.

2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.

3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations.

4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible

connections, and expansion joints.




5. For rectangular duct over 18” wide, the duct wrap shall also be secured to the

bottom of the duct using mechanical fasteners in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

D. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature:

1. Provide with or without standard vapor barrier jacket.

2. Insulate fittings and joints. Where service access is required, bevel and seal ends

of insulation.

E. Exterior Applications: Provide rigid insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with

Aluminum jacket.

F. Ductwrap Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor

adhesive or tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.

3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical

fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers

and insert spacers.

4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barriers

adhesive.

5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow

operation without disturbing wrapping.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Outside Air Intake Ducts:

1. Duct wrap with Vapor Barrier – 2” foil faced fiberglass ductwrap, type 150.

B. Supply Ducts and Return Ducts:

1. Duct wrap with Vapor Barrier – 2” foil faced fiberglass ductwrap, type 150.

C. Exterior Ductwork

1. Rigid fiberglass insulation – 2” with aluminum jacketing.




EQUIPMENT INSULATION 23 0716 - 1

SECTION 23 0716 - EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Equipment insulation.

B. Covering.


A. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

B. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping, Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

C. Specification Section for Hydronic Piping, Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Specification Section for Quality Control, Requirements for references and standards.

B. ASTM A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

C. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and

Plate (ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy

Sheet and Plate).

D. ASTM C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular

Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form.

E. ASTM C552 - Standard Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation.

F. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for

Commercial and Industrial Applications.

G. ASTM C592 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and Blanket-

Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial Type).

H. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal

Insulation.

I. ASTM C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials

for Thermal Insulation.

J. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or

Expanded Rubber.




K. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

L. ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

M. NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

N. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building

Materials.

O. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.


A. Specification Section for Submittals.


thickness for equipment scheduled.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures which ensure acceptable








A. Materials: Flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM

E84, NFPA 255.


A. Specification Section for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, storage, and


B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's

identification, including product density and thickness.

C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and

mechanical damage, by storing in original wrapping.


A. Specification Section for Material and Equipment, Environmental conditions affecting

products on site.




B. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives,

mastics, and insulation cements.

C. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE

A. Manufacturer:

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible.

1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.24at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24

degrees C).

2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F (121 degrees C).

3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

4. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft (24 kg/cu m).


1. ASTM C921, Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to

aluminized film.


3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.

4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

D. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch

(300 mm) centers.

E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Papco CP-10 or Equal.

2. Compatible with insulation.

F. Insulating Cement/Mastic:

1. Manufacturers:

2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.




2.2 GLASS FIBER, RIGID

A. Manufacturer:

B. Insulation: ASTM C612 or ASTM C592; rigid, noncombustible.

1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: ASTM C177 or ASTM C518, 0.24 at 75 degrees F (0.035 at 24

degrees C).

2. Maximum Service Temperature: 450 degrees F (232 degrees C).

3. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.1 percent by volume.

4. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft.


1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.


3. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.

4. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic.

D. Facing: 1 inch (25 mm) galvanized steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of

insulation.

E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive:

1. Manufacturers:

2. Compatible with insulation.

F. Insulating Cement/Mastic:

1. Manufacturers:

2. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

2.3 CELLULAR GLASS

A. Manufacturer:

B. Insulation: ASTM C552.

1. 'K' ('Ksi') Value: 0.35 at 75 degrees F (0.039 at 24 degrees C).

2. Maximum Service Temperature: 900 degrees F.

3. Maximum Water Vapor Transmission: 0.1perm.




4. Maximum Moisture Absorption: ASTM C240, 0.2 percent by volume.

5. Density: 8.0 lb/cu ft (128 kg/cu m).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Specification Section for Coordination and Meetings, Verification of existing conditions


B. Verify that equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials.

C. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Specification Section for Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.

C. Exposed Equipment: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and bevelling insulation.

Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.

E. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth

surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier cement.

F. Insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire

system.

G. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids below ambient temperature: Provide

vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish with glass cloth and vapor

barrier adhesive.

H. For hot equipment containing fluids 100 degrees F (60 degrees C) or less, do not insulate

flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

I. For hot equipment containing fluids over 100 degrees F (60 degrees C), insulate flanges

and unions with removable sections and jackets.

J. Fiber glass insulated equipment containing fluids above ambient temperature: Provide

standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Finish

with glass cloth and adhesive.

K. Inserts and Shields:

1. Application: Equipment 2 inches (50 mm) diameter or larger.

2. Shields: Galvanized steel between hangers and inserts.




3. Insert location: Between support shield and equipment and under the finish jacket.

4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches (150 mm) long, of same thickness and

contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.

5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density

insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range.

L. Finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

M. Equipment in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces: Finish with aluminum

jacket.

N. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket or finish with glass mesh reinforced

vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of

horizontal equipment.

O. Nameplates and ASME Stamps: Bevel and seal insulation around; do not insulate over.

P. Equipment Requiring Access for Maintenance, Repair, or Cleaning: Install insulation so

it can be easily removed and replaced without damage.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Heating Systems:

1. Pump Bodies: 2” rigid fiberglass.

2. Air Separators & Expansion tanks: 2” rigid fiberglass.

3. Heat Exchanger: 2” rigid fiberglass.




AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL & FACILITIES MANAGEMENT 23 0900 - 1

SECTION 23 0900 – AUTOMATIC THEMPERATURE CONTROL AND FACILITES

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Furnish a totally native BACnet-based system, including an operator’s workstation using

Microsoft Windows as the operating system and shall be based on a distributed control

system in accordance with this specification. The operator’s workstation, all building

controllers, application controllers, and all input/output devices shall communicate using

the protocols and network standards as defined by ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135–2001,

BACnet. In other words, all workstations and controllers, including unitary controllers,

shall be native BACnet devices. No gateways shall be used for communication to

controllers installed under this section. Gateways may be used for communication to

existing systems or to systems installed under other sections.

B. Provide all necessary BACnet-compliant hardware and software to meet the system’s

functional specifications. Provide Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

(PICS) for Windows-based control software and every controller in system, including

unitary controllers.

C. Prepare individual hardware layouts, interconnection drawings, and software

configuration from project design data.

D. Implement the detailed design for all analog and binary objects, system databases,

graphic displays, logs, and management reports based on control descriptions, logic

drawings, configuration data, and bid documents.

E. Design, provide, and install all equipment cabinets, panels, data communication network

cables needed, and all associated hardware.

F. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between supplied cabinets, application

controllers, and input/output devices.

G. Provide and install all interconnecting cables between all operator’s terminals and

peripheral devices (such as printers, etc.) supplied under this section.

H. Provide complete manufacturer’s specifications for all items that are supplied. Include

vendor name of every item supplied.

I. Provide supervisory specialists and technicians at the job site to assist in all phases of

system installation, startup, and commissioning.

J. Provide a comprehensive operator and technician training program as described herein.

K. Provide as-built documentation, operator’s terminal software, diagrams, and all other

associated project operational documentation (such as technical manuals) on approved

media, the sum total of which accurately represents the final system.

L. Provide new sensors, dampers, valves, and install only new electronic actuators. No used

components shall be used as any part or piece of installed system.





A. A distributed logic control system complete with all software and hardware functions

shall be provided and installed. System shall be completely based on ANSI/ASHRAE

Standard 135-2001, BACnet. This system is to control all mechanical equipment,

including all unitary equipment such as gas furnaces, AC condensing units, etc. and

exhaust fans using native BACnet-compliant components. Non-BACnet-compliant or

proprietary equipment or systems (including gateways) shall not be acceptable and are

specifically prohibited.

B. Operator’s workstation software shall be Microsoft Windows (latest version) as the

computer operating system. The Energy Management and Control System (EMCS)

application program shall be written to communicate specifically utilizing BACnet

protocols. Software functions delivered on this project shall include password protection,

scheduling (including optimum start), alarming, logging of historical data, full graphics

including animation, after-hours billing program, demand limiting, full suite of field

engineering tools including graphical programming and applications. Systems using

operating systems other than that described above are strictly prohibited. All software

required to program application specific controllers and all field level devices and

controllers will be left with the owner. All software passwords required to program and

make future changes to the system will also become the property of the owner. All

software required to make any program changes anywhere in the system along with

scheduling, and trending applications will be left with the owner. All software passwords

required to program and make future changes to schedules, trends and related program

changes will also become the property of the owner. All software required for all field

engineering tools including graphical programming and applications will be left with the

owner. All software passwords required to program and make future changes to field

engineering tools including graphical programming and applications will be left with the

owner.

C. Building controllers shall include complete energy management software, including

scheduling building control strategies with optimum start and logging routines. All

energy management software and firmware shall be resident in field hardware and shall

not be dependent on the operator’s terminal. Operator’s terminal software is to be used

for access to field-based energy management functions only. Provide zone-by-zone

direct digital logic control of space temperature, scheduling, runtime accumulation,

equipment alarm reporting, and override timers for after-hours usage. E. All application

controllers for every air handler, rooftop equipment, and any other piece of controlled

equipment shall be fully programmable. Application controllers shall be mounted next

to controlled equipment and communicate with building controller via BACnet LAN.

D. Room sensors shall be provided with digital readout that allow the user to view room

temperature, view outside air temperature, adjust the room setpoint within preset limits

and set desired override time. User shall also be able to start and stop unit from the digital

sensor. Include all necessary wiring and firmware such that room sensor includes field

service mode. Field service mode shall allow technician to balance air handler zones and

access any parameter in zone controller.

1.3 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. The system shall be the BACtalk system from Alerton. Other manufacturers may bid




based upon meeting all requirements of the specification and receiving approval from the

engineer 15 days prior to bid. A paragraph-by-paragraph comparison of based bid

specified system versus alternative system along with three references of similar projects

(include project name, contact, phone number, location, consultant, value of contract, and

a brief description of the control system and how it operates) shall be submitted 15 days

prior to bid for review process. If approved, other manufacturer's bids shall be shown as

an addition or deduction on the bid form.

B. Approved Manufactures:

1 Alerton BACtalk installed by Automated Control Systems, Inc. 505-881-7070


A. The BAS system shall be designed and installed, commissioned and serviced by

manufacturer employed, factory trained personnel. Manufacturer shall have an in-place

support facility within 2 hours response time of the site with technical staff, spare parts

inventory and necessary test and diagnostic equipment. Distributors or licensed installing

contractors are not acceptable. The manufacturer shall provide full time, on site,

experienced project manager for this work, responsible for direct supervision of the

design, installation, start up and commissioning of the BAS system. The Bidder shall be

regularly engaged in the manufacturing, installation and maintenance of BAS systems

and shall have demonstrated technical expertise and experience in the manufacture,

installation and maintenance of BAS systems similar in size and complexity to this

project. Bidders shall provide a list of at least 10 projects, similar in size and scope to this

project completed within the past 3 years.

B. The BAS system manufacturer must have a Dealer or Customer Support call-in Center

located at the corporate headquarters or corporate manufacturing facilities. The

Customer Support call-in Center will be staffed by fully trained and certified technicians.

C. Materials and equipment shall be the catalogued products of manufacturers regularly

engaged in production and installation of automatic temperature control systems and shall

be manufacturer's latest standard design that complies with the specification

requirements.

D. All BAS peer-to-peer network controllers, central system controllers and local user

displays shall be UL Listed under Standard UL 916, category PAZX.

E. All electronic equipment shall conform to the requirements of FCC Regulation, Part 15,

Governing Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Interference and be so labeled.

F. Control system shall be engineered, programmed and supported completely by

representative’s local office that must be within 100 miles of project site.

1.5 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. The latest edition of the following standards and codes in effect and amended as of

supplier's proposal date, and any applicable subsections thereof , shall govern design and

selection of equipment and material supplied:

1. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers




(ASHRAE).

2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet.

3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), including local amendments.

4. UL 916 Underwriters Laboratories Standard for Energy Management Equipment.

Canada and the US.

5. National Electrical Code (NEC).

6. FCC Part 15, Subpart J, Class A

7. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark)

8. UL-864 UUKL listing for Smoke Controls for any equipment used in smoke control

sequences

B. City, county, state, and federal regulations and codes in effect as of contract date.

C. Except as otherwise indicated the system supplier shall secure and pay for all permits,

inspections, and certifications required for his work and arrange for necessary approvals

by the governing authorities.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Drawings

1. The system supplier shall submit engineered drawings, control sequence, and bill of

materials for approval.

2. Drawings shall be submitted in the following standard sizes: 11” x 17” (ANSI B).

3. Eight complete sets (copies) of submittal drawings shall be provided.

4. Drawings shall be available on CD-ROM.

B. System Documentation

Include the following in submittal package:

1. System configuration diagrams in simplified block format.

2. All input/output object listings and an alarm point summary listing.

3. Electrical drawings that show all system internal and external connection points,

terminal block layouts, and terminal identification.

4. Complete bill of materials, valve schedule and damper schedule.

5. Manufacturer's instructions and drawings for installation, maintenance, and operation

of all purchased items.

6. Overall system operation and maintenance instructions—including preventive




maintenance and troubleshooting instructions.

7. For all system elements—operator’s workstation(s), building controller(s),

application controllers, routers, and repeaters,—provide BACnet Protocol

Implementation Conformance Statements (PICS) as per ANSI/ASHRAE Standard

135-2001.

8. Provide complete description and documentation of any proprietary (non-BACnet)

services and/or objects used in the system.

9. A list of all functions available and a sample of function block programming that

shall be part of delivered system.

C. Project Management

1. The vendor shall provide a detailed project design and installation schedule with time

markings and details for hardware items and software development phases. Schedule

shall show all the target dates for transmission of project information and documents

and shall indicate timing and dates for system installation, debugging, and

commissioning.

D. BACnet Device Object Naming Conventions

1. The BAS manufacturer’s representative shall submit a BACnet Device Object

Naming Convention Plan (DONCP) to the owner and consulting engineer during the

submittal process. The plan must be approved by the owner and consulting engineer

prior to implementation. It is the responsibility of the BAS contractor to coordinate

the DONCP with the owner and consulting engineer.

2. The DONCP shall be designed to eliminate any confusion between individual points

in a facility/campus wide EMCS system. It will also be designed to allow for future

expansion and consistency. Each device on a BACnet internetwork (including other

manufacturer’s devices) must have a unique device instance. This is a major

consideration when adding to an existing system or interconnecting networks.

Thorough and accessible site documentation is critical.

3. A consistent object (point) naming convention shall be used to facilitate familiarity

and operational ease across an eventual large campus or inventory of facilities. The

following section is designed as recommendations only. It is the responsibility of the

BAS contractor to coordinate the DONCP with the owner and consulting engineer

4. BACnet requires that all devices have a Device object name that is unique throughout

the entire internetwork. To comply with this requirement all BACnet devices should

be configured with a Device Object Name that is based on the naming conventions

described in this section. This includes all physical devices aswell as any logical

BACnet devices that are represented by gateways. The vendor shall coordinate with

the owner’s staff to ensure that the correct names are used. Device Object Name

properties shall support strings of at least 50 characters in length.

5. Every system device has addresses by which any other BACnet device can identify it

and route information to and from it. Although there are a number of addresses to

consider, the scheme is fairly straightforward. It can become complicated, however,




if addresses have not been documented adequately or there is no logical addressing

scheme.

6. When you set up and plan a BACnet network or add to an existing network,

considering and documenting your addressing scheme is of the utmost importance.

Adopt a hierarchical and uniform addressing scheme for device instances to help you

quickly identify the function and location of different devices when troubleshooting.

Additionally, it’s very important to document every element of your addressing

scheme and update the site documentation with any changes.

7. This section first covers the important addressing issues with respect to BACnet

8. LANs and it gives a practical application you can use to check your understanding.

9. BACnet addressing

a. Three types of addresses are important in any BACnet system: network numbers,

b. media access control (MAC) addresses, and device instances. Each BACnet device

has these addresses associated with it. Though all three can be thought of as

addresses, they are all very different both in how they function and how they are

assigned.

10. Network numbers: Identifies the network to which a BACnet device belongs. Every

network on a BACnet LAN has a unique numerical identifier—a network number.

This network number is used by BACnet devices only; it does not rely on nor does it

affect any other network protocols. LANs connected by a router must have different

network numbers. No interconnected BACnet networks can have the same network

number. Network number range is 1–65534, for a maximum of 65534 interconnected

BACnet networks.

11. IMPORTANT: BACnet reserves network numbers 0 and 65,535 for special purposes.

Don’t use network 0 or 65,535.

12. MAC addresses: Hardware-oriented. The MAC address uniquely identifies a device

on its particular network. Each network type—Ethernet and MS/TP—has its own

MAC addressing scheme. A device that exists on two or more networks will have a

MAC address for each one. Devices can have the same MAC addresses as long as

they are on networks with different network numbers.

13. Note: It’s helpful to think of the MAC address as a house number and the network

number as the street number. Two houses can have the same house number (MAC

address) as long as they are on different streets (networks).

14. Ethernet devices - For Ethernet LANs, the IEEE assigns a certain range of MAC

addresses to manufacturers of Ethernet products. manufacturer then assigns a unique

MAC address to each of its Ethernet devices.

15. MS/TP devices - For devices on an MS/TP LAN, you assign the MAC address for

each controller. For BACtalk VLCs, these are assigned with DIP switches. Devices

on an MS/TP LAN are designated as either masters or slaves, which affects how they

can be addressed. This is a requirement of the BACnet specification. All BACtalk




MS/TP devices are masters.

16. IMPORTANT BACnet reserves MS/TP MAC address 255 for special purposes.

Don’t use MS/TP MAC 255.

17. Device instances Software-oriented. The device instance identifies the device to the

BACnet software and is the address most often encountered. The device instance is a

shortcut to having to specify a MAC address and network number each time an

operation is performed. Device instances range from 0–4194302.

18. Note BACnet reserves device instance 4194303 for special purposes. Don’t use

device instance 4194303.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty shall cover all costs for parts, labor, associated travel, and expenses for a period

of one year from completion of system acceptance.

B. Hardware and software personnel supporting this warranty agreement shall provide on-

site or off-site service in a timely manner after failure notification to the vendor. The

maximum acceptable response time to provide this service at the site shall be 24 hours

Monday through Friday, 48 hours on Saturday and Sunday.

C. This warranty shall apply equally to both hardware and software.

1.8 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Refer to Division 0 and Division 1 for related contractual requirements.

B. Refer to Section 220000 for General Mechanical Provisions

C. Refer to Divisions 24, 25, 26 for General Electrical Provisions

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATOR’S WORKSTATION

A. General structure of workstation interaction shall be a standard client/server relationship.

Server shall be used to archive data and store system database. Clients shall access server

for all archived data. Each client shall include flexibility to access graphics from server

or local drive. Server shall support a minimum of 50 clients simultaneously.

B. BACnet Conformance

1. Operator’s workstation shall as a minimum support Point-to-Point (PTP) and

Ethernet BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs

as a native BACnet device. Operator’s terminal shall comply with the requirements

of a BACnet conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet services necessary

to provide the following BACnet functional groups:

a. Clock Functional Group




b. Event Response Functional Group

c. Time Master Functional Group

d. Device Communications

2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a

complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the

functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall be

thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary

tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

3. Standard BACnet object types accessed by the workstation shall include as a

minimum: Analog Value, Analog Input, Analog Output, Binary Value, Binary Input,

Binary Output, Calendar, Device, Event Enrollment, File, Notification Class,

Program and Schedule object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the

system, shall be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data.

All necessary tools shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.

4. The Operator Workstation shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification

for IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork,

while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet

devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs)

and campus area networks (CANs). Workstation shall support Foreign Device

Registration to allow temporary workstation connection to IP network.

C. Displays

1. Operator’s workstation shall display all data associated with project as called out on

drawings and/or object type list supplied. Graphic files shall be created using digital,

full color photographs of system installation, AutoCAD or Visio drawing files of

field installation drawings and wiring diagrams from as-built drawings. Operator’s

workstation shall display all data using three-dimensional graphic representations of

all mechanical equipment. System shall be capable of displaying graphic file, text,

and dynamic object data together on each display and shall include animation.

Information shall be labeled with descriptors and shall be shown with the appropriate

engineering units. All information on any display shall be dynamically updated

without any action by the user. Workstation shall allow user to change all field-

resident EMCS functions associated with the project, such as setpoints, weekly

schedules, exception schedules, etc. from any screen no matter if that screen shows

all text or a complete graphic display. This shall be done without any reference to

object addresses or other numeric/mnemonic indications.

2. All displays and programming shall be generated and customized by the local EMCS

supplier and installer. Systems requiring factory development of graphics or

programming of DDC logic are specifically prohibited.

3. Binary objects shall be displayed as ACTIVE/INACTIVE/NULL or with customized

text. Text shall be justified left, right or center as selected by the user. Also, allow

binary objects to be displayed as individual change-of-state graphic objects on the

display screen such that they overlay the system graphic. Each binary object

displayed in this manner shall be assigned up to three graphic files for display when




the point is ON, OFF or in alarm. For binary outputs, toggle the object’s commanded

status when the graphic item is selected with the system mouse. Similarly, allow the

workstation operator to toggle the binary object’s status by selecting with the mouse

a graphic of a switch or light, for example, which then displays a different graphic

(such as an “ON” switch or lighted lamp). Additionally, allow binary objects to be

displayed as an animated graphic. Animated graphic objects shall be displayed as a

sequence of multiple graphics to simulate motion. For example: when a pump is in

the OFF condition, display a stationary graphic of the pump. When the operator

selects the pump graphic with the mouse, the represented object’s status is toggled

and the graphic of the pump’s impeller rotates in a time-based animation. The

operator shall be able to click on an animated graphical object or switch it from the

OFF position to ON, or ON to OFF. Allow operator to change graphic file

assignment and also create new and original graphics online. System shall be

supplied with a library of standard graphics, which may be used unaltered or

modified by the operator. Systems that do not allow customization or creation of

new graphic objects by the operator (or with third-party software) shall not be

allowed.

4. Analog objects shall be displayed with operator modifiable units. Analog input

objects may also be displayed as individual graphic items on the display screen as an

overlay to the system graphic. Each analog input object may be assigned a

minimum of five graphic files, each with high/low limits for automatic selection and

display of these graphics. As an example, a graphic representation of a thermometer

would rise and fall in response to either the room temperature or its deviation from

the controlling setpoint. Analog output objects, when selected with the mouse, shall

be displayed as a prompted dialog (text only) box. Selection for display type shall be

individual for each object. Analog object values may be changed by selecting either

the “increase” or “decrease” arrow in the analog object spinner box without using the

keypad. Pressing the button on the right side of the analog object spinner box allows

direct entry of an analog value and accesses various menus where the analog value

may be used, such as trendlogs.

5. Analog objects may also be assigned to an area of a system graphic, where the color

of the defined area changes based on the analog object’s value. For example, an area

of a floor-plan graphic served by a single control zone would change color with

respect to the temperature of the zone or its deviation from setpoint. All editing and

area assignment shall be created or modified online using simple icon tools.

6. A customized menu label (push-button) shall be used for display selection. Menu

items on a display shall allow penetration to lower level displays or additional menus.

Dynamic point information and menu label push buttons may be mixed on the same

display to allow sub-displays to exist for each item. Each display may be protected

from viewing unless operator has appropriate security level. A security level may be

assigned to each display and system object. The menu label shall not appear on the

graphic if the operator does not have the appropriate security level.

7. A mouse shall be used to move the pointer arrow to the desired item for selection of

new display or to allow the operator to make changes to object data.

D. Password Protection




1. Provide security system that prevents unauthorized use unless operator is logged on.

Access shall be limited to operator’s assigned functions when user is logged on. This

includes displays as outlined above.

2. Each operator’s terminal shall provide security for 200 users minimum. Each user

shall have an individual User ID, User Name and Password. Entries are alphanumeric

characters only and are case sensitive (except for User ID). User ID shall be 0–8

characters, User Name shall be 0–29 characters, and Password shall be 4–8

characters long. Each system user shall be allowed individual assignment of only

those control functions and menu items to which that user requires access. All

passwords, user names, and access assignments shall be adjustable online at the

operator’s terminal. Each user shall also have a set security level, which defines

access to displays and individual objects the user may control. System shall include

10 separate and distinct security levels for assignment to users.

3. System shall include an Auto Logout Feature that shall automatically logout user

when there has been no keyboard or mouse activity for a set period of time. Time

period shall be adjustable by system administrator. Auto Logout may be enabled and

disabled by system administrator. Operator terminal shall display message on screen

that user is logged out after Auto Logout occurs.

E. Operator Activity Log

1. Operator Activity Log shall be included with system that tracks all operator changes

and activities. System shall track what is changed in the system, who performed this

change, date and time of system activity and value of the change before and after

operator activity. Operator shall be able to display all activity, sort the changes by

user and also by operation.

2. Log shall be gathered and archived to hard drive on operator workstation as needed.

Operator shall be able to export data for display and sorting in a spreadsheet.

3. Any displayed data, that is changeable by the operator, may be selected using the

right mouse button and the operator activity log shall then be selectable on the screen.

Selection of the operator activity log using this method shall show all operator

changes of just that displayed data.

F. Scheduling

1. Operator’s workstation shall show all information in easy-to-read daily format

including calendar of this month and next. All schedules shall show actual ON/OFF

times for day based on scheduling priority. Priority for scheduling shall be events,

holidays and daily with events being the highest.

2. Holiday and special event schedules shall display data in calendar format. Operator

shall be able to schedule holidays and special events directly from these calendars.

3. Operator shall be able to change all information for a given weekly or exception

schedule if logged on with the appropriate security access.

4. System shall include a Schedule Wizard for set up of schedules. Wizard shall walk

user through all steps necessary for schedule generation. Wizard shall have its own




pull-down selection for startup or may be started by right clicking on value displayed

on graphic and then selecting Schedule.

5. Scheduling shall include optimum start based on outside air temperature, current

heating/cooling setpoints, indoor temperature and history of previous starts. Each

and every individual zone shall have optimum start time independently calculated

based on all parameters listed. User shall input schedules to set time that occupied

setpoint is to be attained. Optimum start feature shall calculate the startup time

needed to match zone temperature to setpoint. User shall be able to set a limit for the

maximum startup time allowed.

G. Alarm Indication and Handling.

1. Operator’s workstation shall provide audible, visual, and printed means of alarm

indication. The alarm dialog box shall always become the top dialog box regardless

of the application(s),currently running. Printout of alarms shall be sent to the

assigned terminal and port.

2. System shall provide log of alarm messages. Alarm log shall be archived to the hard

disk of the system operator’s terminal. Each entry shall include a description of the

event-initiating object generating the alarm. Description shall be an alarm message of

at least 256 characters in length. Entry shall include time and date of alarm

occurrence, time and date of object state return to normal, time and date of alarm

acknowledgment and identification of operator acknowledging alarm .

3. Alarm messages shall be in user-definable text (English or other specified language)

and shall be entered either at the operator’s terminal or via remote communication.

4. System shall include an Alarm Wizard for set up of alarms. Wizard shall walk user

through all steps necessary for alarm generation. Wizard shall have its own pull-

down selection for startup or may be started by right clicking on value displayed on

graphic and then selecting alarm setup.

H. Trendlog Information

1. System server shall periodically gather historically recorded data stored in the

building controllers and archive the information Archived files shall be appended

with new sample data, allowing samples to be accumulated. Systems that write over

archived data shall not be allowed, unless limited file size is specified. Samples may

be viewed at the operator’s workstation. Operator shall be able to scroll through all

trended data. All trendlog information shall be displayed in standard engineering

units.

2. Software shall be included that is capable of graphing the trend logged object data.

Software shall be capable of creating two-axis (x,y) graphs that display up to ten

object types at the same time in different colors. Graphs shall show object values

relative to time.

3. Operator shall be able to change trend log setup information. This includes the

information to be logged as well as the interval at which it is to be logged. All input,

output, and value object types in the system may be logged. All operations shall be

password protected. Setup and viewing may be accessed directly from any and all




graphics on which object is displayed.

4. System shall include a trend Wizard for setup of logs. Wizard shall walk user

through all necessary steps. Wizard shall have its own pull-down selection for

startup, or may be started by right clicking on value displayed on graphic, and then

selecting Trendlogs from the displayed menu.

I. Energy Log Information

1. System server shall be capable of periodically gathering energy log data stored in the

field equipment and archive the information. Archive files shall be appended with

new data, allowing data to be accumulated. Systems that write over archived data

shall not be allowed unless limited file size is specified. Display all energy log

information in standard engineering units.

2. All data shall be stored in data base file format for direct use by third-party programs.

Operation of system shall stay completely online during all graphing operations.

3. Operator shall be able to change the energy log setup information as well. This

includes the meters to be logged, meter pulse value, and the type of energy units to be

logged. All meters monitored by the system may be logged. System shall support

using flow and temperature sensors for BTU monitoring.

4. System shall display archived data in tabular format form for both consumption and

peak values. Data shall be shown in hourly, daily, weekly, monthly and yearly

formats. In each format the user shall be able to select a specific period of data to

view.

J. Demand Limiting

1. System shall include demand limiting program that includes two types of load

shedding. One type of load shedding shall shed/restore equipment in binary fashion

based on energy usage when compared to shed and restore settings. The other type

of shedding shall adjust operator selected control setpoints in an analog fashion based

on energy usage when compared to shed and restore settings. Shedding may be

implemented independently on each and every zone or piece of equipment connected

to system.

2. Binary shedding shall include minimum of 5 priority levels of equipment shedding.

All loads in a given priority level shall be shed before any loads in a higher priority

level are shed. Load shedding within a given priority level shall include two

methods. In one the loads shall be shed/restored in a “first off-first on” mode and in

the other the loads are just shed/restored in a linear fashion.

3. Analog shed program shall generate a ramp that is independently used by each

individual zone or individual control algorithm to raise the appropriate cooling

setting and lower appropriate heating setting to reduce energy usage.

4. Status of each and every load shed program shall be capable of being displayed on

every operator terminal connected to system. Status of each load assigned to an

individual shed program shall be displayed along with English description of each

load.




K. Tenant Activity

1. System shall include program that monitors after-hours overrides by tenants, logs that

data and generates a bill based on usage and rate charged for each tenant space.

Tenant Activity program shall be able to assign multiple zones, from a list of every

zone connected to system, to a particular tenant. Every zone is monitored for after-

hour override usage and that data logged in server. Operator may then generate a bill

based on the usage for each tenant and the rate charged for any overtime use.

2. Configuration shall include entry of the following information for use in logging and

billing.

a. Tenants contact name and address

b. One or multiple tenant zones that make up a total tenant space including a separate

billing rate for each separate zone.

c. Minimum and maximum values an event duration and event limit

d. Property management information

e. Overall billing rate

f. Seasonal adjustments or surcharge to billing rate

g. Billing notification type such including, but not limited to printer, file and email

h. Billing form template

3. Logging shall include recording the following information for each and every tenant

event.

a. Zone description

b. Time the event begins

c. Total override time

d. Limits shall be applied to override time.

4. A tenant bill shall be generated for a specific period using all the entered

configuration data and the logged data. User with appropriate security level shall be

able to view and override billing information. User shall be able to select a billing

period to look to view and be able to delete events from billing and be able to edit a

selected tenant activity event’s override time.

L. Configuration/Setup

1. Provide means for operator to display and change system configuration. This shall

include, but not be limited to, system time, day of the week, date of daylight savings

set forward/set back, printer termination, port addresses, modem port and speed, etc.

Items shall be modified using understandable terminology with simple mouse/cursor

key movements.




M. Field Engineering Tools

1. Operator’s workstation software shall include field-engineering tools for

programming all controllers supplied. All controllers shall be programmed using

graphical tools that allow the user to connect function blocks on screen that provide

sequencing of all control logic. Function blocks shall be represented by graphical

displays that are easily identified and distinct from other types of blocks. Graphical

programming that uses simple rectangles and squares is not acceptable.

2. User shall be able to pick graphical function block from menu and place on screen.

Provide zoom in and zoom out capabilities. Function blocks shall be downloaded to

controller without any reentry of data.

3. Programming tools shall include a real time operation mode. Function blocks shall

display real time data and be animated to show status of data inputs and outputs when

in real time operation. Animation shall show change of status on logic devices and

countdown of timer devices in graphical format.

4. Field engineering tools shall also include a database manager of applications that

include logic files for controllers and associated graphics. Operator shall be able to

select unit type, input/output configuration and other items that define unit to be

controlled. Supply minimum of 250 applications as part of workstation software.

5. Field engineering tool shall include Device Manager for automatic detection of

devices connected anywhere on the BACnet network by scanning of the entire

network. This function shall display device instance, network identification, model

number and description of connected devices. It shall record and display software

file loaded into each controller. A copy of each file shall be stored on the computers

hard drive. If needed, this file shall be downloaded to the appropriate controller by

selection using the mouse.

6. System shall include backup/restore function that will back up entire system to

selected medium and then restore system from that media.

N. Workstation Hardware

1. Provide operator’s workstation(s) at location(s) noted on the plans.

2. Workstation/Server Computer Minimum Requirements

a. Pentium IV, 2.6 Ghz or better

b. 1 GB RAM or better

c. 180GB hard disk or better

d. High-performance graphics adapter

e. Ethernet 10/100 network interface card

f. Keyboard, monitor, mouse, CD-ROM

g. Windows XP Professional




h. Modem, 56Kb Minimum

i. Color Printer (Inkjet, Color Dye or Laser)

O. Software

1. At the conclusion of project, contractor shall leave with owner a CD ROM that

includes the complete software operation system and project graphics, setpoints,

system parameters, etc. This backup shall allow the owner to completely restore the

system in the case of a computer malfunction.

2.2 WEB INTERFACE

A. General

1. BAS supplier shall provide web-based access to the system as part of standard

installation. User shall be able to access all displays of real-time data that are part of

the BAS via a standard Web browser. Web browser shall tie into the network via

owner-supplied Ethernet network connection. Web-page host shall be a separate

device that resides on the BAS BACnet network, but is not the BAS server for the

control system. BAS server must be a separate computer from the Web-page host

device to ensure data and system integrity. The web-page software shall not require a

per user licensing fee or annual fees. The web-page host must be able to support on

average 50 simultaneous users with the ability to expand the system to accommodate

an unlimited number of users.

B. Browser Technology

1. Browser shall be standard version of Microsoft IE. No special vendor-supplied

software shall be needed on computers running browser. All displays shall be

viewable and the Web-page host shall directly access real-time data from the BAS

BACnet network. Data shall be displayed in real time and update automatically

without user interaction. User shall be able to change data on displays if logged in

with the appropriate user name and password.

C. Communications

1. Web-page host shall include two Ethernet network connections. One network

connection shall be dedicated to BAS BACnet network and shall be used to gather

real-time data from all the BACnet devices that form the BAS. This network shall

communicate via BACnet, allowing the Web-page host to gather data directly from

units on the local LAN or from other projects connected over a WAN. This network

shall also provide the connection to the BAS server for Web page generation.

2. The second Ethernet connection shall provide the physical connection to the Internet

or an IP-based WAN. It shall be the port that is used for the browser to receive Web

pages and data from the Web-page host. The Web-page host shall act as a physical

barrier between the BAS network and the WAN or Internet connection that allows

the browser to receive web pages and data. The two separate network connections

provide for a physical barrier to prevent raw BACnet traffic being exposed on the IP

network.




3. The Web-page host shall provide for complete isolation of the IP and BACnet

networks by not routing networking packets between the two networks.

4. BAS BACnet Ethernet network shall be provided and installed by the BAS supplier.

Owner shall provide and incur any monthly charges of WAN/Internet connection.

D. Display of Data

1. Web page graphics shown on browser shall be replicas of the BAS displays. User

shall need no additional training to understand information presented on Web pages

when compared to what is shown on BAS displays. Web page displays shall include

animation just as BAS displays. Fans shall turn, pilot lights shall blink, coils shall

change colors, and so on.

2. Real-time data shall be shown on all browser Web pages. This data must be directly

gathered via the BACnet network and automatically updated on browser Web page

displays without any user action. Data on the browser shall automatically refresh as

changes are detected without re-drawing the complete display.

3. It shall be possible for user from browser Web page to change data if the user is

logged on with the appropriate password. Clicking on a button or typing in a new

value shall change digital data. Using pull-down menus or typing in a new value shall

change analog data.

4. Data displays shall be navigated using pushbuttons on the displays that are simply

clicked on with the mouse to select a new display. Alternatively, the standard back

and forward buttons of the browser can be used for display navigation.

E. Time Schedule Adjustment

1. Web access shall allow user to view and edit all schedules in the system. This

includes standard, holiday and event schedules as described in BAS specification.

Display of schedules shall show interaction of all schedules on a single display so

user sees an overview of how all work together. User shall be able to edit schedules

from this display.

2. Display of all 3 schedules must show all ON times for standard, holiday and event

schedules in different colors on a given day. In addition, OFF times for each must

also be shown in additional colors. User shall be able to select from standard

calendar what days are to be scheduled and same display shall show all points and

zones affected. User shall be able to set time for one day and select all days of the

week that shall be affected as a recurrence of that same schedule for that given day.

3. Schedule list shall show all schedules currently defined. This list shall include all

standard, holiday and event schedules. In addition, user shall be able to select a list

that shows all scheduled points and zones.

F. Logging of Information

1. User shall use standard browser technology to view all trend logs in system. User

shall be able to view logged data in tabular form or graphical format. User shall be




able to adjust time interval of logged data viewed and shall be able to adjust y axis of

data viewed in graphical format. User shall also be able to down-load data through

the web interface to local computer. Data shall be in CSV format.

G. Alarm Handling

1. Web interface shall display alarms as they occur. User shall be able to acknowledge

alarms using browser technology. In addition, user shall be able to view history of

alarm occurrence over a user selected time frame. In addition, those alarms may be

filtered for viewing per user selected options. A single selection shall display all

alarms that have not been acknowledged.

H. Web Page Generation

1. Web pages shall be generated automatically from the BAS displays that reside on the

BAS server. User shall access Web-page host via the network and shall initiate a web

page generation utility that automatically takes the BAS displays and turns them into

Web pages. The Web pages generated are automatically installed on the Web page

host for access via any computer’s standard browser. Any system that requires

use of an HTML editor for generation of Web pages shall not be considered.

I. Password Security and Activity Log

1. Access via Web browser shall utilize the same hierarchical security scheme as BAS

system. User shall be asked to log in once the browser makes connection to Web-

page host. Once the user logs in, any and all changes that are made shall be tracked

by the BAS system. The user shall be able to change only those items that the user

has authority to change. A user activity report shall show any and all activity of the

users that have logged in to the system regardless of whether those changes were

made using a browser or via the BAS workstation.

J. BACnet Communication

1. Web server shall directly communicate to all devices on the BAS network using

BACnet protocol. No intermediate devices shall be necessary for BACnet

communication.

2.3 BUILDING CONTROLLER

A. General Requirements

1. Building Controller shall be of modular construction such that various modules may

be selected to fit the specific requirements of a given project. Modules shall consist

of a power supply module, a BACnet Ethernet-MS/TP module, a BACnet MS/TP

only module and a modem module for telephone communication as a minimum.

Those projects that require special interfaces may use Modbus modules as needed.

However, all Ethernet communications and all controllers including central plant

controllers, advanced application controllers and unitary controllers supplied by BMS

manufacturer shall utilize the BACnet protocol standard.

2. Modules shall be selected to fit the particular project application. Up to 7 modules




shall be powered by a single power supply module. All modules shall be panel

mounted on DIN rail for ease of addition and shall be interconnected via simple plug

in cable. A module in the middle shall be replacable without removing any other

modules.

3. All modules shall be capable of providing global control strategies for the system

based on information from any objects in the system regardless if the object is

directly monitored by the building controller module or by another controller. The

software program implementing these strategies shall be completely flexible and

user definable. All software tools necessary for programming shall be provided as

part of project software. Any systems utilizing factory pre-programmed global

strategies that cannot be modified by field personnel on-site, via a wide area

network or downloaded via remote communications are not acceptable. Changing

global strategies via firmware changes is also unacceptable.

4. Programming shall be object-oriented using control function blocks, supporting

DDC functions, 1000 Analog Values and 1000 Binary Values.. All flowcharts shall

be generated and automatically downloaded to controller. Programming tool shall be

supplied and be resident on workstation. The same tool shall be used for all

controllers.

5. Provide means to graphically view inputs and outputs to each program block in real-

time as program is executing. This function may be performed via the operator’s

workstation or field computer.

6. Controller shall have a memory needed to ensure high performance and data

reliability. Battery shall provide power for orderly shutdown of controller and

storage of data in nonvolatile flash memory. Battery back up shall maintain real-

time clock functions for a minimum of 20 days.

7. Global control algorithms and automated control functions shall execute via 32-bit

processor.

8. Schedules

a. Each building controller module shall support a minimum of 80 BACnet

Schedule Objects and 80 BACnet Calendar Objects.

b. Building controller modules shall provide normal 7 day scheduling, holiday

scheduling and event scheduling.

9. Logging Capabilities

a. Each building controller shall log as minimum 320 values. Any object in the

system (real or calculated) may be logged. Sample time interval shall be

adjustable at the operator’s workstation.

b. Logs may be viewed both on-site or off-site via WAN or remote communication.

c. Building controller shall periodically upload trended data to networked

operator’s workstation for long term archiving if desired.




d. Archived data stored in database format shall be available for use in third-party

spreadsheet or database programs.

10. Alarm Generation

a. Alarms may be generated within the system for any object change of value or

state either real or calculated. This includes things such as analog object value

changes, binary object state changes, and various controller communication

failures.

b. Each alarm may be dialed out as noted elsewhere.

c. Alarm log shall be provided for alarm viewing. Log may be viewed on-site at the

operator’s terminal or off-site via remote communications.

d. Controller must be able to handle up to 320 alarm setups stored as BACnet

event enrollment objects – system destination and actions individually

configurable.

11. Demand Limiting

a. Demand limiting of energy shall be built a built in function that shall be user

configurable. Each controller module shall support shedding of up to 200 loads

using a minimum of two types of shed programs.

b. Load shedding programs in Building Controller Modules shall operate as defined

in section 2.1.J of this specification.

12. Tenant Activity Logging

a. Tenant Activity logging shall be supported by Building Controller Module. Each

independent module shall support a minimum of 80 zones.

b. Tenant Activity logging shall functions as defined in section 2.1.K of this

specification.

B. Ethernet – MS/TP Module

1. Ethernet – MS/TP Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A,

General Requirements, of this section and the following.

2. All communication with operator workstation and all application controllers shall be

via BACnet. Building controller Ethernet – MS/TP module shall incorporate as a

minimum, the functions of a 2-way BACnet router. Controller shall route BACnet

messages between the high-speed LAN (Ethernet 10/100MHz) and master slave

token passing (MS/TP) LAN. Ethernet – MS/TP module shall also route messages

from all other Building Controller modules onto the BACnet Ethernet network.

a. MS/TP LAN must be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps.

b. The RJ-45 Ethernet connection must accept either 10Base-T or 100Base-TX

BACnet over twisted pair cable (UTP).




3. BACnet Conformance

a. Ethernet – MS/TP module shall as a minimum support MS/TP and Ethernet

BACnet LAN types. It shall communicate directly via these BACnet LANs as a

native BACnet device and shall support simultaneous routing functions between

all supported LAN types. Global controller shall be a BACnet conformance class

3 device and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the

following BACnet functional groups:

i. Clock Functional Group

ii. Files Functional Group

iii. Reinitialize Functional Group

iv. Device Communications Functional Group

v. Event Initiation Functional Group

b. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for

a complete list of the services that must be directly supported to provide each of the

functional groups listed above. All proprietary services, if used in the system, shall

be thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary


c. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Value,

Binary Value, Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and

Schedule object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be

thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary


d. The Building Controller shall comply with Annex J of the BACnet specification for

IP connections. This device shall use Ethernet to connect to the IP internetwork,

while using the same Ethernet LAN for non-IP communications to other BACnet

devices on the LAN. Must support interoperability on wide area networks (WANs)

and campus area networks (CANs) and function as a BACnet Broadcast

Management Device (BBMD).

C. MS/TP Module

1. MS/TP Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A, General

Requirements, of this section and the following.

2. Building Controller MS/TP module communications shall be via BACnet master

slave token passing (MS/TP) LAN to all advanced application and application

specific controllers. MS/TP module shall also route messages to Ethernet-MS/TP

module for communication over WAN.

a. MS/TP LAN must be software configurable from 9.6 to 76.8Kbps

b. Configuration shall be via RS-232 connection.

3. BACnet Conformance




a. MS/TP module shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN type. It shall

communicate directly via this BACnet LAN as a native BACnet device and shall

support simultaneous routing functions between all supported LAN types.

Controller shall be a BACnet conformance class 3 device and support all BACnet

services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional groups:

i. Clock Functional Group

ii. Files Functional Group

iii. Reinitialize Functional Group

iv. Device Communications Functional Group

v. Event Initiation Functional Group

b. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard for a



thoroughly documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools

shall be supplied for working with proprietary information.


Binary Value, Calendar, Device, File, Group, Notification Class, Program and Schedule

object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be thoroughly

documented and provided as part of the submittal data. All necessary tools shall be

supplied for working with proprietary information.

D. Power Supply Module

1. Power supply module shall power up to 7 Building Controller Modules. Input for power

shall accept between 17 and 30 VAC, 47 to 65 Hz.

2. Power supply module shall include rechargeable battery for orderly shutdown of

controller modules including storage of all data in flash memory and for continuous

operation of real time clocks for minimum of 20 days.

E. Modem Module

1. Provide all functions that will allow remote communications via modem module to off-

site locations. Modem module shall integrate directly into modular controller without any

special software or hardware. Include one modem module along with all cabling

necessary for installation for the system.

2. Provide Windows 2000 software for off-site computer that allows operator to view and

change all information associated with system on color graphic displays. Operator shall

be able to change all parameters in this section from off-site location including all

programming of building controllers and all programmable application controllers

including all terminal unit controllers.

3. Building controller shall have capability to call out alarm conditions automatically. If

desired, controller may also send encoded message to digital pager. If an alphanumeric

pager is in use by the operator, building controller shall be capable of sending a text or




numeric string of alarm description. All building controllers connected to the local LAN

shall be capable of calling out alarm messages through one or more shared modems

connected to one or more of the building controllers on the local LAN.

4. Building controller shall have capability to call a minimum of 20 different phone

numbers. Numbers called may be controlled by type of alarm or time schedule.

5. Owner shall provide standard voice-grade phone line for remote communication function.

6. Building controller and internal modem shall be capable of modem-to-modem baud rates

of 33.6 Kbps minimum over standard voice-grade phone lines. Lower baud rates shall be

selectable for areas where local phone company conditions require them.

F. TUX Module

1. TUX Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A, General


2. Building Controller TUX module communications shall be via Alerton TUX Trunk to up

to 64 Alerton TUX’s. TUX module shall convert TUX data into BACnet objects and

create virtual BACnet devices for every TUX connected to the TUX module. TUX

module shall also route messages to Ethernet-MS/TP module for BACnet Ethernet

communication over WAN.

a. TUX Module shall support TUX communication at 4800 and 9600 baud.

b. Configuration shall be via RS-232 connection.

3. BACnet Translation

a. All TUX data shall be automatically translated into BACnet objects by the TUX module.

No configuration by the user shall be necessary. Predefined BACnet objects shall be

automatically assigned for each type of TUX controller connected.

b. Every TUX controller shall become a virtual BACnet device for ease of use with the

BACnet workstation for configuration and operation.






G. Modbus Module

1. Modbus Module shall support every function as listed under paragraph A, General


2. Building Controller Modbus module communications shall be via one of three types of

ports: EIA-485, EIA-422 or RS-232 connection. Modbus module shall convert Modbus

data into BACnet objects. Modbus module shall also route messages to Ethernet-MS/TP

module for BACnet Ethernet communication over WAN.




a. Modbus Module shall support ASCII or RTU Modbus communication at 9600 or 4800

baud.

b. EIA-422 and EIA-232 connection shall support one connection of Modbus unit.

c. EIA-485 connection shall support connection of up to 247 Modbus units.

d. Configuration shall be via RS-232 connection.

3. BACnet Translation

H. All Modbus data shall be translated into BACnet objects by the Modbus module. All

configuration tools shall be supplied to assure data is translated as necessary to the

correct format and value.

I. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum: Analog Value,





2.4 AIR HANDLER APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. Provide one or more native BACnet application controllers for each air handler and

provide native BACnet application controllers as needed for air cooled condensing

control that adequately cover all objects listed in object list. All controllers shall interface

to building controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No gateways shall be

used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic program as needed

for complete control of units. Controllers shall be fully programmable using graphical

programming blocks. Programming tool shall be resident on operator workstation and be

the same tool as used for the building controller. No auxiliary or non-BACnet controllers

shall be used.


1. Application controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They

shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as

native BACnet devices. Application controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3

and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional

groups:

a. Files Functional Group

b. Reinitialize Functional Group

c. Device Communications Functional Group

2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups, in the BACnet standard, for a








3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum—Analog Input,

Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File,

and Program object types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be



C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that accept

3K and 10K thermistors, 0–10VDC, 0–5 VDC, 4–20 mA and dry contact signals. Any

input on a controller may be either analog or digital with a minimum of 3 inputs that

accept pulses. Controller shall also include support and modifiable programming for

interface to intelligent room sensor with digital display. Controller shall include binary

and analog outputs on board. Analog outputs shall be switch selectable as either 0–

10VDC or 0–20mA. Software shall include scaling features for analog outputs.

Application controller shall include 24VDC voltage supply for use as power supply to

external sensors.

D. All program sequences shall be stored on board application controller in EEPROM. No

batteries shall be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be

executed by controller 10 times per second and capable of multiple PID loops for control

of multiple devices. All calculations shall be completed using floating-point math and

system shall support display of all information in floating-point nomenclature at

operator’s terminal. Programming of application controller shall be completely

modifiable in the field over installed BACnet LANs or remotely via modem interface.

Operator shall program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen

and tying blocks together on screen. Application controller shall be programmed using

programming tools as described in operator’s terminal section.

E. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see section

2.9.B.) Display on intelligent room sensor shall be programmable at application

controller and include an operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions

and display data shall be programmable to show specific controller data in each mode

based on which button is pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific

display requirements at intelligent room sensor.

2.5 TERMINAL UNIT APPLICATION CONTROLLERS

A. Provide one native BACnet application controller for each piece of unitary mechanical

equipment that adequately covers all objects listed in object list for unit. All controllers

shall interface to building controller via MS/TP LAN using BACnet protocol. No

gateways shall be used. Controllers shall include input, output and self-contained logic

program as needed for complete control of unit.


1. Application controllers shall as a minimum support MS/TP BACnet LAN types. They

shall communicate directly via this BACnet LAN at 9.6, 19.2, 38.4 and 76.8 Kbps, as a

native BACnet device. Application controllers shall be of BACnet conformance class 3

and support all BACnet services necessary to provide the following BACnet functional

groups:

a. Files Functional Group




b. Reinitialize Functional Group

c. Device Communications Functional Group

2. Please refer to section 22.2, BACnet Functional Groups in the BACnet standard for a





3. Standard BACnet object types supported shall include as a minimum–Analog Input,

Analog Output, Analog Value, Binary Input, Binary Output, Binary Value, Device, File

and Program Object Types. All proprietary object types, if used in the system, shall be



C. Application controllers shall include universal inputs with 10-bit resolution that can

accept 3K and 10K thermistors, 0–5 VDC, 4–20 mA, dry contact signals and a minimum

of 3 pulse inputs. Any input on controller may be either analog or digital. Controller shall

also include support and modifiable programming for interface to intelligent room sensor.

Controller shall include binary outputs on board with analog outputs as needed.

D. All program sequences shall be stored on board controller in EEPROM. No batteries shall

be needed to retain logic program. All program sequences shall be executed by controller

10 times per second and shall be capable of multiple PID loops for control of multiple

devices. Programming of application controller shall be completely modifiable in the

field over installed BACnet LANs or remotely via modem interface. Operator shall

program logic sequences by graphically moving function blocks on screen and tying

blocks together on screen. Application controller shall be programmed using same

programming tools as building controller and as described in operator workstation

section. All programming tools shall be provided and installed as part of system.

E. Application controller shall include support for intelligent room sensor (see Section

2.9.B.) Display on room sensor shall be programmable at controller and include an

operating mode and a field service mode. All button functions and display data shall be

programmable to show specific controller data in each mode based on which button is

pressed on the sensor. See sequence of operation for specific display requirements at

intelligent room sensor.

2.6 SENSORS AND MISCELLANEOUS DEVICES

A. Temperature Sensors

1. All temperature sensors to be solid state electronic, factory-calibrated to within 0.5°F,

totally interchangeable with housing appropriate for application. Wall sensors to be

installed as indicated on drawings. Mount 48 inches about finished floor. Duct sensors

to be installed such that the sensing element is in the main air stream. Immersion sensors

to be installed in wells provided by control contractor, but installed by mechanical

contractor. Immersion wells shall be filled with thermal compound before installation of

immersion sensors. Outside air sensors shall be installed away from exhaust or relief

vents, not in an outside air intake and in a location that is in the shade most of the day.




B. Intelligent Room Sensor with LCD Readout

1. Sensor shall contain a backlit LCD digital display and user function keys along with

temperature sensor. Controller shall function as room control unit, and shall allow

occupant to raise and lower setpoint, and activate terminal unit for override use—all

within limits as programmed by building operator. Sensor shall also allow service

technician access to hidden functions as described in sequence of operation.

2. The Intelligent Room Sensor shall simultaneously display room setpoint, room

temperature, outside temperature, and fan status (if applicable) at each controller. This

unit shall be programmable, allowing site developers the flexibility to configure the

display to match their application. The site developer should be able to program the unit

to display time-of-day, room humidity and outdoor humidity. Unit must have the

capability to show temperatures in Fahrenheit or Centigrade.

3. Override time may be set and viewed in half-hour increments. Override time count down

shall be automatic, but may be reset to zero by occupant from the sensor. Time remaining

shall be displayed. Display shall show the word “OFF” in unoccupied mode unless a

function button is pressed.

4. See sequence of operation for specific operation of LCD displays and function keys in

field service mode and in normal occupant mode. Provide intelligent room sensors as

specified in point list.

5. Field service mode shall be customizable to fit different applications. If intelligent room

sensor is connected to VAV controller, VAV box shall be balanced and all air flow

parameters shall be viewed and set from the intelligent room sensor with no computer or

other field service tool needed.

C. Wall Sensor

1. Standard wall sensor shall use solid-state sensor identical to intelligent room sensor and

shall be packaged in aesthetically pleasing enclosure. Sensor shall provide override

function, warmer/cooler lever for set point adjustment and port for plug-in of Field

Service Tool for field adjustments. Override time shall be stored in controller and be

adjustable on a zone-by-zone basis. Adjustment range for warmer/cooler lever shall also

be stored in EEPROM on controller. All programmable variables shall be available to

Field Service Tool through wall sensor port.

D. LCD Operator Terminal

1. The LCD operator terminal is a small wall- or panel-mounted operator terminal that

connects directly to the BACnet LAN. The communication design and messaging

structure shall comply with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001, BACnet. Each operator

terminal shall be able to display any BACnet object from anywhere in the BACnet

network.

2. Each of these operator’s terminals shall have a keypad and an adjustable backlit LCD,

with a simple menu structure to give occupants and technicians intuitive access to system

information. It shall have a minimum 4-line by 20-character display to allow an operator

to query and adjust system values.




3. The system shall allow the connection of up to 16 LCD operator terminals to each

Building Controller. The operator shall have the ability to connect to each of these

operator terminals with a laptop computer via an RS-232 cable to gain system access,

troubleshooting, and display programming.

4. Provide LCD operator terminals in the locations shown on the drawings.

E. Field Service Tool

1. Field service tool shall allow technician to view and modify all setpoints and tuning

parameters stored in application controller. In addition, technician shall be able to view

status of all inputs and outputs on digital readout. Each piece of data shall have a data

code associated with it that is customizable.

2. Field service tool shall plug into wall sensor and provide all the functionality specified.

Operator workstation shall include the capability to disable operation of the field service

tool.

3. Provide XX Field Service Tools for this project.

F. Network Connection Tool

1. Network connection tool shall allow technician to connect a laptop to any MS/TP

network or at any MS/TP device and view and modify all information throughout the

entire BACnet network. Laptop connection to tool shall be via Ethernet or PTP.

2. Provide quick connect to MS/TP LAN at each controller. Tool shall be able to adjust to

all MS/TP baud rates specified in the BACnet standard.

3. Proved XX Network Connection Tools for this project.

2.7 ELECTRONIC ACTUATORS

A. Quality Assurance for Actuators

1. UL Listed Standard 873 and C.S.A. Class 4813 02 certified.

2. NEMA 2 rated enclosures for inside mounting, provide with weather shield for outside

mounting.

3. Five-year manufacturers warranty. Two-year unconditional and three-year product defect

from date of installation.

B. Execution Details for Actuators

1. Furnish a Freeze-stat and install “Hard Wire” interlock to disconnect the mechanical

spring return actuator power circuit for fail-safe operation. Use of the control signal to

drive the actuators closed is not acceptable.

2. Each DDC analog output point shall have an actuator feedback signal, independent of

control signal, wired and terminated in the control panel for true position information and

troubleshooting. Or the actuator feedback signal may be wired to the DDC as an analog

input for true actuator position status.




C. Actuators for Damper shall be Electric unless otherwise specified, provide actuators as

follows:

1. UL Listed Standard 873 and Canadian Standards association Class 481302 shall certify

Actuators.

2. NEMA 2 rated actuator enclosures are. Use additional weather shield to protect actuator

when mounted outside.

3. 5 year Manufacturers Warranty. Two-year unconditional + Three year product defect

from date of installation.

4. Mechanical spring shall be provided when specified. Capacitors or other non-mechanical

forms of fail-safe are not acceptable.

5. Position indicator device shall be installed and made visible to the exposed side of the

Actuator. For damper short shaft mounting, a separate indicator shall be provided to the

exposed side of the Actuator.

6. Overload Protection: Actuators shall provide protection against actuator burnout by using

an internal current limiting circuit or digital motor rotation sensing circuit. Circuit shall

insure that actuators cannot burn out due to stalled damper or mechanical and electrical

paralleling.

7. Modulating actuators shall be 24Vac and consume 10VA power or less.

8. Conduit connectors are required when specified and when code requires it.

D. Damper Actuators:

1. Outside Air and Exhaust Air Damper Actuators shall be Mechanical Spring Return.

Capacitors or other non-mechanical forms of fail-safe are not acceptable. The actuator

mounting arrangement and spring return feature shall permit normally open or normally

closed positions of the damper as required.

2. Economizer Actuators shall utilize Analog control 2-10 VDC, Floating control is not

acceptable.

3. Electric damper actuators shall be direct shaft mounted and use a V-bolt and toothed V-

clamp causing a cold weld effect for positive gripping. Single bolt or setscrew type

fasteners are not acceptable.

4. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per damper section. No connecting

rods or jackshafts shall be needed. Small outside air and return air economizer dampers

may be mechanically linked together if one actuator has sufficient torque to drive both

and damper drive shafts are both horizontal installed.

5. Multi-section dampers with electric actuators shall be arranged so that each damper

section operates individually. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per

damper section. (See below execution section for more installation details.)

E. Control Dampers. The sheet metal contractor shall furnish and size all automatic control

dampers unless provided with packaged equipment. The sheet metal contractor shall




install all dampers unless provided with packaged equipment.

1. All dampers used for modulating service shall be opposed blade type arrange for

normally open or normally closed operation as required. The damper is to be sized so

that when wide open the pressure drop is a sufficient amount of its close-off pressure

drop for effective throttling.

2. All dampers used for two-position or open-close control shall be parallel blade type

arranged for normally open or closed operation as required.

3. Damper linkage hardware shall be constructed of aluminum or corrosion resistant zinc &

nickel-plated steel and furnished as follows:

4. Bearing support bracket and drive blade pin extension shall be provided for each damper

section. Sheet metal contractor shall install bearing support bracket and drive blade pin

extension. Sheet metal contractor shall provide permanent indication of blade position by

scratching or marking the visible end of the drive blade pin extension.

5. Drive pin may be round only if V-bolt and toothed V-clamp is used to cause a cold weld

effect for positive gripping. For Single bolt or set-screw type actuator fasteners, round

damper pin shafts must be milled with at least one side flat to avoid slippage.

6. Damper manufacturer shall supply alignment plates for all multi-section dampers.

7. Actuator Mounting for Damper arrangements shall comply to the following:

a. Damper Actuators: Shall not be installed in the air stream

b. A weather shield shall be used if actuators are located outside. For Damper Actuators use

clear plastic enclosure.

c. Damper actuator ambient temperature shall not exceed 122 degrees F through any

combination of medium temperature or surrounding air. Appropriate air gaps, thermal

isolation washers or spacers, standoff legs, or insulation shall be provided as necessary

d. Actuator cords or conduit shall incorporate a drip leg if condensation is possible. Water

shall not be allowed to contact actuator or internal parts. Location of conduits in

temperatures dropping below dew point shall be avoided to prevent water from

condensing in conduit and running into actuator.

e. Damper mounting arrangements shall comply to the following:

1. The ventilation subcontractor shall furnish and install damper channel supports and sheet

metal collars.

2. No jack shafting of damper sections shall be allowed.

3. Multi-section dampers shall be arranged so that each damper section operates

individually. One electronic actuator shall be direct shaft mounted per section.

f. Size damper sections based on actuator manufacturers specific recommendations for face

velocity, differential pressure and damper type. In general:

1. Damper section shall not exceed 24 ft-sq. with face velocity £ 1500 FPM.






g. Multiple section dampers of two or more shall be arranged to allow actuators to be direct

shaft mounted on the outside of the duct.

h. Multiple section dampers of three or more sections wide shall be arranged with a 3-sided

vertical channel (8’’ wide by 6” deep) within the duct or fan housing and between

adjacent damper sections. Vertical channel shall be anchored at the top and bottom to the

fan housing or building structure for support. The sides of each damper frame shall be

connected to the channels. Holes in the channel shall allow damper drive blade shafts to

pass through channel for direct shaft mounting of actuators. Open side of channel shall

be faced down stream of the airflow, except for exhaust air dampers.

i. Multiple section dampers to be mounted flush within a wall or housing opening shall

receive either vertical channel supports as descried above or sheet metal standout collars.

Sheet metal collars (12” minimum) shall bring each damper section out of the wall to

allow direct shaft mounting of the actuator on the side of the collar.

2.8 ENCLOSURES

A. All controllers, power supplies and relays shall be mounted in enclosures.

B. Enclosures may be NEMA 1 when located in a clean, dry, indoor environment. Indoor

enclosures shall be NEMA 12 when installed in other than a clean environment.

C. Enclosures shall have hinged, locking doors.

D. Provide laminated plastic nameplates for all enclosures in any mechanical room or

electrical room. Include location and unit served on nameplate. Laminated plastic shall

be 1/8” thick sized appropriately to make label easy to read.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such

work is complete to the point where work of this Section may properly commence.

B. Notify the owners' representative in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and

timely completion of the work.

C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved.

3.2 INSTALLATION (GENERAL)


B. Provide all miscellaneous devices, hardware, software, interconnections installation and

programming required to ensure a complete operating system in accordance with the

sequences of operation and point schedules.




3.3 LOCATION AND INSTALLATION OF COMPONENTS

A. Locate and install components for easy accessibility; in general, mount 48 inches above

floor with minimum 3'-0" clear access space in front of units. Obtain approval on

locations from owner’s representative prior to installation.

B. All instruments, switches, transmitters, etc., shall be suitably wired and mounted to

protect them from vibration, moisture and high or low temperatures.

C. Identify all equipment and panels. Provide permanently mounted tags for all panels.

D. Provide stainless steel or brass thermowells suitable for respective application and for

installation under other sections—sized to suit pipe diameter without restricting flow.

3.4 INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL WIRING

A. Provide all interlock and control wiring. All wiring shall be installed neatly and

professionally, in accordance with Specification Division 16 and all national, state and

local electrical codes.

B. Provide wiring as required by functions as specified and as recommended by equipment

manufacturers, to serve specified control functions. Provide shielded low capacitance

wire for all communications trunks.

C. Control wiring shall not be installed in power circuit raceways. Magnetic starters and

disconnect switches shall not be used as junction boxes. Provide auxiliary junction boxes

as required. Coordinate location and arrangement of all control equipment with the

owner's representative prior to rough-in.

D. Provide auxiliary pilot duty relays on motor starters as required for control function.

E. Provide power for all control components from nearest electrical control panel or as

indicated on the electrical drawings—coordinate with electrical contractor.

F. All control wiring in the mechanical, electrical, telephone and boiler rooms to be installed

in raceways. All other wiring to be installed neatly and inconspicuously per local code

requirements. If local code allows, control wiring above accessible ceiling spaces may

be run with plenum rated cable (without conduit).

3.5 DDC OBJECT TYPE SUMMARY

A. Provide all database generation.

B. Displays

1. System displays shall show all analog and binary object types within the system. They

shall be logically laid out for easy use by the owner. Provide outside air temperature

indication on all system displays associated with economizer cycles.

C. Run Time Totalization

1. At a minimum, run time totalization shall be incorporated for each monitored supply fan,

return fan, exhaust fan, hot water and chilled water pumps. Warning limits for each point




shall be entered for alarm and or maintenance purposes.

D. Trendlog

1. All binary and analog object types (including zones) shall have the capability to be

automatically trended.

E. Alarm

1. All analog inputs (High/Low Limits) and selected binary input alarm points shall be

prioritized and routed (locally or remotely) with alarm message per owner's

requirements.

F. Database Save

1. Provide back-up database for all stand-alone application controllers on disk.

3.6 FIELD SERVICES

A. Prepare and start logic control system under provisions of this section.

B. Start-up and commission systems. Allow sufficient time for start-up and commissioning

prior to placing control systems in permanent operation.

C. Provide the capability for off-site monitoring at control contractor's local or main office.

At a minimum, off-site facility shall be capable of system diagnostics and software

download. Owner shall provide phone line for this service for 1 year or as specified.

D. Provide Owner's Representative with spare parts list. Identify equipment critical to

maintaining the integrity of the operating system.

3.7 AS BUILT DOCUMENTATION REQUIRED

A. Provide final control schematics and drawings indicating location of all control devices

and final points list.

3.8 TRAINING

A. Provide application engineer to instruct owner in operation of systems and equipment.

B. Provide system operator’s training to include (but not limited to) such items as the

following: modification of data displays, alarm and status descriptors, requesting data,

execution of commands and request of logs. Provide this training to a minimum of 3

persons.

C. Provide on-site training above as required, up to 16 hours as part of this contract.

D. Provide tuition for at least one individual for a one-week factory training class. If

applicable, costs for travel, lodging and meals will be the responsibility of the Owner.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide systems demonstration under provisions of Section 220000.




B. Demonstrate complete operating system to owner's representative.

C. Provide certificate stating that control system has been tested and adjusted for proper

operation.

PART 4 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS

4.1 GENERAL

A. Provide a complete and operational temperature control and building automation system

based on the following points and sequence of operation. The system shall be complete as

to sequences and standard control practices. The determined point list is the minimum

amount of points that are to be provided. If additional points are required to meet the

sequence of operation, they will be provided.

B. BACnet Object List

1. The following points as defined for each piece of equipment are designated as

follows:

a. Binary Out (BO) - Defined as any two-state output (start/stop) (enable/disable), etc.

b. Binary In (BI) - Defined as any two-state input (alarm, status), etc.

c. Analog In (AI) - Defined as any variable input (temperature) (position), etc.

d. Analog Out (AO) - Defined as any electrical variable output. 0–20mA, 4–20mA and

0–10VDC are the only acceptable analog outputs. The driver for analog outputs must

come from both hardware and software resident in the controllers. Transducers will

not be acceptable under any circumstance.




HYDRONIC PIPING 23 2113 - 1

SECTION 23 2113 - HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Pipe and pipe fittings for:

1. Heating water piping system.

2. Equipment drains and overflows.

B. Valves:

1. Ball valves.

2. Butterfly valves.

3. Check valves.


A. Specification Section for Painting.

B. Specification Section for Piping Expansion Compensation.

C. Specification Section for Mechanical Identification.

D. Specification Section for Piping Insulation.

E. Specification Sections for Hydronic Specialties.

F. Specification Section for Chemical Water Treatment Pipe Cleaning.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 9 - Qualification Standard for Welding

and Brazing Procedures, Welders, Brazers, and Welding and Brasing Operators.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 50 and 300.

C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

F. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless.

G. ASTM A234 - Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and

Elevated Temperatures.




H. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

I. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.

J. ASTM F708 - Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

K. ASTM F845 - Plastic Insert Fittings for Polybutylene (PB) Tubing.

L. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

M. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

N. MSS SP58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.

O. MSS SP69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.

P. MSS SP89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

Q. ASTM A-47 – Malleable Iron grooved piping coupling housing.

R. ASTM A-S36 – Ductile Iron grooved piping coupling housing.

S. ASTM D-2000 – Elastomer gasket for grooved piping couplings.

1.4 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, ensure system components are

compatible and joined to ensure the integrity of the system is not jeopardized. Provide

necessary joining fittings. Ensure flanges, union, and couplings for servicing are

consistently provided.

B. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners in accessible locations.

C. Use unions, flanges, and couplings downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus

connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment or

other apparatus.

D. Use non-conducting dielectric connections whenever jointing dissimilar metals in open

systems. Clear flow – No Substitutions.

E. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with MSS SP69 unless indicated

otherwise.

F. Use ball or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or

vertical risers.

G. Use ball or butterfly valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

H. Use spring loaded check valves on discharge of hydronic heating chilled water pumps.




I. Use 3/4 inch (20mm) ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points

of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See requirements of Specification Section for submittals.

B. Product Data: Include data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories.

Provide manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME SEC 9.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining

procedures.

1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. See requirements of Specification Section for record documents.

B. Record actual locations of valves.


A. See requirements of Specification Section for operation and maintenance data.

B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly

views.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum five years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

five years experience.

C. Welders: Certify in accordance with ASME SEC 9.


A. Conform to ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping system.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME SEC 9.

C. Provide certificate of compliance of qualifications from authority having jurisdiction.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Sections for

delivery, storage and handling.







installation.




A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.


A. Furnish under provisions of Section for extra materials.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L hard drawn.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ASME B16.22, solder wrought copper.

2. Tee Connections: Mechanically extracted collars with notched and dimpled

branch tube.

3. Joints: Solder, lead free, 95-5 tin-antimony, or tin and silver, with melting range

430 to 535 degrees F (220 to 280 degrees C). Grooved fittings with EPDM

Grade E gasket for service temperature range of -40F to 230F.

2.2 HEATING WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Schedule 40, black.

1. Fittings: ASTM B16.3, malleable iron or ASTM A234, forged steel welding

type.

2. Joints: Threaded or AWS D1.1 welded, grooved fittings with EPDM Grade E

gasket for service temperature range of -40F to 230F.


A. See Specification Section for Hanger and Supports.

2.5 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS

A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches (50 mm) and Under:

1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) malleable iron, threaded.




2. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints.

B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches (50 mm):

1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig (1034 kPa) forged steel, slip-on.

2. Copper Piping: Bronze.

3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick preformed neoprene.

C. Grooved and Shouldered Pipe End Couplings:

1. Housing Clamps: Malleable iron to engage and lock, designed to permit some

angular deflection, contraction, and expansion.

2. Sealing Gasket: C-shape elastomer composition for operating temperature range

from -30degrees F.

3. Accessories: Steel bolts, nuts, and washers.

D. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder

end, water impervious isolation barrier. Connections to be manufactured by Clear Flow –

No Substitutions.

2.6 GATE VALVES

A. Up To and Including 2 Inches (50 mm):

1. Manufacturers: Nibco or Equal

2. Bronze body, bronze trim, bonnet, stem, inside screw, wedge disc ends.

B. Over 2 Inches (50 mm):

1. Manufacturers: Nibco or Equal

2. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke,

solid wedge disc with bronze seat rings, ends.

2.7 BALL VALVES


1. Manufacturer: Nibco or Equal.

2. Bronze two piece body, full port chrome plated brass ball, teflon seats and

stuffing box ring, lever handle with balancing stops, solder or threaded ends. 600

wg rating.





1. Manufacturers: Nibco or Equal.

2. Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever

handle, flanged.

2.8 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Manufacturers: Nibco or Equal

1. Body: Cast or ductile iron with resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer or lug ends,

extended neck.

2. Disc: Aluminum bronze.

3. Operator: Infinite position lever handle with memory stop.

2.9 SWING CHECK VALVES



2. Bronze body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc, with composition disc,

solder or threaded ends.



2. Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc, renewable

disc and seat, flanged ends.

2.10 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturer: Nibco or Equal.

1. Iron body, bronze trim, split plate, hinged with stainless steel spring, resilient seal

bonded to body, wafer or threaded lug ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.




D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs

or caps.

E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Related Sections.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install heating water and chilled water to ASME B31.9. Install chilled water piping to

ASME B31.5.

C. Route piping in orderly manner, parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.

G. Slope piping and arrange to drain at low points.

H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or

connected equipment. Refer to related sections.

I. Inserts: See section on Supports and Anchors.

J. Pipe Hangers and Supports: See section on Supports and Anchors.

K. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl

spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

L. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of

insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to related Sections.

M. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

N. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. Use eccentric reducers to

maintain top of pipe level.

O. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush

clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

P. Prepare unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories, ready for finish painting.

Refer to related Sections.

Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.




HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 2114 - 1

SECTION 23 2114 - HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Air vents.

B. Strainers.

C. Combination fittings.

D. Flow indicators, controls, and meters.


A. Specification Section for Plumbing Specialties.

B. Specification Section for Hydronic Piping.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME - Boilers and Pressure Vessel Codes, SEC 8-D-Rules for Construction of Pressure

Vessels.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section for Submittals.

B. Product Data: Provide product data for manufactured products and assemblies required

for this project. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and

finishes. Include product description, model and dimensions.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining

procedures.


A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section for Project Record Documents.

B. Record actual locations of flow controls.


A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section for Operation and Maintenance Data.

B. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views, lubrication

instructions, and replacement parts list.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS





section with minimum five years experience.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section for

Delivery, Storage and Handling.




installation.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR VENTS

A. Float Type: Amtrol or Equal.

B. Cast iron body and cover, float, bronze pilot valve mechanism suitable for system

operating temperature and pressure; with isolating valve.

2.2 STRAINERS

A. Size 2 inch (50 mm) and Under:

Screwed brass or iron body for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, Y pattern with

1/32 inch (0.8 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

B. Size 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) to 4 inch (100 mm):

Flanged iron body for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, Y pattern with 3/64 inch

(1.2 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

C. Size 5 inch (125 mm) and Larger:

Flanged iron body for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working pressure, basket pattern with 1/8 inch

(3.2 mm) stainless steel perforated screen.

2.3 PUMP SUCTION FITTINGS

A. Amtrol or Equal.

B. Fitting: Angle pattern, cast-iron body, threaded for 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller,

flanged for 2-1/2 inch (65 mm) and larger, rated for 175 psig (1200 kPa) working

pressure, with inlet vanes, cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch (5 mm) diameter openings,

disposable fine mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer, and permanent magnet

located in flow stream and removable for cleaning.




C. Accessories: Adjustable foot support, blowdown tapping in bottom, gage tapping in

side.

2.4 FLOW CONTROLS

A. Circuit Setter: Taco or Equal.

1. Manual Control Ball Valve Construction: Brass or bronze body with union on

inlet schader valve on inlet and outlet, calibrated nameplate, and memory stop.

2. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating

pressure range of 10 times minimum pressure required for control, minimum

pressure 3.5 psig (24 kPa).

2.5 RELIEF VALVES

A. Bronze body, teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure

actuated, capacities ASME certified and labelled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where large air quantities can accumulate, provide enlarged air collection standpipes.

C. Provide manual air vents at system high points and as indicated.

D. Provide air separator on suction side of system circulation pump and connect to

expansion tank.

E. Provide valved drain and hose connection on strainer blow down connection.

F. Support pump fittings with floor or ceiling mounted pipe and flange supports as

deemed appropriate.

G. Pipe relief valve outlet to nearest floor drain.

H. Where one line vents several relief valves, make cross sectional area equal to sum of

individual vent areas.

I. Provide minimum 6 pipe diameters (or per Manufacturers recommendation) upstream

of circuit setter.




HVAC PUMPS 23 2123 - 1

SECTION 23 2123 - HVAC PUMPS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Close coupled in-line pumps.

B. Base Mounted End Suction Pumps.


A. Specification Section for Piping Insulation.

B. Specification Section for Equipment Insulation.

C. Specification Section for Hydronic Piping.

D. Specification Section for Hydronic Specialties.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. UL 778 - Motor Operated Water Pumps.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.


A. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and

cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25

percent of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide certified pump curves showing performance characteristics with

pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include

electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support requirements and

recommendations.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, assembly views,

lubrication instructions, and replacement parts list.




1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture, assembly, and field performance of

pumps with minimum five years experience.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Provide a full parts and labor warranty for one year from start-up or 18 months from

shipment, whichever occurs first.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE PUMPS

A. Manufacturers: Taco, Bell & Gossett, Armstrong or equal.

B. Type: Vertical in-line, single stage, direct connected, radially split casing, for 175 psig

maximum working pressure at 250oF.

C. Casing: Cast iron, with suction and discharge gage ports, seal flush connection, drain plug,

flanged suction and discharge, and bronze wear rings.

D. Impeller: Bronze, fully enclosed, keyed to shaft, dynamically balanced.

E. Shaft: Stainless steel construction.

F. Seal: “Outside balance” type with stainless steel hardware, multi-spring type with Viton

secondary seal mounted externally to the pump casing. Provide stainless steel gland plate.

Provide flush line with manual air vent.

G. Drive: Pump shall be coupled to a NEMA rated JM motor for continuous operation. The

shaft shall be covered with a replaceable bronze shaft sleeve

H. Provide with lower seal chamber throttle bushing. Provide OSHA approved drive guard.

2.2 BASE MOUNTED END SUCTION PUMPS

A. Base Mounted Flex Coupled Pumps.

1. Pumps shall be as scheduled or approved equal. The pumps shall be single stage end

suction rear pull out design. The bearings and seal shall be serviceable without disturbing

the piping connections. The capacities and characteristics shall be as called for in the

plans/schedules.

2. Pump casing shall be constructed of ASTM A48 class 30 cast iron. The pump

casing/volute shall be rated for 250 psi working pressure for all jobs. The pump flanges




shall be matched to suit the working pressure of the piping components on the job, with

either ANSI Class 125 flanges or ANSI class 250 flanges. The pump casing shall be

drilled and tapped for gauge ports on both the suction and discharge connections and for

a drain port at the bottom of the casing. The casing shall have an additional tapping on

the discharge connection to allow for the installation of a seal flush line. The pump cover

shall be drilled and tapped to accommodate a seal flush line which can be connected to

the corresponding tapping on the discharge connection, or to an external source to

facilitate cooling and flushing of the seal faces.

3. All casings shall be flanged. Threaded casings not allowed unless extra unions and

fittings are provided with that pump to allow servicing.

4. Pump volute shall be foot mounted. Overhung cantilevered design not allowable.

5. The pump shall be center line discharge for both positive air venting and allowance for

better load distribution.

6. The pump casing inlet shall have an integrally cast anti-rotational vane.

7. The impeller shall be ASTM B584-836/875 bronze and hydraulically balanced. The

impeller shall be dynamically balanced to ANSI Grade G6.3 and shall be fitted to the

shaft with a key. The impeller shall be cast by the hydraulically efficient lost foam

technique to ensure repeatability of high quality.

8. The pump shall incorporate a dry shaft design to prevent the circulating fluid from

contacting the shaft. The pump shaft shall be AISI 1045 carbon steel with field

replaceable bronze SAE 660 shaft sleeve. In order to improve serviceability and reduce

the cost of ownership the shaft sleeve must be slip on (press on not allowable) and must

be easily replaced in the field.

9. The pump shall be fitted with a single mechanical seal, with EPT elastomers and

Carbon/Ceramic faces, rated up to 250ºF. This seal must be capable of being flushed

externally via a tapping in the pump cover adjacent to the seal cavity. Any pump used on

an open system shall be furnished with a seal flush line and a Cuno / Kynar / Purocell

#900 replaceable cartridge filter or separator with shut-off isolation valve installed in the

seal flushing line. The filter shall have the ability to remove particles down to five

microns in size. The entire pump line shall use no more than three different sizes of seals.

10. All pumps to be provided with a fully welded, rigid structural steel base. The base shall

include closed ends and top openings to allow for grouting. The base shall include an

integral drain pan fabricated from steel with a minimum thickness of 0.1875” and shall

contain an integral ¾” drain connection.

11. The pump bearing frame shall incorporate maintenance free permanently lubricated and

sealed bearings with an L10 life of 60,000 hours. Bearing frame shall be equipped with

Forsheda seals to protect bearings from moisture and airborne contaminants. The entire

line of pumps shall use no more than four different sizes of bearing frames.




12. The pump shall be flexibly coupled to a NEMA standard T frame motor. The coupler

shall be suitable for across the line starting as well as variable speed conditions associated

with variable frequency drives. The coupling shall be equal to a Woods Dura-Flex

coupler. Any pump manufacturer providing a mechanically inferior coupler design,

especially in variable torque applications, shall extend the warranty of the coupler for an

additional two years in addition to their own standard warranty. The coupling and shafts

shall be covered by a metal guard. Pump shall be aligned upon receipt at job, during

installation, and after system fill by contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as

recommended by manufacturer.

C. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping

adjacent to pump such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For close coupled or

base mounted pumps, provide supports under elbows on pump suction and discharge line

sizes 4 inches (102 mm) and over.

Provide line sized shut-off valve, (ball or butterfly) and strainer and pump suction

diffuser on pump suction, and line sized soft seat check valve, and shut off valve on

pump discharge.

D. Provide air cock and drain connection on horizontal pump casings.

E. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains.

F. Check, align, and certify alignment of flex coupled pumps prior to start-up.

G. Install close coupled and base mounted pumps on 4 inch concrete housekeeping base,

with anchor bolts, set and level, and grout in place.

H. Lubricate pumps before start-up.




CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT 23 2500 - 1

SECTION 23 2500 - CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Cleaning of piping systems.

B. Chemical feeder equipment.

C. Chemical treatment.

D. Disinfection of Potable Water Heating Loop.


A. Specification Section for Hydronic Piping.

B. Specification Section for Plumbing Piping.

C. Specification Section for Equipment Wiring Systems, Electrical characteristics and

wiring connections.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide chemical treatment materials, and chemicals.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate placement of equipment in systems,

piping configuration, and connection requirements.

C. Certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

chemicals and their proposed disposal.


A. Include step-by-step instructions on test procedures including target concentrations.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

Section with minimum three five years documented experience. Company shall have

local representatives with water analysis laboratories and full time service personnel.





A. Conform to applicable code for addition of non-potable chemicals to building mechanical

systems, and for drainage to public sewage systems.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL and as suitable

for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of treatment systems for one year from Date of

Substantial Completion.

B. Provide biannual technical service visits to perform field inspections and make water

analysis on site. Detail findings in writing on proper practices, chemical treating

requirements, and corrective actions needed. Submit two copies of field service report

after each visit.

C. Provide laboratory and technical assistance services during this maintenance period.

D. Include four hour training course for operating personnel, instructing them on

installation, care, maintenance, testing, and operation of water treatment systems.

Arrange course at start up of systems.

E. Provide on site inspections of equipment during scheduled or emergency shutdown to

properly evaluate success of water treatment program, and make recommendations in

writing based upon these inspections.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide sufficient chemicals for treatment and testing during entire first year and

extended warranty period.

B. Furnish full coverage service & maintenance for two years after first year of Service &

Maintenance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. System Cleaner:

Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to remove grease and

petroleum products.

B. Biocide; chlorine release agents such as sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite, or

microbiocides such as quarternary ammonia compounds, tributyl tin oxide, methylene bis

(thiocyanate), or isothiazolones.

2.2 BY-PASS (POT) FEEDER

A. 1.8 gal gal quick opening cap for working pressure of 175 psig.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Systems shall be operational, filled, started, and vented prior to cleaning. Use water

meter to record capacity in each system.

B. Place terminal control valves in open position during cleaning.

C. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics.

3.2 CLEANING SEQUENCE

A. Concentration:

As recommended by manufacturer.

One pound per 100 gallons (1 kg per 1000 L) of water contained in the system.

One pound per 100 gallons (1 kg per 1000 L) of water for hot systems and one pound per

50 gallons (1 kg per 500 L) of water for cold systems.

B. Chilled and Heating Water Systems:

Circulate for 48 hours, then drain systems as quickly as possible.

Refill with clean water, circulate for 24 hours, then drain.

Refill with clean water and repeat until system cleaner is removed.

C. Use neutralizer agents on recommendation of system cleaner supplier and approval of

Architect/Engineer.

D. Remove, clean, and replace strainer screens.

E. Inspect, remove sludge, and flush low points with clean water after cleaning process is

completed. Include disassembly of components as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION


3.4 CLOSED SYSTEM TREATMENT

A. Provide one bypass feeder on each system. Install isolating and drain valves and

necessary piping. Install around balancing valve downstream of circulating pumps unless


B. Introduce closed system treatment through bypass feeder when required or indicated by

test.

C. Provide ¾-inch (19 mm) water coupon rack around circulating pumps with space for 4

test specimens.




3.5 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER HEATING PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or

soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).

C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system

to obtain 50 to 80 ppm (50 to 80 mg/L) residual.

D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at

minimum 15 percent of outlets.

E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 ppm (25 mg/L), repeat treatment.

G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 ppm

(1.0 mg/L.)

H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from

water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

I. The engineer shall be notified 24 hours in advance of this procedure so that it may be






DUCTWORK 23 3113 - 1

SECTION 23 3113 - DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Metal ductwork.


A. Specification Section for Painting, Weld priming, weather resistant, paint or coating.

B. Specification Section for Supports and Anchors, Sleeves.

C. Specification Section for Duct Insulation, External insulation.

D. Specification Section for Ductwork Accessories.

E. Specification Section for Air inlets and Outlets.

F. Specification Section for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.

B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.

C. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.

D. ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel

Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

E. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the

Hot-Dip Process.

F. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock

Forming Quality.

G. ASTM A 568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and

Cold-Rolled.

H. ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip,

Commercial Quality.

I. AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal.

J. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.




K. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.

L. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden

Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.

M. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

N. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

O. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.


A. No variation of duct configuration or sizes permitted except by written permission. Size

round ducts installed in place of rectangular ducts in accordance with ASHRAE table of

equivalent rectangular and round ducts.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Provide complete construction shop drawings for all duct systems.

Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration.

C. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test

pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.


A. Submit under provisions of Specification Section for Record Documents.

B. Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and

type. Show additional fittings used.


A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible.

B. All duct systems shall be tested for leakage in strict accordance with SMACNA HVAC

Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

C. Maintain one copy of document on site.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS






B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three years experience.


A. Construct ductwork to SMACNA, NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B standards.


A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by

sealant manufacturers.

B. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A525 and ASTM A527 galvanized steel sheet,

lock-forming quality, having G60 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90.

B. Steel Ducts: ASTM A366.

C. Insulated Flexible Ducts:

1. Manufacturers: CertainTeed Certaflex or Equal.

2. Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire; fiberglass

insulation; polyethylene vapor barrier film.

3. Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG (2.50 kPa) positive and 1.0 inches WG (250 Pa)

negative.

4. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec).

5. Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F (-23 degrees C to 71 degrees

C).

D. Fasteners: Rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws.

E. Sealant:

1. Manufacturers: Hardcast or Equal.

2. Non-hardening, water resistant, fire resistive, compatible with mating materials;

liquid used alone or with tape, or heavy mastic. Indoor and Outdoor rated.

3. See requirement for Leakage Testing in Part 3 – Execution.

F. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36; steel; threaded both ends, or continuously threaded.




2.2 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

- Metal and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and

sealing for operating pressures indicated. Minimum duct gauge shall be 24 gauge.

B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on

centerline. Where not possible due to space constraints and where rectangular elbows are

used, provide turning vanes. Contact the Engineer for approval on the use of square (in

lieu of radius) fittings.

C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;

maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence

downstream.

D. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs constructed per SMACNA. Unless

otherwise indicated, 90 degree conical tee (spin-in with scoop and damper) connections

may be used where duct dimensions facilitate the additional 2 inches required to make the

connections.

E. Provide volume dampers to all Diffuser branches. The only exception to this criteria is

where the duct is located above an inaccessible ceiling type (e.g. gyp. Board), or where

specifically indicated otherwise. Contact the Engineer for further guidance if there are

any areas of concern.

2.3 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible, and as indicated. Provide duct material, gages reinforcing, and sealing for

operating pressures indicated.

B. Round and Flat Oval Ducts:

1. Manufacturers: United McGill or Equal.

2. Machine made from round spiral lockseam duct with light reinforcing

corrugations; fittings manufactured of at least two gages heavier metal than duct.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards

- Metal and Flexible. Seal at all field connections and longitudinal Pittsburg joints.

Note: If the leakage testing indicates leakage, (as the measured difference between fan

CFM and Air Outlet Totals) in excess of those values indicated in SMACNA “HVAC Air

Duct Leakage Test Manual”, The Contractor shall reseal the ductwork and have it

retested. If the test still indicates excessive leakage, the Contractor will be required to




have leak tests performed using a positive pressure mode analysis as described in Section

3 of the SMACNA Duct Leakage Manual.

C. The Contractor shall be required to perform Leakage Testing for all duct systems.

D. Duct systems shall meet the Leakage Class indicated for the respective pressure class..

E. Duct Sizes are inside clear dimensions.

F. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and

controllers. Provide pitot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete

with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where

openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal

ring.

G. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and

maintenance activities.

H. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller

with crimp in direction of air flow.

I. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

J. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with 5 feet (1.5 m) maximum length of insulated

flexible duct held in place with duct tape and 2 straps or clamps – one strap on the inner

liner followed by duct tape and one strap on the outer liner.

K. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive duct tape and 2 straps as described

above for connection to diffusers.

L. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open

ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

3.2 SCHEDULES

DUCTWORK MATERIAL SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL

Low Pressure Supply Galvanized Steel

(Heating and Cooling Systems)

Return and Relief Galvanized Steel

General Exhaust Galvanized Steel

Outside Air Intake Galvanized Steel

Combustion Air Galvanized Steel




DUCTWORK PRESSURE CLASS SCHEDULE

AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE CLASS SEAL

CLASS

Supply (Heating and Cooling Systems) Up to 4” w.g. A

Return and Relief Up to –3” w.g. A

Outside Air Supply and Exhaust Shall be 2” w.g. C

General Exhaust Up to –2” w.g. C




DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 1

SECTION 23 3300 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Duct access doors.

B. Fire dampers.

C. Flexible duct connections.

D. Volume control dampers.


A. Specification Section for Ductwork.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

C. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.

D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service.

E. UL 555 - Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control

dampers and, duct access doors.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate for fire dampers.



B. Record actual locations of volume dampers, and access doors.

1.6 QUALIFICATIONS







A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters'

Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Specification

Section for Delivery and Storage.

B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS.

A. Manufacturers: Greenheck.

B. Gravity Backdraft Dampers, Size 18 x 18 inches (450 x 450 mm) or Smaller, Furnished

with Air Moving Equipment manufacturers standard construction.

C. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: 16 gage (1.5 mm)

thick galvanized steel, or extruded aluminum, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6

inch (150 mm) width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in

rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin.

2.2 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Nailor Industries Model 08SH Hinged Door with Camlock Closure or

Equal.

B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible, and as indicated.

C. Duct access doors for the commercial kitchen hood exhaust ducts shall be in accordance

with NFPA 96. Manufactured access door may be used and shall be Kees KEDA-A or

equal.

D. Fabrication: Rigid and close-fitting of galvanized steel with sealing gaskets and quick

fastening camlocking devices. For insulated ductwork, install minimum one inch (25

mm) thick insulation with sheet metal cover.

E. Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: Hinged, Secure with camlocks.

Up to 18 Inches (450 mm) Square: Provide continuous hinge and two camlocks. Up to

24 x 48 Inches (600 x 1200 mm): Provide continuous hinge and two camlocks. Larger

Sizes: Provide an additional hinge.

F. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.3 FIRE DAMPERS




A. Manufacturers: Nailor Industries Model 0120 – Type B – Dynamic; Model 0130 – Type

B- Dynamic for round or oval duct.

B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated.

C. Curtain Type Dampers with Integral Sleeve (for vertical or horizontal installation):

Galvanized steel with 24 gauge interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure

springs and latches for closure under air flow conditions as required by code. Configure

with blades out of air stream.

D. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F (71 degrees C).

2.4 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers: None Listed.



C. Connector: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

D. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A,

minimum density 30 oz per sq yd (1.0 kg/sq m).

E. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 3 inches (75 mm) wide.

F. Metal: 3 inch (75 mm) wide, 24 gage (0.6 mm thick) galvanized steel.

2.5 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS.

A. Manufacturers: R&J Airtrack for Conical Spin-ins ( w/ scoop and damper), Greenheck

for Multi-Blade dampers, or equal.



C. Material: Same gage as duct to 24 inches (600 mm) size in either direction, and two

gages heavier for sizes over 24 inches (600 mm).

1. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with

continuous hinge or rod.

2. Operator: Minimum continuous 1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter rod in self aligning,

universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. Provide with offset where

required for insulation.

D. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 12 x 30 inch (150 x 760 mm).

E. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x

72 inch (200 x 1825 mm). Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or

galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware.




F. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches (300 mm) and smaller, provide end

bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze

bearings.

G. Quadrants:

1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade

dampers.

2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets,

bases, or adapters.

3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches (750 mm) provide regulator at both ends.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow

SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Refer to

Specification Section for Ductwork, duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where

indicated.

C. Provide duct access doors and labeling for inspection and cleaning at fire dampers, and

elsewhere as indicated. Provide minimum 12 x 12 inch (200 x 200 mm) (or full size of

duct if duct is less than 12 inches) size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch (450 x 450 mm) size

for shoulder access, and as indicated. Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Provide fire dampers at locations indicated and where ducts and outlets pass through fire

rated components. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway

duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges and in full

compliance with code.

E. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative.

F. Provide flexible connections immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with

fans and motorized equipment.

G. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where

branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2

duct widths from duct take-off.

H. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless

of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.




EXHAUST FANS 23 3423 - 1

SECTION 23 3423 - EXHAUST FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Ceiling Mounted Exhaust Fan.


A. Specification Section for Ductwork Insulation.

B. Specification Section for Ductwork.

C. Specification Section for Ductwork Accessories, Backdraft dampers.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.

B. ABMA STD 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.

C. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.

D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

E. AMCA 261 - Directory of Products Licensed to Use the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

F. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.

G. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data.

H. NEMA MG1 - Motors and Generators.

I. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease Vapors from

Commercial cooking Equipment.

J. UL 705 - Power Ventilators.

K. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible.



B. Product Data: Provide Construction and Technical data on centrifugal fans and

accessories including fan curves with specified operating point clearly plotted, power,

RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, and electrical

characteristics and connection requirements.





A. Specification Section for Contract Closeout, Operation and Maintenance Data

Warranties.

B. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement,

spare parts list, and wiring diagrams.



specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.


A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters

Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.


A. Specification Section for Material and Equipment, Transport, handle, store, and protect

products.

B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust.

C. Do not operate fans for any purpose until ductwork is clean, filters in place, bearings

lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Greenheck or Equal.

2.2 PERFORMANCE

A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear the AMCA Certified Rating

Seal.

B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bear AMCA Certified Sound

Rating Seal.

C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

D. Performance Base: 4,000 ft. conditions.

E. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied

areas.




F. Motor: See equipment schedule. Type: Open drip proof, continuous duty.

2.3 CEILING MOUNTED EXHAUST FANS

A. Manufacturer: Greenheck Model SP-A or Equal.

B. Type: Centrifugal direct drive rated at 5,000 ft. elevation and 70F air stream.

C. Wheel and Inlet: Forward curved, aluminum wheel, dynamically balanced. Aluminum

ceiling grille.

D. Cabinet Construction: Heavy gauge galvanized steel with ½” acoustical insulation.

Aluminum backdraft damper. Coordinate with drawings for duct connection

requirements. Provide inter-connecting duct, and roof jack with bird screen.

E. Motor Construction: Continuous duty motor. Motor disconnect shall be internal plug in

type. Access for wiring shall be external.

F. Labeling on Unit: Fans shall bear the AMCA Certified ratings seals for sound and air

performance fans shall be UL Listed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. See Specification Section 01600 for Manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads.

C. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Ensure metal

bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch (25 mm) flex between ductwork

and fan while running.

D. Provide safety screen where inlet or outlet is exposed.

E. Provide backdraft dampers on inlet or discharge of exhaust fans and as indicated. Do not

install grease exhaust systems with backdraft dampers.

F. Do not operate fans in normal operation until ductwork is clean, filters are in place,

bearings are lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

G. Install on level on roof curbs as indicated. Isolate and anchor per manufacturer’s

instructions.

H. Coordinate with electrical for routing of conduit. Do not cut fan housing to route

conduit.




AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - 1

SECTION 23 3700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Diffusers.

B. Registers/grilles.

C. Louvers.


A. Specification Section for Painting: Painting of ductwork visible behind outlets and inlets.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ADC 1062 - Certification, Rating and Test Manual.

B. ARI 650 - Air Outlets and Inlets.

C. ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Outlets and

Inlets.

D. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

F. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and

inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of

outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level.



B. Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets.


A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ADC Equipment Test

Code 1062 and ASHRAE 70.



AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - 2

B. Test and rate louver performance in accordance with AMCA 500.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 See the Grilles and Diffusers Schedule on the Drawings. Meet all construction standards and

features of the specified unit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to

conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. Double check

ceiling types for lay-in and surface mounting prior to ordering.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and OBDs on grilles and

registers unless indicated otherwise.

E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Specification

Section on painting.




CONDENSING BOILERS 23 5216 - 1

SECTION 23 5216 - CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract apply to this Section, including General

and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes packaged, factory-fabricated and -assembled, gas-fired, fire-tube

condensing boilers, trim and accessories for generating hot water.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties

and accessories.

1. Prior to flue vent installation, engineered calculations and drawings must be

submitted to Architect/Engineer to thoroughly demonstrate that size and configu-

ration conform to recommended size, length and footprint for each submitted

boiler.

B. Efficiency Curves: At a minimum, submit efficiency curves for 100%, 80%, 60%, 40%

20%, and 7% input firing rates at incoming water temperatures ranging from 80°F to

160°F. Test protocols shall conform to AERCO’s AE-1 standards and shall be witnessed

and reviewed by an independent, third-party group.

C. Pressure Drop Curve. Submit pressure drop curve for flows ranging from 0 GPM to

maximum value of boiler

1. If submitted material is different from that of the design basis, boiler manufacture

shall incur all costs associated with reselection of necessary pumps. Possible dif-

ferences include, but are not limited to, the pump type, pump pad size, electrical

characteristics and piping changes.

D. Shop Drawings: For boilers, boiler trim and accessories, include:

1. Plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work

2. Wiring Diagrams for power, signal and control wiring

E. Source Quality Control Test Reports: Reports shall be included in submittals.

F. Field Quality Control Test Reports: Reports shall be included in submittals.




G. Operation and Maintenance Data: Data to be included in boiler emergency, operation and

maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Standard warranty specified in this Section

I. Other Informational Submittals:

1. ASME Stamp Certification and Report: Submit "A," "S," or "PP" stamp certificate of

authorization, as required by authorities having jurisdiction, and document hydrostatic

testing of piping external to boiler.


A. Electrical Components, Devices and Accessories: Boilers must be listed and labeled as

defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. I=B=R Performance Compliance: Condensing boilers must be rated in accordance with

applicable federal testing methods and verified by AHRI as capable of achieving the

energy efficiency and performance ratings as tested within prescribed tolerances.

C. ASME Compliance: Condensing boilers must be constructed in accordance with ASME

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV “Heating Boilers”.

D. ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Boilers shall have minimum efficiency according to

"Gas and Oil Fired Boilers - Minimum Efficiency Requirements."

E. DOE Compliance: Minimum efficiency shall comply with 10 CFR 430, Subpart B,

Appendix N, "Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces

and Boilers."

F. UL Compliance: Boilers must be tested for compliance with UL 795, "Commercial-

Industrial Gas Heating Equipment." Boilers shall be listed and labeled by a testing

agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

G. NOx Emission Standards: When installed and operated in accordance with

manufacturer’s instructions, condensing boilers shall comply with the NOx emission

standards outlined in South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), Rule

1146.1; and the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (TCEQ), Title 30, Chapter

117, Rule 117.465.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases.

Concrete, reinforcement and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.




1.6 WARRANTY

A. Standard Warranty: Boilers shall include manufacturer's standard form in which

manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of boilers that fail in materials or

workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period for Fire-Tube Condensing Boilers

a. The pressure vessel/heat exchanger shall carry a 10-year from shipment, pro-

rated, limited warranty against any failure due to condensate corrosion, ther-

mal stress, mechanical defects or workmanship.

b. Manufacturer labeled control panels are conditionally warranted against fail-

ure for (2) two years from shipment.

c. All other components, with the exception of the igniter and flame detector,

are conditionally guaranteed against any failure for 18 months from shipment

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following:

C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Lochinvar

Boilers.

1. Lochinvar High Efficiency Boilers as scheduled.

2.2 CONSTRUCTION

A. Description: Boiler shall be natural gas fired, fully condensing, fire tube design. Power

burner shall have full modulation (the minimum firing rate shall not exceed 200,000

BTU/HR input. Boilers that have an input greater than 200,000 BTU/Hr at minimum fire

will not be considered) and discharge into a positive pressure vent. Boiler efficiency shall

increase with decreasing load (output), while maintaining setpoint. Boiler shall be

factory-fabricated, factory-assembled and factory-tested, fire-tube condensing boiler with

heat exchanger sealed pressure-tight, built on a steel base, including insulated jacket,

flue-gas vent, combustion-air intake connections, water supply, return and condensate

drain connections, and controls.

B. Heat Exchanger: The heat exchanger shall be constructed of 316L stainless steel fire

tubes and tubesheets, with a one-pass combustion gas flow design. The fire tubes shall be

5/8” OD, with no less than 0.065” wall thickness. The upper and lower stainless steel

tubesheet shall be no less than 0.375” thick. The pressure vessel/heat exchanger shall be

welded construction. The heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure




not less than 160 psig. Access to the tubesheets and heat exchanger shall be available by

burner and exhaust manifold removal. Minimum access opening shall be no less than 10-

inch diameter.

C. Pressure Vessel: The pressure vessel shall have a maximum water volume of 49 gallons.

The boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed 5.5 psig at 258 gpm. The boiler water

connections shall be 4-inch flanged 150-pound, ANSI rated. The pressure vessel shall be

constructed of SA53 carbon steel, with a 0.25-inch thick wall and 0.50-inch thick upper

head. Inspection openings in the pressure vessel shall be in accordance with ASME

Section IV pressure vessel code. The boiler shall be designed so that the thermal

efficiency increases as the boiler firing rate decreases.

D. Modulating Air/Fuel Valve and Burner: The boiler burner shall be capable of a 15-to-1

turndown ratio of the firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency or staging of gas

valves. The burner shall produce less than 30 ppm of NOx corrected to 3% excess

oxygen. The unit shall be certified by the South Coast Air Quality Management District

(SCAQMD) as compliant with Rule 1146.1 for boilers and water heaters greater than 2

MBTU’s and less than 5 MBTUs. The burner shall be metal-fiber mesh covering a

stainless steel body with spark ignition and flame rectification. All burner material

exposed to the combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction. There shall be no

moving parts within the burner itself. A modulating air/fuel valve shall meter the air and

fuel input. The modulating motor must be linked to both the gas valve body and air valve

body with a single linkage. The linkage shall not require any field adjustment. A variable

frequency drive (VFD), controlled cast aluminum pre-mix blower shall be used to ensure

the optimum mixing of air and fuel between the air/fuel valve and the burner.

E. Exhaust Manifold: The exhaust manifold shall be of corrosion resistant cast aluminum

with an 8-inch diameter flue connection. The exhaust manifold shall have a collecting

reservoir and a gravity drain for the elimination of condensation.

F. Blower: The boiler shall include a variable-speed, DC centrifugal fan to operate during

the burner firing sequence and pre-purge the combustion chamber.

1. Motors: Blower motors shall comply with requirements specified in Di

vision 23 Section "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."

a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so

driven load will not require a motor to operate in the service factor range

above 1.0.

G. Ignition: Ignition shall be via spark ignition with 100 percent main-valve shutoff and

electronic flame supervision.

2.3 CONTROLS

A. Refer to Division 23, Section Facility Management System and drawings for control

schematics.




B. The boiler control system shall be segregated into three components: “C-More” Control

Panel, Power Box and Input/Output Connection Box. The entire system shall be

Underwriters Laboratories recognized.

C. The control panel shall consist of six individual circuit boards using state-of-the-art

surface-mount technology in a single enclosure. These circuit boards shall include:

1. A display board incorporating LED display to indicate temperature and a vacuum

fluorescent display module for all message enunciation

2. A CPU board housing all control functions

3. An electric low-water cutoff board with test and manual reset functions

4. A power supply board

5. An ignition /stepper board incorporating flame safeguard control

6. A connector board

Each board shall be individually field replaceable.

D. The combustion safeguard/flame monitoring system shall use spark ignition and a

rectification-type flame sensor.

E. The control panel hardware shall support both RS-232 and RS-485 remote

communications.

F. The controls shall anunciate boiler and sensor status and include extensive self-diagnostic

capabilities that incorporate a minimum of eight separate status messages and 34 separate

fault messages.

G. The control panel shall incorporate three self-governing features designed to enhance

operation in modes where it receives an external control signal by eliminating nuisance

faults due to over-temperature, improper external signal or loss of external signal. These

features include:

1. Setpoint High Limit: Setpoint high limit allows for a selectable maximum boiler

outlet temperature and acts as temperature limiting governor. Setpoint limit is

based on a PID function that automatically limits firing rate to maintain outlet

temperature within a 0 to 10 degree selectable band from the desired maximum

boiler outlet temperature.

2. Setpoint Low Limit: Allow for a selectable minimum operating temperature.

3. Failsafe Mode: Failsafe mode allows the boiler to switch its mode to operate

from an internal setpoint if its external control signal is lost, rather than shut off.

This is a selectable mode, enabling the control can to shut off the unit upon loss

of external signal, if so desired.

H. The boiler control system shall incorporate the following additional features for enhanced

external system interface:

1. System start temperature feature

2. Pump delay timer

3. Auxiliary start delay timer

4. Auxiliary temperature sensor




5. Analog output feature to enable simple monitoring of temperature setpoint, outlet

temperature or fire rate

6. Remote interlock circuit

7. Delayed interlock circuit

8. Fault relay for remote fault alarm

I. Each boiler shall include an electric, single-seated combination safety shutoff

valve/regulator with proof of closure switch in its gas train. Each boiler shall incorporate

dual over-temperature protection with manual reset, in accordance with ASME Section

IV and CSD-1.

J. Boiler Management System (BMS): The Boiler Manufacturer shall supply as part of the

boiler package a completely integrated Boiler Management System Programmer to

control all operation and energy input of the multiple boiler heating plant. The Boiler

Management System shall be comprised of a microprocessor based control utilizing the

MODBUS protocol to communicate with the Boilers via the RS-485 port. The BMS

controller shall have the ability to operate up to 32 boilers per BMS panel.

K. The controller shall have the ability to vary the firing rate and energy input of each

individual boiler throughout its full modulating range to maximize the condensing

capability and thermal efficiency output of the entire heating plant. The BMS shall

control the boiler outlet header temperature within +2ºF. The controller shall be a PID

type controller and uses Ramp Up/Ramp Down control algorithm for accurate

temperature control with excellent variable load response. The BMS controller shall

provide contact closure for auxiliary equipment such as system pumps and combustion

air inlet dampers based upon outdoor air temperature.

L. When set on Internal Setpoint Mode, temperature control setpoint on the BMS shall be

fully field adjustable from 50ºF to 190ºF in operation. When set on Indoor/Outdoor Reset

Mode, the BMS will operate on an adjustable inverse ratio in response to outdoor

temperature to control the main header temperature. Reset ratio shall be fully field

adjustable from 0.3 to 3.0 in operation. When set on 4ma to 20ma Temperature Control

Mode, the BMS will operate the plant to vary header temperature setpoint linearly as an

externally applied 4-20 ma signal is supplied.

M. When set on MODBUS Temperature Control Mode, the BMS will operate the plant to

vary header temperature setpoint as an external communication utilizing the MODBUS

protocol is supplied via the RS-232 port. The BMS controller shall have a vacuum

fluorescent display for monitoring of all sensors and interlocks. Non-volatile memory

backup of all control parameters shall be internally provided as standard. The controller

will automatically balance the sequence of operating time on each boiler by a first-on

first-off mode and provide for setback and remote alarm contacts. Connection between

central BMS system and individual boilers shall be twisted pair low voltage wiring, with

the boilers ‘daisy-chained’ for ease of installation.

2.4 ELECTRICAL POWER

A. Controllers, Electrical Devices and Wiring: Electrical devices and connections are

specified in Division 26 sections.




B. Single-Point Field Power Connection: Factory-installed and factory-wired switches,

motor controllers, transformers and other electrical devices shall provide a single-point

field power connection to the boiler.

C. Electrical Characteristics:

1. Refer to drawings and manufacturer’s data.

2.5 VENTING

A. The exhaust vent must be UL Listed for use with Category III and IV appliances and

compatible with operating temperatures up to 480°F, positive pressure, condensing flue

gas service. UL-listed vents of Al 29-4C stainless steel must be used with boilers.

B. The minimum exhaust vent duct size for each boiler is eight-inch diameter.

C. Combustion-Air Intake: Boilers shall be capable of drawing combustion air from the

outdoors via a metal or PVC duct connected between the boiler and the outdoors.

D. The minimum sealed combustion air duct size for each boiler is eight-inch diameter.

E. Common vent and common combustion air must be an available option for boiler

installation. Consult manufacturer for common vent and combustion air sizing.

F. Follow guidelines specified in manufacturer’s venting guide.

2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Burner and Hydrostatic Test: Factory adjust burner to eliminate excess oxygen, carbon

dioxide, oxides of nitrogen emissions and carbon monoxide in flue gas, and to achieve

combustion efficiency. Perform hydrostatic testing.

B. Test and inspect factory-assembled boilers, before shipping, according to ASME Boiler

and Pressure Vessel Code.

1. If boilers are not factory assembled and fire-tested, the local vendor is

responsible for all field assembly and testing.

C. Allow Owner access to source quality-control testing of boilers. Notify Architect fourteen

days in advance of testing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Before boiler installation examine roughing-in for concrete equipment bases, anchor-bolt

sizes and locations and piping and electrical connections to verify actual locations, sizes

and other conditions affecting boiler performance, maintenance and operations.




1. Final boiler locations indicated on Drawings are approximate. Determine exact

locations before roughing-in for piping and electrical connections.

B. Examine mechanical spaces for suitable conditions where boilers will be installed.


3.2 BOILER INSTALLATION

A. Install boilers level on concrete bases. Concrete base is specified in Division 23 Section

"Common Work Results for HVAC," and concrete materials and installation

requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Install gas-fired boilers according to NFPA 54.

C. Assemble and install boiler trim.

D. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be factory mounted.

E. Install control wiring to field-mounted electrical devices.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 sections. Drawings

indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to boiler to permit service and maintenance.

C. Install piping from equipment drain connection to nearest floor drain. Piping shall be at

least full size of connection. Provide an isolation valve if required.

D. Connect gas piping to boiler gas-train inlet with unions. Piping shall be at least full size

of gas train connection. Provide a reducer if required.

E. Connect hot-water piping to supply and return boiler tappings with shutoff valve and

union or flange at each connection.

F. Install piping from safety relief valves to nearest floor drain.

G. Boiler Venting

1. Install flue venting kit and combustion-air intake.

2. Connect venting full size to boiler connections. [Comply with requirements in

Division 23 Section "Breechings, Chimneys and Stacks."]

H. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for

Electrical Systems."




I. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power

Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies and equipment installations, including connections,

and to assist in testing.

B. Tests and Inspections

1. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

2. Perform hydrostatic test. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Adjust air-fuel ratio

and combustion.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls

and equipment.

a. Check and adjust initial operating set points and high- and low-limit safety set

points of fuel supply, water level and water temperature.

b. Set field-adjustable switches and circuit-breaker trip ranges as indicated.

C. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

D. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 2 months of date of Substantial

Completion, provide on-site assistance adjusting system to suit actual occupied

conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours

for this purpose.

E. Performance Tests:

The boiler manufacturer is expected to provide partial load thermal efficiency curves.

These thermal efficiency curves must include at least three separate curves at various

BTU input levels. If these curves are not available, it is the responsibility of the boiler

manufacturer to complete the following performance tests:

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect component assemblies

and equipment installations, including connections, and to conduct performance test-

ing.

2. Boilers shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as determined by

field performance tests. Adjust, modify, or replace equipment to comply.

3. Perform field performance tests to determine capacity and efficiency of boilers.

a. Test for full capacity.




b. Test for boiler efficiency at [low fire 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 80, 60, 40 and 20] per-

cent of full capacity. Determine efficiency at each test point.

4. Repeat tests until results comply with requirements indicated.

5. Provide analysis equipment required to determine performance.

6. Provide temporary equipment and system modifications necessary to dissipate the

heat produced during tests if building systems are not adequate.

7. Notify Architect in advance of test dates.

8. Document test results in a report and submit to Architect.




REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 6010 - 1

SECTION 236010 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for HVAC applications.


A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-410A:

1. Liquid, Suction, & Discharge Gas Lines for HVAC Applications: 550 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping on drawings,valve arrangements and

locations if thru-port shut off valves are to be used, connection details. Show interface

and spatial relationships between piping and equipment.

1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot (1:50).

2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Piping Layout and

Sizing to conform to Equipment Manufacturers requirements and piping

limitations to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of

connected equipment.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Installation Training certificates

D. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

B. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

C. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping

interior and exterior are clean when installed.




1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: Refrigeration Copper Type L or ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Brazing Filler Metals: 15% Silver Brazing Alloy

2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Valves:

1. If Manual Shut Off Valves Are Required Use Only Complete Thru-Port Valves

With Downstream Pressure Port.

B. Specialties:

1. Filter Driers, Strainers, Flexible Connectors, Sight Glasses, Moisture Indicators,

Oil Traps, Check Valves, Non Thru-Port Service Valves, Solenoid Valves,

Pressure Relief Valves, Thermostatic Expansion Valves, Mufflers, Liquid

Accumulators, or other Specialties shall be applied in strict accordance with

Manufacturers Requirements.

2.3 REFRIGERANTS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,

the following:

1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc.

2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div.

3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants.

4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.

B. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-410A

A. Liquid, Suction, & Discharge Gas Lines for Variable Refrigerant Flow Air-Conditioning

Applications: Copper, Type L or ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper

fittings with brazed joints.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Complete Thru-Port Manual Shut Off Valves with Downstream Pressure Taps may be

used if scheduled or shown on drawings.

1. Filter Driers, Strainers, Flexible Connectors, Sight Glasses, Moisture Indicators,

Oil Traps, Check Valves, Non Thru-Port Service Valves, Solenoid Valves,

Pressure Relief Valves, Thermostatic Expansion Valves, Mufflers, Liquid

Accumulators, or other Specialties shall be provided and installed in strict

accordance with Manufacturers Requirements.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of

piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and other

design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are

approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment

rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at

right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically


E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel

removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags, bends, & traps.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating

pressure.

J. Install Refrigerant Piping In Accordance With Manufacturers Installation Requirements.




K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows,

and fittings.

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves

if required in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors

or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or

equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground and all

underground piping must adhere to manufacturer’s installation requirements.

N. Install Expansion Loops per manufacturer’s installation requirements as required.

O. When brazing refrigerant piping a minimum 3psi Dry Nitrogen purge is required to

prevent oxidation formation on the interior walls of the brazed joint.

P. Identify refrigerant piping and valves according to Division 15 Section "Identification for

HVAC Piping and Equipment."

Q. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for sleeves specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for

HVAC Piping."

R. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with

requirements for sleeve seals specified in Division 15 Section "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals

for HVAC Piping."

S. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with

requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 15 Section "Escutcheons for HVAC

Piping."

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before

assembly.

C. Fill pipe and fittings with an inert gas (nitrogen), during brazing or welding, to prevent

scale formation.

D. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe

and Tube."

1. Use 15% Silver Brazing Alloy for joining copper fittings with copper pipe.

3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS




A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and

Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet (6

m) long.

2. Horizontal Runs of Refrigerant Piping to be free-floating to alloy for expansion

and contraction of copper pipe. If clamps are required use clamps that allow for

pipe to move inside insulation.

3. Hydrosorb or Cushion Clamps are not recommended for horizontal runs but may

be used for vertical runs of refrigerant piping.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod

sizes:

1. NPS 1/2 (DN 15): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4

inch (6.4 mm).

2. NPS 5/8 (DN 18): Maximum span, 60 inches (1500 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4

inch (6.4 mm).

3. NPS 1 (DN 25): Maximum span, 72 inches (1800 mm); minimum rod size, 1/4

inch (6.4 mm).

4. NPS 1-1/4 (DN 32): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size,

3/8 inch (9.5 mm).

5. NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40): Maximum span, 96 inches (2400 mm); minimum rod size,

3/8 inch (9.5 mm).

D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.


A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections:

1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI.

2. Test Liquid, Suction, & Discharge Gas refrigerant piping lines to 550psi dry

nitrogen for 24hrs per manufacturers requirements. Test piping of each system

separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance

Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure.

b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout

duration of test.

c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a

small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints.

d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory

results are achieved.

3.7 SYSTEM EVACUATION




A. Evacuate system using the following procedures:

1. Use vacuum pump capable of 29+ inches of vacuum

2. Confirm Condensing Unit main shut off valves are closed completely.

3. Vacuum Pump to have check valve to prevent mineral oil to be drawn into

system.

4. Vacuum Pump to have fresh oil prior to evacuation.

5. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to hold at 4000 microns.

6. Break vacuum with dry nitrogen to 2-3psi pressure and hold for 15 minutes.


Hold for 20 minutes.

8. Break vacuum with dry nitrogen to 2-3psi pressure and hold for 15 minutes.


Hold for 60 minutes minimum.

10. System is ready to add additional refrigerant charge.

11. Additional Refrigerant Charge To Be Calculated By Equipment Manufacturers

Representative.

3.8 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures:

1. Use only R-410A Refrigerant.

2. Liquid only to be added to system.

3. Follow Manufacturers procedures to charge system.

4. Once charged, Condensing Unit main shut off valves can be opened and system

can be commissioned.




COMPUTER ROOM DX AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM 23 8123- 1

SECTION 23 8123– COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. These specifications describe requirements for a mission critical environmental control system.

The system shall be designed to control temperature and humidity conditions in rooms

containing electronic equipment, with good insulation and vapor barrier. The manufacturer

shall design and furnish all equipment to be fully compatible with the heat dissipation

requirements of the room. This section addresses environmental control direct expansion (DX)

cooling equipment used with server cabinets in an integral line up to provide localized cooling

for equipment in server cabinets.


A. Project plans, schedules, drawings and general provisions of the Contract as they apply to this

Section.

B. ASHRAE Std. 52.2-1999, Method of Testing General Ventilation Air-Cleaning Devices for

Removal Efficiency by Particulate Size

1.3 DEFINITION

A. BAS: Building Automation System

B. DX: Direct Expansion

C. EC: Electronically Commutated

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Pre Delivery Submittals shall be provided with the proposal and shall include:

1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated include rated capacities, operating

characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories

2. Shop Drawings: Single-line diagrams; dimensional, capacity data; and piping.

3 Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. pecification Compliance with

“C” Comply, “D” Deviation, or “N” Non-Compliant indicated for each paragraph, with

appropriate notes and comments.Post Delivery Submittal for record purposes shall in-

clude:

Operation and Maintenance Data: To include operation, and maintenance.

Warranty: Warranty statement for equipment provided.




1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. The direct expansion (DX) row based cooling equipment shall be a self-contained factory

assembled, piped, wired and factory run tested prior to shipment.

1. Removal of the unit from the row of servers shall not be required for maintenance access.

2. The units shall have horizontal airflow delivery

3. The total cooling capacity (total and sensible), entering air conditions, air flow and elec-

trical power requirements shall be as detailed on the project plans and schedule.

4. Net capacities shall include losses due to fan motor heat.

5. Quantities and configurations as shown on the project drawings.

6. Safety Certification: Units shall be ETL or UL listed.


A. The following specification describes the performance requirements for the direct expansion

(DX) row based cooling equipment following the formal acceptance and throughout the life of

the product.

1. During the warranty and contract periods, the equipment must remain fully operational

and available for use and meet the design requirements.

2. The equipment provided should meet the capacity expectations stated in the project plans

and schedule and continue to meet functional, reliability, and performance requirements

of this contract after final acceptance

3. In the event that the equipment fails to meet any requirements of this specification and

the project plans and schedule after acceptance and during the warranty period, the

manufacturer must take appropriate steps to correct the problem and bring the equipment

back into compliance with the performance and reliability requirements at no cost to the

buyer.


A. The manufacturer shall define and manage a process necessary to ensure that product and/or

service conforms to customer requirements. As a means of implementing and demonstrating

the defined processes, establish a quality management system in accordance with ISO

9001International Standard.

B. Product Safety: Product shall comply with North American safety standards. Tested by one of

the following and bearing label indicating conditions of use:

1. Intertek (ETL Listed Mark)

2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL)

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Installing Contractor to coordinate installation of equipment with computer-room access

flooring Installer.

B. Installing Contractor to coordinate installation of equipment with server and network cabinet

Installer.




1.9 WARRANTY

A. Parts that fail during this period shall be repaired or a new part supplied by the manufacturer at

no cost to the owner. Seller warrants its equipment to Buyer to be free from defects in material

and workmanship for a period of eighteen (18) months from date of shipment, as long as

equipment is utilized under normal conditions and service and is properly installed.

B. Manufacturer’s warranty shall be for parts only. Labor is not included


A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective

covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Filters: One (1) set of filters for each unit.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DIRECT EXPANSION (DX) ROW BASED COOLING EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the

following manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Data Aire gForce IR direct expansion (DX) row based cooling

equipment or comparable product by one of the following:

1. APC.

2. Liebert Corporation.

C. DESCRIPTION: The environmental control, direct expansion (DX) row based cooling

equipment shall be provided with a high sensible cooling system, self-contained, factory

assembled, piped, wired, and factory tested prior to shipment. Units shall include an

enclosure/cabinet assembly, fan section, filter section, cooling coil, compressor, controls, and

interconnecting piping internal to unit. The refrigeration circuit on the 24” model shall be a

split type with an indoor evaporator section and remote outdoor condenser.

D. CABINET AND FRAME:

1. Frame: Welded, braced for rigidity, and supporting other mechanical equipment and

fittings. Constructed of 16 gauge welded tubular steel.

2. Front and rear access: Fabricated steel doors with hinges.

3. Side panels: Fabricated with 18-gauge steel sheet metal for superior sound attenuation.

4. Insulation: Thermally and acoustically insulate cabinet interior lined with 1/2 inch thick,

foamed insulation. Each door shall be provided with polyurethane gaskets to prevent air

leakage.

5. Finish of Exterior Surfaces: Powder coated with a heavy corrosion inhibiting finish for

long life.

6. The unit shall be painted the color selected from the manufacturers standard color

selection chart.




7. The unit shall be mounted on casters for quick installation and provided with leveling

feet.

8. The front door shall utilize two cartridges that turn the supply air 90 degrees in order to

provide cooling directly in front of the neighboring server cabinets. The cartridges shall

be user adjustable so that air can be directed to left and right sides, left only, right only or

straight out the front.

9. The evaporator section shall be provided with condensate drain pan constructed of

stainless steel and provide a positive drain to prevent standing water in the condensate

pan.

10. Two (2) manually actuated via a hand tool door latches.

E. FANS SECTION:

1. The supply air fans shall be single width, single inlet plenum fan with backward inclined

blades. Fan wheel shall be directly connected to its motor for greater efficiency.

Fan/motor assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced for quiet, vibration-free

operation. The fans shall be maintenance free throughout its operating life.

2. The fan motor shall be an electronically commutated (EC) synchronous DC motor;

commonly referred to as EC fans, having soft start capability and shall be controlled via

the unit mounted dap4 controller and automatically regulated through all modes of

operation; independent of valve modulation.

3. Each fan shall have fault monitoring circuitry and integral speed controller for a level of

redundancy.

4. The fans shall be mounted within the unit and electrically interlocked to shut down the

fans, compressor, reheat and humidifier if the front door is opened while the unit is in

operation.

5. The system shall be designed for draw through air arrangement to ensure even air

distribution to the entire face of the coil.

6. In the event of a fan failure, each fan can be individually replaced without removing

power from all the functioning fans.

7. Belt drive fans with variable frequency drives are not considered equal or acceptable.

F. DIRECT EXPANSION EVAPORATOR COOLING COIL:

1. The evaporator direct expansion coil shall be vertically mounted to allow maximum coil

surface in a small cabinet. The direct expansion cooling coil shall be constructed of

seamless copper tubes expanded into enhanced style aluminum fins for maximum heat

transfer and shall be rated for a maximum pressure of 600 PSI.

2. The cooling coil shall be mounted in a stainless steel drain pan. Condensate shall be

drained via an optional condensate pump.

3. The discharge (hot gas) and liquid refrigerant piping ports are sealed and pressurized with

dry nitrogen for shipment to indicate a leak-free system at installation.

4. Refrigerant pipe connections shall be terminated three (3) inches inside the bottom of the

cabinet for field connection to piping coming from below.

G. VARIBLE SPEED COMPRESSOR

1. The unit shall be configured with a variable speed scroll compressor using a matching

variable frequency drive (VFD) assembly for system capacity control.

2. The VFD varies the frequency to the compressor (i.e., speed) range to accommodate

varying load conditions.




3. The VFD firmware is written to include oil return protection in cases where pipe

velocities may drop to low speeds during low loading periods.

4. The compressor shall be electrically protected through the VFD with complete overload

protection on all three power lines and internal thermostat for winding protection.

H. REFRIGERATION CIRCUIT

1. Air Cooled Split System with Remote Outdoor Air-Cooled Condenser

a. The refrigeration system shall be a split system consisting of an indoor evaporator

and remote air-cooled outdoor condenser.

b. The refrigeration circuit shall be R-410A single circuit system.

c. The refrigerant system shall include a compressor, cooling coil, electronic

expansion valve, sight-glass and a filter drier.

d. The circuit shall contain high and low pressure safety switches. The high and low-

pressure safety switches shall be installed with Schrader type fittings with valve

core that allows replacement without affecting the refrigerant charge, making

recovery unnecessary

e. Remote Outdoor Air-Cooled Condenser

1) The remote outdoor air-cooled condenser shall be a low profile with direct

drive axial fans with electronically commutated (EC) synchronous DC

motors; commonly referred to as EC fans. The EC motors have soft start

capability.

2) The condenser housing shall be constructed of aluminum and contain a

copper tube and aluminum fin coil for maximum heat transfer.

3) The air discharge shall be vertical to minimize the effects of wind blowing

through the coil at low ambient temperatures.

4) The condenser shall have the ability to control the fan speed via a pressure

transducer feedback signal to modulate the speed of the fans and provide

positive start-up and operation at ambient temperatures down to -20ºF (-

29ºC).

5) All controls including the fan speed control shall be factory mounted in the

air cooled condenser in an integral factory wired and tested control panel.

6) The air cooled condenser shall be manufactured by the manufacturer of the

indoor evaporator unit.

f. The evaporator and condenser shall be factory assembled and tested.

g. Piping and wiring between the indoor evaporator and the remote outdoor air-

cooled condenser shall be field provided by the installing contractor.

I. ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE

1. The electronic expansion valve (EEV) shall be an electronic expansion type control by a

dedicated driver. This driver shall communicate with the dap4 controller via Modbus and

shall have the ability to display the following information on the controller display:

a. Superheat setpoint

b. Suction temperature

c. Suction pressure

d. EEV opening position

2. The controller shall display an alarm if suction pressure is too low or too high.

3. The evaporator fan can be controlled to prevent high or low suction pressure to protect

the compressor.




4. The EEV uses a stepper motor for high precision control, allowing a low superheat

setpoint with improved system efficiency.

5. The control logic of the EEV shall be based on Proportional-Integral (PI) operation via

the dap4 controller. The P and I values shall be factory tested for accurate and robust

control.

J. FILTRATION:

1. The filter chamber shall be an integral part of the system, designed within the rear portion

of the unit for easy accessibility.

2. An initial set of filters shall be factory installed in the unit.

3. Filters shall be 2-inch deep, disposable, pleated design, extended-surface, nonwoven,

reinforced cotton fabric; supported and bonded to welded-wire grid; enclosed in

cardboard frame design.

4. Rated not less than MERV 8 per ASHRAE Std. 52.2.

5. A filter differential switch for alarm activation shall be included.

K. ELECTRICAL:

1. All electrical components, including contactors, relays and control transformers shall be

pre-wired and contained in a hinged unit-mounted electrical enclosure with piano-hinged

door that shall swing out for easy access and servicing.

2. The control circuit voltage shall be 24 volts AC.

3. The input electrical power shall be as detailed on the project plans and schedule.

L. MICROPROCESSOR-CONTROL SYSTEM:

1. The environmental control system shall be furnished with a microprocessor based

dapTM

4 panel. The panel shall include unit control functions and display normal

functions and service diagnostics on a backlit liquid crystal display (LCD). The panel

shall allow recall and display of the high and low temperature for the last 24 hours, high

and low humidity for the last 24 hours, current percent of capacity and average percent of

capacity for the last hour of operation for chilled water valve (if applicable), compressor

(if applicable), reheat, humidification, dehumidification, component runtimes (if

applicable) for fan motor(s), reheat, humidification, dehumidification and chilled water

valve. Programming shall have multilevel password access to prevent unauthorized

access. Programming shall be accomplished entirely from the front of the unit without the

need to access, set or program switches inside the unit (front door of the unit does not

need to be opened). Programmable functions shall be entered on flash memory to ensure

program retention should power fail. The historical database shall be maintained by

battery backup. Multiple messages shall be displayed by automatically scrolling from

each message to the next. Alarm conditions shall be displayed by automatically scrolling

from each message to the next. Alarm conditions, in addition to being displayed, shall

enunciate an audible alarm. Four programmable summary contacts shall be available for

remote alarm monitoring. Additional test or service terminal shall not be required for any

functions. The control shall include temperature anticipation, moisture level humidity

control and automatic flush cycles.

2. An alarm condition shall continue to be displayed until the malfunction is corrected. Mul-

tiple alarms shall be displayed sequentially in order of occurrence and only those alarms

which have not been acknowledged shall continue to sound an audible alarm. The dap4

panel shall perform an automatic self-test on system start-up. A user accessible diagnostic

program shall aid in system component trouble shooting by displaying on the unit LCD




screen the name of the controlled item, output relay number, terminal plug and pin number

for each controlled item.

3. The following automatic control functions shall be included (as applicable):

Start Time Delay

Temperature Anticipation Automatic or Manual Restart

Dehumidification Lockout Humidity Anticipation

Sequential Load Activation

Latent Anticipation Suction Pressure

4. The following conditions, data and normal functions shall be monitored and displayed (as

applicable)::

Current Date and Time Unit Status

Temperature Setpoint Humidity Setpoint

Current Temperature Current Humidity

Cooling Dehumidification

Reheat Humidification

Current Percent of Capacity Utilized Current Discharge Temperature*

Current Fan Speed Current Rack Temperature 1, 2 and 3

Max Rack Temperature

5. The following switching and control functions shall be included:

Alarm Silence Button Select Buttons (Up and Down)

Menu Selection Button Enter Button (Menu Exit/Program Set)

System On/Off/Esc Button

Manual Override switches (as applicable): for:

Cooling Reheat

Humidification CW Valve

Fan ON/OFF and Speed

6. The following alarm functions shall be monitored and displayed when they occur in addi-

tion to enunciating an audible alarm (as applicable):

High Temperature Warning High Humidity Warning

Low Temperature Warning Low Humidity Warning

Dirty Filter

Power Failure Restart Manual Override

Firestat Tripped Humidifier Problem

Maintenance Required Local Alarm

Humidity Sensor Error Discharge Sensor Error

Custom Message*

Smoke Detector* High Condensate Water Level*

Fan Motor Overload* Person to Contact on Alarm*

Rack Temperature Sensor Error 1, 2*, 3* High Suction Pressure

Low Suction Pressure High Pressure Alarm




7. The following historical data shall be available(as applicable):

High Humidity Last 24 Hours Low Humidity Last 24 Hours

Alarm History (Last 100 Alarms) Hourly Average of Duty

Rack Temperature Max last 24 Hours Rack Temperature Min last 24 Hours

Rack Temperature Average Last 24 Hours

Equipment Runtimes for:

Fan(s) Compressor

Reheat Dehumidification

Humidifier Chilled Water Valve

8. The following functions shall be programmable(as applicable):

Temperature Setpoint Temperature Deadband

High Temperature Alarm Limit Low Temperature Alarm Limit

Humidity Setpoint Humidity Deadband

High Humidity Alarm Limit Low Humidity Alarm Limit

Reset Equipment Runtimes Audio Alarm Mode

Manual Diagnosis Humidity Anticipation

Dehumidification Mode Low Discharge Temp Alarm Limit

Power Problem or Restart Mode System Start Delay

Message for Optional Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4* Delay for Optional Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4*

Remote Alarm 1, 2, 3, 4 Selection* Person to contact on Alarm

Define Password Humidifier Autoflush Timer*

Firestat Temperature Alarm Limit Scheduled Normal Maintenance

Temperature Scale Calibrate Temperature Sensor

Calibrate Humidity Humidifier

Water Valve Mode Water Valve Voltage Range

Reverse Acting Water Valve Network Protocol

Analog Module Sensor Setup* Calibrate Discharge Air Sensor*

Calibrate Chilled Water Temperature Sensor* Fan Control Mode

Fan Speed Settings High Dewpoint Setpoint*

High Dewpoint Deadband* Low Dewpoint Setpoint*

Low Dewpoint Deadband* Fan temperature setpoint*

Fan temperature deadband* Superheat Setpoint

High Suction Pressure Setpoint High Suction Pressure Deadband

Low Suction Pressure Setpoint Low Suction Pressure Deadband

Fan Modulation Rate Return Air Cooling Band

Delta-T Setpoint SCR Reheat Band*

Latent Anticipation Setpoint*

* Some of the programmable selections, displays or alarms may require additional com-

ponents or sensors

9. In addition, the dap4 control panel shall support the following network protocols for inte-

gration with a Building Management System (BMS) for Computer Room Air Conditioning

(CRAC) system monitoring and control.

The following protocols shall be supported:

BACnet IP or MS/TP




10. Building Management System Interface: Unit(s) shall be furnished with an optional inter-

face card to communicate directly with the Building Automation System (BAS) through an

RS-485, Ethernet or LonTalk port. All alarms, set points, and operating parameters that are

accessible from the unit mounted control panel shall also be made available through the

BAS.

M. REMOTE RACK TEMPERATURE SENSOR #1:

1. Units shall be provided with one (1) remote rack temperature sensor to be placed on the

inlet of a server rack to provide control input based on rack inlet temperature.

2. Temperature from the sensor shall be displayed on the front panel of the unit.

3. The fan speed shall be controlled based on the temperature measured.

2.2 CAPACITIES AND CHARACTERISTICS

A. The quantity, capacity, and performance shall be as shown on the project plans and schedule.

2.3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. ELECTRIC REHEAT:

1. The reheat shall be of the nichrome wire type with an auto-resetting and a manual

thermal cut out switch per element.

2. The reheat shall be installed on the air discharge side of the cooling coil, shall have a

single stage and provide 6kW of capacity.

3. The reheat shall be capable of maintaining room dry bulb conditions when the system is

calling for dehumidification.

4. The reheat section shall include safety switches to protect the system from overheating.

B. HUMIDIFIER:

1. The unit shall be provided with a self-contained, microprocessor-controlled steam

generator type humidifier. The steam generating humidifier shall use disposable cylinder

type with electronic controls.

2. The capacity shall be 5 pounds per hour. Power consumption shall be 1.7 kW or less.

3. The humidifier shall discharge pure steam with no material dust carry-over and have a

self-regulating automatic flush cycle. Cylinders shall be disposable not requiring

cleaning or maintenance. The humidifier fill level, water conductivity and flush rate shall

automatically adapt, both in frequency and duration, to variations in the incoming water.

4. Fully modulating to provide gradual 0 to 100 percent capacity with field-adjustable

maximum capacity; with high-water probe.

5. Drain duration and drain interval shall be field-adjustable.

6. Humidifiers using an open reservoir in the air stream are not acceptable.

C. DISCONNECT SWITCH:

1. The unit shall include a non-automatic disconnect switch mounted in the high voltage

section of the electrical panel. The operating mechanism shall prevent access to the high

voltage electrical components until switched to the "OFF" position. The operating

mechanism shall protrude through the electrical panel and be lockable in the off position

D. CONDENSATE PUMP:




1. Units shall be provided with dual float condensate pump. If condensate pump fails

control panel shall enunciate an alarm and display "High Condensate Water Level". The

pump shall be rated for:

a. 145 gallons/hour at 40 feet of head at 460VAC.

b. 40 gallons/hour at 20 feet of head at 230VAC or 115VAC.

2. Pumps shall be factory mounted/wired and shall include sump, motor, and automatic

control.

3. A factory installed high condensate water level alarm switch will disable the unit prior to

condensate pan overflow should the drain become plugged with debris.

4. The audio alarm is activated and a “HIGH CONDENSATE WATER LEVEL” message

shall be displayed on the display module.

E. REMOTE RACK TEMPERATURE SENSOR #2 AND #3:

1. Units shall be provided with two (2) additional temperature sensors to be placed in

multiple racks to provide control input based on rack inlet temperature.

2. The controller shall monitor all sensors and can use the maximum temperature to control

fan speed.

F. SMOKE DETECTOR:

1. Unit shall be provided with a smoke detector.

2. The smoke detector shall be mounted with the sensing element in the return air stream.

3. When the smoke detector is activated, it shall immediately shut down the unit.

G. HIGH EFFICIENCY FILTERS

1. Replace the standard MERV 8 filter with MERV 11 filter (based on ASHRAE Std. 52.2).

The filters shall be two-inch (2") deep pleated design.

H. DOOR LOCK

1. One (1) keyed lock on front door.

I. DARA 4 - AUTOMATIC LEAD/LAG PANEL:

1. Unit shall be furnished with an automatic lead/lag control panel.

2. Panel shall be capable of controlling a maximum of four (4) units.

3. Upon occurrence of an alarm on one of the primary units, the panel shall automatically

shut down the primary unit and start standby unit(s) as required.

4. In addition the panel shall rotate the primary and standby units after a user programmable

number of hours to ensure reliable operation and equalize run hours on all units

J. ZONE MASTER OPERATION:

1. Each unit shall be furnished with capability to function as the zone master and control the

operating mode of up to 16 units located in the same zone.

2. Capabilities shall include:

a. Unit lead/lag and standby rotation with an 8 hours to seven days schedule

b. Unit auto changeover by selectable standby or off (critical) alarms

c. Standby unit activation by average zone temperature

d. Zone functions inhibit preventing units from conflicting operation

e. Secondary operating schedule for an economical control solution

f. Programmable unit’s status control (On/Off/Standby)

g. Master unit fail safe mode allows slave units to revert their self-control mode




h. Zone’s blower operation based on maximum rack temperature within the zone

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor to examine the areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for hydronic piping systems to verify actual locations of piping

connections before equipment installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where equipment will be installed.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install precision cooling units in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain

manufacturer’s recommended clearances.

B. Install in conjunction with server cabinets for integrated line up of equipment.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate

general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Piping Connections: Connect equipment furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be

factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s piping connection diagram submittal to

piping contractor. Install piping to allow proper service and maintenance.

C. Electrical Wiring: Install and connect electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not

specified to be factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer’s electrical connection diagram

submittal to electrical contractor.


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,

test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.




1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to

inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and

to assist in testing.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps.

2. After installing equipment and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for

compliance with requirements.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm

proper motor rotation and unit operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

5. The equipment shall be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

6. Prepare test and inspection reports.

7. After startup service and performance test, change filters and flush humidifier (if

applicable).

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to

adjust, operate, and maintain the equipment. Training shall be conducted concurrent with

startup of the equipment.


NMSU CARLSBAD – IT RENOVATION, EMERGENCY GENERATOR AND BOILER REPLACEMENT (AIM # 2779)

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0000 -1

SECTION 26 0000 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. General: This section specifies several categories of provisions for electrical work including: 1) Certain adaptive expansions of requirements specified in Division 1, 2) General performance requirements within the electrical systems as a whole, and 3) General work to be performed as electrical work, because of its close association.

1.3 SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Drawings: Refer to the E-series drawings for graphic representations, schedules and notations showing electrical work.

B. Specifications: Refer to the Division 26 sections for the primary technical specifications of

electrical work. C. General Outline: The facilities and systems of the electrical work can be described (but not

by way of limitation) as follows: 1) Power distribution system, including the electrical connecting of equipment not specified to be connected as work of another division, 2) Motor starters and control/protection work as indicated, 3) Systems of branch circuits for lighting and convenience outlets, 4) Fire alarm system.

1.4 COORDINATION OF ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general coordination requirements applicable to the entire work. It is recognized that the contract documents are diagrammatic in showing certain physical relationships which must be established within the electrical work and in its interface with other work including utilities and mechanical work, and that such establishment is the exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

1. Arrange electrical work in a neat, well organized manner with conduit and similar

services running parallel with primary lines of the building construction. 2. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and

arrange entire electrical work with adequate access for operation and maintenance. 3. Advise other trades of openings required in their work for the subsequent move-in

of large units of electrical work (equipment).

B. Coordination Drawings: For areas, where several elements of electrical (or combined



mechanical and electrical) work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the

available space, prepare coordination drawings (shop drawings) showing the actual physical dimensions (at accurate scale) required for the installation. Prepare and submit these coordination drawings, if required, prior to purchase –fabrication purchase-fabrication-installation of any of these elements involved in the coordination.

C. The drawings and these specifications are complementary, each one to the other, and what is

called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. Carefully examine the drawings and specifications and report any discrepancies affecting the work to the Architect. The Architect will issue such written instructions or interpretations as may be required.

D. The electrical plans are diagrammatic, but shall be followed as closely as actual

construction and the work of the other trades will allow. Such minor changes as are necessary to make the electrical work conform to the work of other trades and to the building shall be made without cost to the Owner. Minor changes are things such as moving a light switch within a room to be on the proper side of the door swing, or moving a light fixture over one or two ceiling tiles.

E. Branch circuit numbers are for guidance only and need not necessarily conform to the

finished job. Actual circuit numbers used shall be recorded on the record documents, and noted correctly on the panel schedules.

F. The maximum number of circuits combined in one raceway shall be three; no circuit shall

be combined without prior approval of the Architect or unless specifically shown on the drawings.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS

A. General: Refer to the General conditions, Supplementary conditions and Division 1 for

general administrative/procedural requirements related to compliance with codes and standards. Specifically, for the electrical work (in addition to standards specified in individual work sections), the following standards are imposed, as applicable to the work in each instance:

1. AWS standards for welding. 2. ANSI C 2, National Electrical Safety Code. 3. ANSI C 73, Dimensions of attachment plugs and receptacles. 4. NECA standards for installation. 5. NEMA standards for materials and products.

1.6 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES

A. All work and material shall conform to the requirements of OSHA and all national and



state Laws and ordinances having jurisdiction at the job site. The (NEC) National Electrical Code, 2008 Edition, or latest edition being enforced, shall be strictly adhered to NEC requirements are considered “minimum requirements". Where requirements of the contract documents exceed NEC, the contract documents govern.

B. Contractors shall be duly licensed to perform the work required, as noted in the

Supplementary Conditions. C. Permits are required as noted in the General Conditions. D. Upon completion of the work, furnish to the Owner a certificate of final inspection and

approval from the electrical inspection bureau having jurisdiction. E. All electrical systems shall be grounded in strict accordance with the requirements of the

National Electrical Code.

1.7 INDUSTRY PUBLICATION STANDARDS

A. The publications and standards of the latest issue at the time of bid, of the following organizations, where referenced in these specifications or on the drawings, shall apply:

1. ANSI---American National Standards Institute 2. ASTM---American Society of Testing and Materials 3. CBM----Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association

4. IEEE---Institute of Electrical and Electronic Architects

5. IPCEA--Insulated Power Cable Engineer’s Association 6. NEC----National Electrical Code 7. NECA---National Electrical Contractors Association 8. NEMA---National Electrical Manufacturers Association 9. NESC---National Electrical Safety Code 10. NFPA---National Fire Protection Association 11. UL-----Underwriters Laboratory 12. IESNA--Illuminating Engineering Society of North America

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division1 for

general requirements concerning work related and administrative submittals.



B. General: 1. Submittal data shall be bound in a 3 ring, 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches

binder with a table of contents listing items in order of specification section and paragraph number.

2. Submittals shall consist of detailed shop drawings, specifications,

catalog "cuts" and data sheets containing physical and dimensioned information, performance data, electrical characteristics, materials used in fabrication, material finish and those which are excluded.

3. Contractor agrees that shop drawing submittals are not change orders; that

the purpose of shop drawing submittals by the contractor is to demonstrate that the contractor understands the design concept, that he demonstrates his understanding by indicating which equipment and material he intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods he intends to use.

C. Specific Requirements: The following items shall be submitted (as a

minimum) in accordance with Paragraphs 1.08.B.1 through 3 (above):

1. Conduit and fittings. 2. 120-600 Volt Wiring 3. Wiring devices and plates. 4. Light fixtures and lamps 5. Panels, starters, contactors, relays, etc. 6. Safety switches. 7. Grounding. 8. Fire alarm equipment and calculations.

1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Use all means necessary to protect electrical materials and equipment before, during and

after installation and to protect the installed work of other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Architect and at no extra cost .

1.10 WARRANTY, GUARANTEE

A. As described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions the work to be

performed shall be guaranteed for a period of one year after substantial completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. General: Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

sections for general requirements on products, materials and equipment. The following provisions expand the requirements as applicable to electrical work:

1. All material shall be new and shall bear the label of the Underwriter's

Laboratories, Inc., or be listed under reexamination service. All materials shall be of the best grade and latest pattern of manufacturer as specified.

2. All work shall be performed in a neat, workmanlike manner and shall

present a neat mechanical appearance when completed. 3. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same

manufacturer. 4. Where no specific material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any

first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets the approval of the Architect.

5. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers

regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design.

a. Altitude: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily for

the function intended at the altitude of the project site. b. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other products

of the electrical work, and with other work requiring interface with the electrical work, including electrical connections and control devices. For exposed electrical work, coordinate colors and finishes with other work.

c. Substitution: Refer to the General Conditions and Supplementary

Conditions for substitution guidelines.. d. Work Quality: Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete

electrical system shall be done in a first class workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the project. The Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions to the Architect before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. In the acceptance or rejection of the finished installation,no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the workmen.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION A. General: Provide engraved plastic laminated nameplates at all locations of major units of

electrical equipment including panelboards, control centers, alarm and similar systems. Nameplates shall be constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, 1/8 inch thick, 3-ply with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be with Roman Gothic lettering, 3/16 inch high, appropriately spaced. Nameplates shall be attached to control devices by use of self tapping flat head chromium plated screws unless approved otherwise. Screw tips on inside of device cover shall be filed to provide a smooth, non-abrasive finish. Gluing, taping and riveting of nameplate to control device is not acceptable. Nameplate information shall include name of panel/equipment, panel electrical characteristics and branch/feeder circuit designation which feeds it. Nomenclature on nameplate(s) shall be similar to the following examples:

Panelboards: Panel L1CA 120/208V, 3PH, 4W CCT. A-28 Air Handler AHU-2 CCT. M2-2 Exhaust Fan EF-5 CCT. P-4

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General: Comply with the requirements of the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of electrical work, except as individually authorized by the Architect, cutting and patching of electrical work to accommodate the installation of other work is not permitted.

B. Structural Limitations: Do not cut structural framing, walls, floors decks and other

members intended to withstand stress, except with the Architect's written authorization. Authorization will be granted only where there is no other reasonable method for completing the electrical work, and where the proposed cutting clearly does not materially weaken the structure.

C. Patching: Where patching is required to restore other work because of either cutting or

other damage inflicted during the installation of electrical work, engage the original installer to complete the patching of the other work. Restore the other work in every respect, including the elimination of visual defects in exposed finishes, as judged by the Architect.

3.3 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: The work of this article is defined to include whatever excavating and backfilling

is necessary to install the electrical work. Coordinate the work with other excavating and



backfilling in the same area, including dewatering, flood protection provisions and other temporary facilities. Coordinate the work with other work in the same area, including other underground services (existing and new), landscape development, paving, and floor slabs on grade. Coordinate with weather conditions and provide temporary facilities needed for protection and proper performance of excavating and backfilling.

3.4 CONCRETE FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

A. General: The work of this article is defined to include whatever concrete work is necessary

or shown specifically to install the electrical work; but excluding equipment base grouting. Coordinate the work with other work, particularly other concrete work and accessories. 1. General Standards: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with applicable

provisions of Division 3 sections for electrical work concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, mix design, materials (if not noted on drawings, use mix designs and materials accepted for Division 3 work where possible), admixtures, accessories (including waterstops), placing of wet concrete, finishing, curing, protecting, testing, submittals, and other requirements of the concrete work. Refer instances of uncertain applicability to the Architect for resolution before proceeding.

3.5 TESTING AND COORDINATION

A. General: Refer to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1

sections for general closeout requirements for the project. Upon completion of the work, the various systems operated under load conditions shall be tested for short circuits and grounds in accordance with the method and resistance values outlined in the National Electrical Code and for load balance on feeders and branch circuits.

B. The complete system shall operate satisfactorily in every respect. Make any repairs or

adjustments necessary to this end to the satisfaction of the Architect. C. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. D. Coordination with Mechanical: Coordinate closeout operations with closeout of mechanical

systems and other power consuming equipment. Accurately record on record documents locations of all conduits which are underground. Test run electrical equipment in coordination with test runs of mechanical system. Clean and lubricate operational equipment. Instruct Owner's operating personnel thoroughly in the operation, sequencing, maintenance and safety/emergency provisions of the electrical systems. Turn over the operations to the Owner's personnel at the time(s) of substantial completion. Until the time of final acceptance of the total work of the contract, respond promptly with consultation and services to assist the Owner's personnel with operation of the electrical systems.

3.6 SAFETY

A. Contractor shall not connect permanent utility power to the electrical distribution system

until it is safe. Contractor shall secure all panel locations or utilize lock-out/tag-out



procedures. Perform work in accordance with OSHA, NFPA 70, NFPA 70E, NESC and other applicable codes to maintain electrical safety at the construction site.

3.7 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS

A. Miscellaneous items not covered in these specifications shall be as indicated on the

drawings, installed and connected by the proper method and as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. During progress of the Work, maintain an accurate record of the installation of the system.

Maintain these drawings as called for in the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification section.



ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 0503 - 1

SECTION 26 05 03 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-

25 and Division -26 section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified herein.


A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment.

B. Applications of electrical connections specified in this section include the following:

1. From electrical source to motor starters. 2. From motor starters to motors. 3. To lighting fixtures. 4. To transformers and similar current adjustment features of equipment. 5. To grounds including earthing connections. 6. To master units of communication, signal, alarm, (clock, public address, sound, and video system).

C. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in

Division-25 and other Division-26 sections, and are work of this section. D. Motor starters and controllers, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in

applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section. E. Refer to Division-25 sections for motor starters and controllers furnished integrally with

equipment; not work of this section. F. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and other electrical units

of equipment are specified in applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section. G. Electrical identification for wire/cable conductors is specified in Division-26 section, "Electrical

Identification", and is work of this section. H. Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment

are specified in applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section. I. Refer to other Division-26 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for

connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment; not work of this section.



J. Refer to Division-25 for control system wiring; not work of this section. K. Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements, not

work of this section.


A. Manufacturer: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes, and cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 2 years of successful installation experience with

projects utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this project. C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used and

installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches.

D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with Std. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power

Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to connections and terminations. E. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI/NEMA and ANSI/EIA standards pertaining to

products and installation of electrical connections for equipment. F. UL Compliance: Comply with Ul Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors" including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide electrical connection products and materials which are UL-listed and -labeled.

G. ETL Compliance: Provide electrical connection products and materials which are ETL-listed and

-labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical connections for equipment products and materials.

B. None Required.


A. Deliver electrical connection products wrapped in proper factory-fabricated type containers.

B. Store electrical connection products in original cartons and protect from weather, construction traffic and debris.

C. Handle electrical connection products carefully to prevent breakage, denting, and scoring finish.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of the type indicated.

B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings:

1. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of the types, grades, sizes and weights

(wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with NEC requirements for raceways. Provide products complying with Division-26 basic materials and methods section "Raceways", and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings.

a. Rigid steel conduit. b. Rigid metal conduit fittings. c. Electrical metallic tubing. d. EMT fittings. e. Flexible metal conduit. f. Flexible metal conduit fittings. g. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. h. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings.

C. Wire, Cable, and Connectors:

1. General: Provide wires, cables and connectors complying with Division 26 basic electrical

materials and methods section "Wires and Cables". 2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for electrical

connections which match, including sizes and ratings, of wires/cables which are supplying electrical power. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F).

3. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and

match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications.

4. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable

insulating tubing and boots, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION



A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. Contractor has full responsibility to verify whether circuit is energized or not and to perform all necessary lock-out/tag-out.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation, as

necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work.

C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.

D. Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating,

than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering, armor, jacket and insulation properly

to ensure a uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire.

F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing

and maintenance. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment

manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A.

H. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections, and other electrical equipment connections,

where subject to movement and vibration. I. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other electrical equipment

where subject to movement and vibration, and also where connections are subjected to one or more of the following conditions:

1. Exterior location. 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. 3. Corrosive atmosphere.



4. Water spray. 5. Dripping oil, grease, or water.

J. Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation. K. Perform all work in conformance with job requirements, other applicable sections of these

specifications, governing codes and ordinances, and manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Electrical Subcontractor shall make any required changes to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, at no additional charge to the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished.

B. Motor starters and motor control devices that are not an integral part of the mechanical equipment

but are furnished with equipment will be turned over to the Electrical Subcontractor for installation and connection.

C. *RESPONSIBILITY LISTING

Wired: Power/Control Motors Furnished by Installed by Contr. Disc switches, thermal EC EC EC overload switches, manual on-off switches Magnetic motor starters- EC EC EC loose Magnetic motor starters- MC MC MC integral w/equipment Motorized valves, damper MC MC MC motors, solenoids, relays thermostats, E-P and P-E switches, etc. Temperature control panels MC MC MC boiler controls MC = Mechanical Subcontractor under Division 25. EC = Electrical Subcontractor under Division 26.



* General Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of efforts between Divisions 25 and 26.

D. Obtain from Mechanical Subcontractor a complete list of all mechanical equipment including

load, voltage, phase, etc., at beginning of job prior to installation of any related electrical services. Advise Architect/Engineer of changes and adjust to meet requirements.

E. Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates as specified. F. Complete all identification cards for switches, starters and other devices in all distribution

panelboards and similar pieces of equipment, on a typewriter in a neat manner and insert the card in the card holder behind a piece of clear plastic. Where the card size is insufficient for the proper identification of all circuits, the index shall be made on a large sheet of paper of proper proportion, and then photo-reduced to fit the card holder.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.




SECTION 26 0508 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-

15 and Division -26 section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified herein.


A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include connections used for providing electrical power to equipment.

B. Applications of electrical connections specified in this section include the following:

1. From electrical source to motor starters. 2. From electrical source to HVAC units and equipment. 3. From motor starters to motors. 4. To lighting fixtures. 5. To transformers and similar current adjustment features of equipment. 6. To grounds including earthing connections. 7. To master units of communication, signal, alarm, (clock, public address, sound, and video

system)

C. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in Division-25 and other Division-26 sections, and are work of this section. D. Motor starters and controllers, not furnished as integral part of equipment, are specified in

applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section. E. Refer to Division-25 sections for motor starters and controllers furnished integrally with

equipment; not work of this section. F. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and other electrical units

of equipment are specified in applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section.

G. Electrical identification for wire/cable conductors is specified in Division-26 section, "Electrical Identification", and is work of this section.

H. Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division-26 sections, and are work of this section.

I. Refer to other Division-26 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required for

connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment; not work of this section.

J. Refer to Division-25 for control system wiring; not work of this section.



K. Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements, not

work of this section.


A. Manufacturer: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes, and cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 2 years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this project.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type of products used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches.

D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with Std. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power

Systems in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to connections and terminations.

E. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable ANSI/NEMA and ANSI/EIA standards pertaining to products and installation of electrical connections for equipment.

F. UL Compliance: Comply with Ul Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with

Copper Conductors" including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide electrical connection products and materials which are UL-listed and -labeled.

G. ETL Compliance: Provide electrical connection products and materials which are ETL-listed and labeled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical connections for equipment products and materials.

B. None Required. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver electrical connection products wrapped in proper factory-fabricated type containers.

B. Store electrical connection products in original cartons and protect from weather, construction traffic and debris.

C. Handle electrical connection products carefully to prevent breakage, denting, and scoring finish.




A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide a complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of the type indicated.

B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings:

1. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of the types, grades, sizes and

weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with NEC requirements for raceways. Provide products complying with Division-26 basic materials and methods section "Raceways", and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings.

a. Rigid steel conduit. b. Rigid metal conduit fittings. c. Electrical metallic tubing. d. EMT fittings. e. Flexible metal conduit. f. Flexible metal conduit fittings. g. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. h. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings.

C. Wire, Cable, and Connectors:

1. General: Provide wires, cables and connectors complying with Division 26 basic

electrical materials and methods section "Wires and Cables". 2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for

electrical connections which match, including sizes and ratings, of wires/cables which are supplying electrical power. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 degrees C (68 degrees F).

3. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate

and match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications.

4. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape,

heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, wire-nuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify General Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer. Contractor has full responsibility to verify whether circuit is energized or not and to perform all necessary lock-out/tag-out.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS



A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written

instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation, as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work. C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.

D. Cover splices with electrical insulation equivalent to, or of greater insulation resistivity rating,

than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced. E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering, armor, jacket and insulation properly to ensure a uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing"copper conductors while skinning wire. F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate inspection, testing

and maintenance. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment

manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A.

H. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections, and other electrical equipment connections, where subject to movement and vibration. This includes interior light fixture whips. I. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other electrical equipment

where subject to movement and vibration, and also where connections are subjected to one or more of the following conditions:

1. Exterior location. 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. 3. Corrosive atmosphere. 4. Water spray. 5. Dripping oil, grease, or water.

J. Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation. K. Perform all work in conformance with job requirements, other applicable sections of these specifications, governing codes and ordinances, and manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS



A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Electrical Subcontractor shall make any required changes to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, at no additional charge to the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished.

B. Motor starters and motor control devices that are not an integral part of the mechanical equipment

but are furnished with equipment will be turned over to the Electrical Subcontractor for installation and connection.

C. *RESPONSIBILITY LISTING

Wired: Power/Control Motors Furnished by Installed by Contr. Disc switches, thermal **EC EC EC overload switches, manual on-off switches Magnetic motor starters- EC EC EC loose Magnetic motor starters- MC MC MC integral w/equipment Motorized valves, damper MC MC MC motors, solenoids, relays thermostats, E-P and P-E switches, etc. Temperature control panels, MC MC MC boiler controls MC = Mechanical Subcontractor under Division 25. EC = Electrical Subcontractor under Division 26. * General Contractor shall be responsible for coordination of efforts between Divisions 25

and 26. ** Unless noted in the mechanical plans to be provided integral with unit and/or equipment.

D. Obtain from Mechanical Subcontractor a complete list of all mechanical equipment including load, voltage, phase, etc., at beginning of job prior to installation of any related electrical services. Advise Architect/Engineer of changes and adjust to meet requirements.

E. Electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates as specified. F. Complete all identification cards for switches, starters and other devices in all distribution panelboards and similar pieces of equipment, on a typewriter in a neat manner and insert the card in the card holder behind a piece of clear plastic. Where the card size is insufficient for the



proper identification of all circuits, the index shall be made on a large sheet of paper of proper proportion, and then photo-reduced to fit the card holder.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.



WIRES AND CABLES 26 0519 - 1

SECTION 26 0519 - WIRES AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions,

Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each

Division 26 section making reference to wires and cables specified herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control

and related systems rated 600 volts and less. Wiring for fire alarm is described in its section, wiring for voice, data and video is described in Division 26 specifications.

B. The applications for cable, wire and connectors required on the project are as follows:

1. Power distribution circuitry 2. Lighting circuitry 3. Equipment connections and controls circuitry 4. Special systems

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product literature submittal on wiring.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code:

1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code."

B. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials.

C. UL Compliance: Provide components, which are listed and labeled by UL under the

following standards. 1. UL Std. 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables. 2. UL Std. 486A Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper



Conductors.

D. NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Provide components which comply with the following standards:

1. WC-5 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and

Distribution of Electrical Energy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering

products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Wire and Cable:

a. American Insulated Wire Corp. b. Carol Cable Co. Inc. c. Senator Wire and Cable Co. d. Southwire Company.

2. Connectors for Wires and Cable Conductors:

a. AMP b. 3M Company c. O-Z/Gedney Co. d. Square D Company.

2.2 WIRING INSTALLED IN RACEWAYS

A. General: Provide wiring suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed. The following criteria is for single-insulated conductors installed in rigid conduit IMC, EMT, PVC, FMC, and liquidtight flexible conduit.

B. Conductors: Provide solid conductors for power and lighting circuits no. 10 AWG and

smaller. Provide stranded conductors for sizes no. 8 AWG and larger. C. Conductor Material: Copper, 98% conductivity, for all wires and cables. D. Insulation: Provide XHHW-2 insulation for all service entrance wires and, feeders larger

than #6. For all other sizes provide THHN/THWN insulation. Color Coding for Phase Identification: All wiring #8 AWG and smaller shall have coloring integral to insulation.

Color code on the project is as follows:



208Y/120 Volts Phase Black A Red B Blue C White Neutral Green Ground

E. For wire #6 AWG and larger that does not require color code integral to its insulation, colored electrical tape may be used for color coding, it shall cover not less than 6" of conductor within enclosure wherever possible. Color coding shall be with Scotch 35 tape by 3M Company or equal.

F. All wire on this project shall be new, unused, in good condition and shall be delivered in

standard coils, packages and reels. Samples of all wire shall be submitted by the Contractor when so requested by the Architect for the purpose of determining acceptability of the wire. Wire which has been rejected by the Architect shall not be used again. Such rejected wire shall be removed from the Owner's premises forthwith. Decisions as to the quality of the wire furnished and the acceptance of such wire shall be made by the Architect.

G. Size of conductors shall be not less than indicated. Branch circuit conductors shall be not

smaller than No. 12 AWG. Conductors for branch circuits of 120 volts more than 75 feet long, from panel to utilization point shall be No. 10 AWG. The selection of wire sizes for both feeder and branch circuits are used so that voltage drop conforms to the following: Voltage drop in the case of 120/208 volt branch circuits shall not exceed 3.0% at maximum load and 70.0% power factor. Service and feeders shall not exceed 2.0% voltage drop at maximum load and 85% power factor, iron conduit only considered.

H. Remote control wires other than class 2 remote control and signal circuits, shall be no

smaller than #14 conductors. Control wires shall be run in separate conduits. I. Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuits other than parallel wiring of

fixtures. Install 90 degree C. minimum insulation wire within fixture wireways of fluorescent lighting fixtures.

J. When leaving a metal raceway or conduit in a cabinet, box, switch enclosure, control

enclosure or any other like member, conductors shall be protected by means of insulated bushings or end fittings.

K. Conductors may be run in multiple sizes 1/0 to 500 MCM inclusive provided all multiple

conductors are the same size, length and type of insulation. When run in multiple they shall be so arranged and terminated as to insure equal division of the total current between all conductors involved.

2.3 CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS

A. Provide UL-listed factory fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.



B. No splices or taps shall be made to any conductors except in outlet boxes, pullboxes,

junction boxes, panelboard boxes, manholes, splice boxes or other accessible locations. All taps and splices shall be made with solderless connections and insulated in a manner providing an effective insulation equal to that of the adjoining wire insulation. Any splice or tap shall be made only on such conductors as are a component part of a single circuit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHOD A. Use the following wiring methods: 1. Wire: install insulated conductors in raceways.

B. General: Install electrical cables, wires and connectors in compliance with NEC. C. Coordinate cable and wire installation work with electrical raceway and equipment

installation work, as necessary for proper interface. Prior to pulling cables or conductors into raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.

D. Pull conductors simultaneously together where more than one is being installed in same

raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, when necessary. Care shall be exercised while installing wire in conduits so as not to injure conductor insulation. Bending radius of insulated wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended values.

E. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope and basket weave wire/cable grips,

which will not damage cables or raceways. Maximum pulling tension on any wire or cable shall not exceed manufacturer's recommended values.

F. For wired systems not requiring wire in conduit, conceal all cable in finished spaces. G. Conductors shall not be pulled into conduits until after all plastering or concrete work is

completed and all conduits in which moisture has collected have been swabbed out. H. Keep conductor splices to a minimum. Splices shall not be permitted except in junction

boxes, outlet boxes or as previously listed in this section. Splices must be accessible. I. Install splices and taps connectors, which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength

and insulation rating conductors being spliced. J. Use splice and tap conductors which are compatible with the conductor material.

K. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the conductors to terminal points with no excess. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.

L. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with



manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torqueing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.


A. Contractor shall perform meggar tests on all service entrance conductors, all feeders and any other conductors 250 kcmil and larger. The contractor shall submit the test results to the Architect within 48 hours of test, and at least 72 hours prior to permanent connection or energization. All test failures shall result in cable replacement.

B. Prior to energization, test wires for electrical continuity and for short circuits.

C. Prior to Contractor connecting of utility permanent power to the permanent electrical

distribution system, all panels and wiring circuits shall be fully terminated and all panel covers completely installed. If the above cannot be complied with, and the Contractor deviates from this, then he bears all the responsibility to provide lock-out/tag-outs and security of electrical rooms or rooms containing panels.

D. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper functioning. Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.



GROUNDING 26 0526 - 1

SECTION 26 0526 - GROUNDING


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.


A. Extent of grounding is indicated by drawings. B. Types of grounding in this section include the following:

1. Grounding electrodes 2. Grounding rods 3. Separately derived systems 4. Service equipment 5. Enclosures 6. Systems 7. Equipment


A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical grounding. B. ANSI/UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of ANSI/UL and UL standards pertaining to

grounding. Provide products which have been UL listed and labeled. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding devices and accessories. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GROUNDING

A. Materials and Components:

1. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide for each electrical grounding indicated, with assembly of materials including, but not necessarily limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and other items and accessories needed for complete installation. Where more than one type meets indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. Where materials or components are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, NEMA and established industry standards for applications indicated.



2. General: Provide conduit, tube, duct and fittings complying with Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, "Raceways", in accordance with the following listing:

a. Rigid steel conduit b. Electrical metallic tubing c. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit d. Rigid metal conduit fittings e. EMT fittings, Type I f. Flexible metal conduit fittings g. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings

B. Electrical Bonding Jumpers:

1. Bonding Jumper Braid: Copper braided tape, constructed of 30 gauge bare copper wires

and properly sized for indicated applications. 2. Flexible Jumper Strap: Flexible flat conductor, 480 strands of 30 gauge bare copper wire;

3/4" wide, 9-1/2" long; 48.250 CM. Protect braid with copper bolt hole ends with holes sized for 3/8 dia. bolts.

3. Electrical Grounding Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding

conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. All non-metallic conduits and ducts shall have grounding conductors as noted on the drawings or required by NEC.

4. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates,

connectors, terminals and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturer for indicated applications.

C. Ground Rods and Plate:

1. Ground Rods: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4" dia. x 10'.

a. Electrical Grounding Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, bonding straps, as recommended by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING

A. General: Install electrical grounding systems as indicated on the drawings, in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure grounding protection complies with requirements. Comply with requirements of NEC, NESC, and NEMA standards for installation of grounding systems and devices. All non-metallic conduits and ducts shall have grounding conductors as noted on the drawings or required by NEC.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical grounding

system and ground-fault protection devices with other work.



C. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.

3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the drawings or specified. The equipment ground (green conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground non-current carrying metal parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to the system.

B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point for interconnection of the

equipment grounding system and the service grounding electrode Conductor. C. Ground Bar: Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any insulated neutral

bar, in switchboard, panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc. for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors. The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus bar in switchboard or a separately mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure of other types of equipment. Provide solderless pressure connectors for all conductor terminations. Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment grounding bars as required for the termination of equipment grounding conductors. In addition to the active circuits, provide pressure connectors for all three-phase spares and spaces.

D. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection, provide ground

bushing connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the electrical equipment. Install grounding conductor in each nonmetallic conduit or duct and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground conductor. Those raceways used for telephone, sound, or low-voltage signals do not require a grounding conductor. All conduits terminating at communication backboards shall be provided with grounding bushings.

E. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor

for each single or three-phase feeder and each branch circuit with a three-phase protective device. Provide a separate green insulated equipment ground conductor for single phase branch circuits where indicated on the drawings. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway each raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor.

F. Devices: Where a branch circuit ground conductor is not available, install a minimum No. 12

green insulated equipment bonding conductor. Bond conductor from a grounding terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground terminal of all receptacles. This will be required regardless of receptacle being approved for application without separate bond conductor.

G. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from each separate

starter through the conduit and flexible conduit to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on the motor.

H. SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS: Transformers creating separately derived distribution

systems shall utilize the equipment ground bars in the transformer enclosure for both secondary equipment ground and secondary neutral ground. A separate grounding conductor shall be extended to a made electrode consisting of not less than twenty feet of #4 minimum bare copper conductor encased along the bottom of the nearest exterior concrete foundation footing in direct contact with the earth. Bond this footing ground to the other elements of the grounding electrode



system with a conductor equal to the service ground conductor. 3.3 SERVICE GROUNDING SYSTEM

A. General: The service grounding system is provided for the AC service neutral ground and shall be installed in complete accord with NEC and local electrical code requirements. Current return conductors shall not be used for equipment grounding. Neutral bars are not to be bonded to the enclosures of panelboards, etc. Except for separately derived systems, the neutral conductors shall be grounded only in the main service equipment.

B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point in the main service equipment by

interconnecting the insulated neutral bus and service grounding electrode conductor. C. Neutral Bars: Provide an insulated neutral bar, separate from the uninsulated equipment ground

bar, in all panelboards, except for separately derived systems. 3.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Two service ground electrodes shall be utilized. One shall be the main cold water metallic water piping system and the other shall be a made electrode consisting of not less than twenty feet of #3/0 minimum bare copper conductor encased along the bottom of a concrete foundation footing which is in direct contact with the earth (NEC 250-81c). Bond service ground conductor to the made electrode in footing and building steel with Cadweld connections or approved equal. Make the connections to the cold water pipe inside the building at the point of water service entrance.

3.5 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. The grounding conductors for both service ground electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper, sized in accordance with NEC 250-94(a) including the conductor for the made electrode. The conductors shall be continuous without joint or splice and shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded to the conductor at each end. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors with insulation equivalent to the insulation on the associated phase conductor, but not less than Type THW. The equipment grounding conductor or straps shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder serves a series of panelboards or transformers, the equipment grounding conductor shall be continuous without splices. All connections shall be available for inspection and maintenance.

1. Connections: Clean surfaces thoroughly to bare metal before applying ground lugs or

clamps. Where galvanizing is removed from metal it shall be painted or touched up with "Galvanox", or equal. All grounding system connections which are made in inaccessible locations, i.e. underground, within concrete slabs, shall be made with Cadweld connections or approved equal.

3.6 TESTING

A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding system, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester (meggar) at the service ground bar and submit a written report to the Architect for review prior to scheduling the final electrical punch list. Indicate the measured resistance and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made. The service shall not be energized if the test shows more than 25 ohms. Contractor shall furnish all instruments and



personnel required for the tests. Where tests show resistance to ground is over 25 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 25 ohms or less by driving additional ground rods and/or by chemically treating soil encircling ground rod; then retest to demonstrate compliance.



SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0529 - 1

SECTION 26 0529 - SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Conduit and equipment supports.

B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.2 REFERENCES

A. Quality Control: Requirements for references and standards.

B. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association.

C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.3 SUBMITTALS – None Required. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.

B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.

C. Anchors and Fasteners:

a. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors. b. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips. c. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. d. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts. e. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. f. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. g. Wood Elements: Use wood screws.

2.2 STEEL CHANNEL


SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0529 - 2

A. Manufacturer:

a. Unistrut. b. B-Line. c. Substitutions: Permitted.

B. Description: Painted steel. 2.3 SPRING STEEL CLIPS

A. Manufacturer:

a B-Line. b. Caddy. c. Substitutions: Permitted.

PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation".

C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit.

D. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

E. Obtain permission from Architect/Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members.

F. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors.

H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch (25 mm) off wall.

I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards

recessed in hollow partitions.



ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 0530 - 1

SECTION 26 0530 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings.

B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following: 1. Outlet boxes 2. Junction boxes 3. Pull boxes 4. Bushings 5. Locknuts 6. Knockout closures


A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings.

B. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514-Series, and

UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL-listed and labeled.

C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds/ Pub No.'s OS1,

OS2 and Pub 250 pertaining to outlet and device boxes, covers and box supports. D. Federal Specification Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of FS W-C-586,

"Electrical Cast Metal Conduit Outlet Boxes, Bodies and Entrance Caps". 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on electrical boxes and fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS - STEEL



A. Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with thread screw holes, with corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding.

B. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation,

including box support mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements of individual wiring situations.

C. Device Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel non-gangable device

boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes, and with cable-size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide cable clamps and corrosion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps, and for equipment type grounding.

D. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required for each installation,

including mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations.

E. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall not be less than 2-1/8 inches deep except where

shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. Boxes for other than lighting fixture and power shall be not less than 4 inches square.

F. Outlet boxes for various uses shall be Appleton boxes, or equal in quality and function of the

following order; Appleton nos. listed first, universal numbers listed in parenthesis:

1. In standard partitions and suspended ceilings for lighting fixture installations where 3/4" conduits are employed, #40D3/4 (#54l7l 3/4) boxes shall be used; for 1/2" conduits #40D1/2 (#54171 1/2) shall be used.

2. In standard partitions and suspended ceiling areas where conduits of 1" size or greater are employed, #4SD1 (#52171-1) boxes having a depth of 2-1/8" shall be used.

3. Wall switch and convenience outlets in standard partitions and where 3/4" conduits are employed, #4SD 3/4 (#52171-3/4) boxes shall be used; for 1/2" conduits #4SD 1/2 (#52171-1/2) boxes shall be used.

4. In thin partitions measuring 3-1/2" or less and where 3/4" conduits are employed, #4S 3/4 (#52151 3/4) boxes shall be used; for 1/2" conduits #4S 1/2 (52151 1/2) boxes shall be used.

5. Voices, Data, Video outlets shall be as detailed on the plans and described in Division 26 specifications.



G. The following requirements shall apply to exposed as well as concealed conduit

systems. When "gang" arrangements of outlets are employed, 2-3/4" deep "gang" boxes shall be used. These "gang" boxes shall have dimensions which are not smaller than those shown in the following table. Number in Gang Size 3 4 - 1/2" X 8- 5/8" 4 4 - 1/2" X 10- 1/2" 5 4 - 1/2" X 12- 1/4" 6 4 - 1/2" X 14" 7 4 - 1/2" X 16" 8 4 - 1/2" X 17- 3/4"

Where "gang" boxes are located in woodwork or in wooden partitions, the depth of the boxes (shall) may be reduced to 1 - 3/4"

H. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast metal raintight outlet wiring

boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit,

I. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code gauge sheet steel junction and pull

boxes with screw on covers; of types, shapes and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

J. Terminal Cabinets: Junction boxes called for to be used as terminal cabinets for special

systems (Fire Alarm) shall be of NEMA Type I, surface mounting minimum 26 gauge steel thickness as manufactured by Circle A-W Products or approved equal. Boxes shall be provided with a ¾” plywood thick backboard sized for full area of box wall mounting surface. Furnish with hinged cover. Furnish terminal blocks where required or noted on the drawings for all wire splicing or terminations, Kulka 672 or equal in quality and construction. Number of terminal blocks shall be as required for all wires in terminal cabinets plus 50% spare.

K. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes and sizes, to suit respective locations and installation, constructed with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, and corrosion-resistant screws.

L. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion resistant punched steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective installation requirements and applications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PERMITTED USES



A. Steel boxes shall be used in all areas. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF BOXES AND FITTINGS A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway work. C. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or

moisture. D. Provide knockout closures to cap all unused knockout holes where blanks have been

removed. E. Install electrical boxes and conduit bodies in those locations, which ensure ready

accessibility to enclosed electrical wiring. F. Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 6" (150 mm) horizontal

separation. If boxes are installed with less than 6” separation in fire rated walls then the contractor shall provide fire stop material around the boxes.

G. Avoid installing aluminum products in concrete. H. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.

I. Boxes shall be square and flush with finished surfaces and suitably anchored in place. The

front edges of the boxes or plaster rings shall be flush with the finished wall or ceiling line or if installed in walls and ceilings of combustible construction, not more than 1/4 inch back of same. Mount boxes with the long axis of devices vertical, unless specifically noted otherwise.

J. Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings shall be provided with plaster rings. A multiple of

box extensions and/or covers will not be permitted. Rough-in installations which require box extensions shall be abandoned and the rough-in work redone. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with suitable metal bar hangers, box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood, expansion shields on masonry and machine screws on steel work.

K. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surface.

L. Fasten boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Wire shall not be used to anchor boxes to structure.

M. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes. Where several feeders pass through a



common pullbox, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation.

N. Splices in switch boxes shall be kept to a minimum.

O. On all ceiling outlets involving fixture hanging from boxes, 3/8" no-bolt fixture studs shall

be used for light load and 1/2" no-bolt fixture studs shall be used for heavy loads. P. Where an atmosphere laden with moisture exists, Type FD Series Unilet Boxes shall be

used with standard devices. The covers employed shall be adapted for the particular application involved. In such cases, brass screws shall be used and due provision shall be made in all cases, for the escape of any condensate which might accumulate.

Q. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall mounted outlet box shall mean the

height from the finished floor to the horizontal center line of the cover plate. On exposed tile, block or brick construction, mount outlet boxes at the nearest bed joint to the mounting height indicated. Any change in height made by the Contractor shall not place the box out of the range of acceptable height to comply with ADA. Verify with the Architect. Once mounting height is adjusted because of mortar bed joint, all similar wiring devices within the room or within view shall be adjusted accordingly.

R. Wall Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc., mount

so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions. Install outlet boxes near the doors on the lock sides as shown on Architectural drawings, unless locations are shown otherwise because of sidelites, and approved by the Architect.

S. Pull Boxes: Provide additional pull boxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for

maximum length of conduit runs and maximum number of bends. Conduit runs with not more than two ninety degree bends shall not exceed 200 feet.

T. Grounding: Upon completion of installation, properly ground electrical boxes and

demonstrate compliance with requirements. U. Identification: All junction and pull boxes above the ceiling shall be labeled as to the

circuits contained. Blank steel covers on 4 square boxes may be labeled with permanent black marker, hand written with panel name and circuit numbers unless noted otherwise on the plans. Larger boxes may have handwritten labeling if neatly performed.

V. Grounding: Upon completion of installation work, properly ground electrical boxes and

demonstrate compliance with requirements. W. Identification: Identify junction and pull boxes installed for fire alarm wiring by painting

red. Paint box and cover.



RACEWAYS 26 0535 - 1

SECTION 26 0535 - RACEWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions,

Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each

Division 26 section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes raceways for electrical wiring 600v and below, control wiring,

and Fire Alarm System Wiring. Types of raceways in this section include the following: 1. Type FMC conduit NEC Article 348. 2. Type EMT conduit NEC Article 358. 3. Liquidtight flexible conduit NEC Article 350. 4. Rigid metal conduit NEC Article 344. 5. Rigid nonmetallic conduit NEC Article 352. 6. Intermediate Metal Conduit NEC Article 342.

B. Wiring methods shall be as described by the Division 16 specifications and permitted by

the State of New Mexico Electrical Code. Selection of wiring method is at the contractor’s option. Use of Type “NM” cable, NEC Article 334 is prohibited for this project.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specifications Sections. B. Product Data for the following products:

1. Metal conduits and fittings. 2. Flexible conduits and fittings. 3. PVC conduits and fittings.



1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70

" National Electrical Code." B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to

raceways. C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards

pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL, ETL, or CSA.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with other Work, including metal framing, wood framing and concrete deck

installation, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other Work.


A. General: For each electrical raceway system indicated, provide assembly of conduit, tubing or duct, and fittings including, but not necessarily limited to, connectors, couplings, offsets, elbows, straps, bushings, expansion joints, hangers and other components and accessories as needed for a complete system. Minimum size conduit shall be 1/2".

B. Each length of rigid/IMC conduit shall have both ends threaded. The extremities shall, moreover, be reamed to remove all burrs and sharp edges. Each length of conduit shall be marked with the name and trademark of the manufacturer and the stamp of approval of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

C. Where shown on the plans or specifically called for in the specifications, electrical

conductors shall be installed in hot-dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit or IMC. Exposed conduit in damp OUTDOOR locations shall be rigid steel conduit or IMC. If EMT conduit is used outdoors as part of the new construction, it shall be REMOVED wherever found and replaced with rigid steel conduit. Each length of conduit shall be provided with one coupling attached and the threads of the end of the conduits having no coupling shall be protected by use of suitable thread protectors. All couplings and other fittings such as bends or elbows shall be protected against corrosion in the same manner in which the conduit itself is protected. All bends for conduit of 1-1/4" or larger shall either be factory manufactured elbows or be made by the use of a bending machine meeting the approval of Architect. Under no circumstances shall any bend be installed if the conduit from which it is fabricated is injured in any manner in the course of, or by, the bending process. The radius of the curve of the inner edge of any field bend shall not be less than the recommendation of the National Electrical Code. Under no circumstances shall the internal cross sectional area of any conduit be appreciably reduced by any bending process.



D. Rigid steel conduit, IMC and EMT fittings shall be either steel or malleable iron only.

E. EMT connectors and couplings shall be of the steel set screw or threaded compression type, having steel gland nuts. Connectors shall have insulated throats.

F. 1/2" and 3/4" trade size conduits may be installed in concrete slabs, as near the center of the slab as possible. Material shall be IMC, rigid, or PVC.

G. Conduits installed in direct contact with the earth, except where PVC is used, shall be rigid

galvanized steel, field spirally wrapped (half-lapped) with one layer of 1" wide 3M Scotchrap #50 plastic tape with a 50 percent overlap, including all joints or couplings, or shall be coated with a bonded 20 mil minimum thickness PVC, permanently fused at the factory, Pittsburgh Standard Co., "Plasti-Bond", or equal. Contractor shall patch with Scotchrap tape all holes or abrasions to conduit tape wrapping which expose the metal conduit surface. All buried wrapped or coated conduit shall be checked by Owner's duly authorized representative prior to covering up with fill. Branch circuit and feeder conduit runs when direct buried may be PVC schedule 40. The Contractor has the option of PVC conduit or rigid metal tape wrapped conduit. EMT conduit is not acceptable for burial applications. If PVC conduit is used, transition to rigid metal tape wrapped conduit shall be made before beginning sweep for conduit stub-up. Metal conduit must be wrapped throughout buried portion, including risers.

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights

(wall thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection determined by Contractor to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways.

B. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium plated, cast or malleable iron type for steel conduits.

C. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Not acceptable on this project. D. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1 E. Intermediate Steel Conduit: UL 1242. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) may be used in

lieu of rigid conduit, but only where permitted by 2005 NEC, and with manufacturer's recommended fittings. Threading and bending of IMC shall be with approved equipment for the purpose and as recommended by the manufacturer of the raceway. Threadless fittings shall not be permitted for rigid or IMC.

F. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. Steel tubing, in lieu of rigid or IMC

conduit, may be used in sizes up to and including 4 inches in all interior work, except that it shall not be used in concrete, underground, in any damp or outdoor locations, or in any locations where there is a likelihood of mechanical injury.

G. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, aluminum, not acceptable. H. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, with a separate grounding bond wire installed in the flex in



addition to other wires. I. Flexible Metal Conduit Fittings: Either steel or malleable iron only, with insulated throats.

J. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360. Provide liquid-tight flexible

metal conduit; constructed of single strip, flexible, continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel, galvanized inside and outside; coated with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and a continuous copper bonding conductor wound spirally between the convolutions. To be UL labeled Sealtite type UA or Liquidtite type LA.

K. Liquid tight flexible conduit fittings shall be provided with threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon or equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Either steel or malleable iron only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or without "O" ring seat.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights (wall

thicknesses) for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper section determined by Contractor to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with applicable portions of NEC for raceways.

B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (PVC): NEMA TC 2 and UL 651, Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. C. PVC Conduit and Tubing Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or conduit/tubing type

and material. D. Conduit, Tubing and Duct Accessories: Types, sizes, and materials complying with

manufacturer's published product information. Mate and match accessories with raceway. 2.4 CONDUIT BODIES A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC

requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws. B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded hubs

for threaded raceways. C. Conduit Bodies 1 Inch and Smaller: Use bodies with compression-type EMT connectors. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHOD A. Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods:

1. Exposed: IMC or rigid metal conduit.



2. Underground: IMC, rigid metal conduit, or PVC.

3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: Including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment: liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

4. Indoors or Outdoors: Connection to vibrating equipment and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment in moist or humid location or corrosive atmosphere, or where subject to water spray or dripping oil, grease, or water: liquidtight flexible metal conduit.

B. Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:

1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: Including transformers and

hydraulic, pneumatic or electric solenoid or motor-operated equipment: flexible metal conduit.

2. Exposed: EMT, IMC, or rigid metallic conduit. 3. Concealed: EMT, IMC, or rigid metallic conduit. 4. Slab on grade concrete: IMC, rigid, or PVC.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install electrical raceways for all wiring circuits in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and as follows:

B. Conceal raceways, unless indicated otherwise, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations. Run all conduits in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. On exposed systems, support shall be provided at intervals of 6 feet or closer depending on wiring method. On concealed conduits, support shall be provided at intervals of no more than 8 feet or closer depending on wiring method. No feeder conduit run shall be longer than 80 feet between junction boxes, cabinets or circuit interrupting devices unless there are no direction changes, and only a straight-in-line pull of wire is involved. In such straight-in- line runs between junction boxes, cabinets or circuit interrupting devices, a run not to exceed 120 feet in length may be made.

C. Elevation of Raceway: Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping to the fullest extent possible. D. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors

within raceways. All ends of the conduit shall be properly reamed to remove rough edges and whenever a conduit enters a box or other fitting, it shall be securely fastened by the use of a locknut inside and outside of the box or fitting. An approved bushing shall be installed on the ends of all conduit in such a manner as to protect the wire from abrasion. Completed raceways shall be inspected; inspect interiors of raceways, remove burrs, moisture, and dirt and construction debris.



E. Support raceways rigidly by means of straps or hangers best suited for the work. Conduit shall not be supported from ceiling support system. Multiple runs of conduits shall be racked on trapeze hangers. All support materials shall be rustproof. Perforated tape or wire shall not be used. SUPPORTS SHALL COMPLY WITH NEW MEXICO ELECTRICAL CODE.

A. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection. Seal raceways after installation to prevent accumulation of water, dirt and other foreign materials. Conduit in which such accumulation occurs shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Architect or replaced.

B. Conduit crossing expansion joints shall be provided with suitable expansion fitting. C. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved

portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab. Conduit crushed or otherwise deformed shall not be installed and shall be removed from the job site without delay.

D. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise

indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel. E. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and suitable

for the use and location. For intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings except as otherwise indicated.

F. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance

considering the type of building construction and obstructions, except as otherwise indicated.

G. All non-metallic conduit or duct runs shall have a ground bonding conductor, size as noted

or required by NEC. The bond or equipment served shall be bonded to grounding conductor to provide a good ground return path to service panel.

H. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural

members and follow the surface contours as much as practical. Paint conduit that will be exposed to the public. Paint shall match surface color.

I. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs

from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases provided field bends for parallel raceways.

J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.

Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding busings or wedges to assure electrical continuity. Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors.



K. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tool. L. Terminations: Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align the

raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box.

M. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so the

end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

N. Install pull wires in empty raceways over 4 feet long. Use no. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or

monofilament plastic line having not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Identify each terminus of pull wire with linen tags marked with complete information as to service and location of the terminus of the line/wire.

O. Install raceway sealing fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points and elsewhere as indicated:

1. Where conduits pass from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of refrigerated spaces and air-conditioned spaces.

2. Where required by the NEC.

P. Conduit Stub-up Through Roof: All conduits up through roof shall be properly sealed. Where applicable Contractor shall provide special adapters designed for the specific type of roofing system. See the drawings for special details and instructions for this specific purpose.

Q. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum of 6 ft.) of flexible conduit for recessed

and semi recessed lighting fixtures, where EMT and FMC is used, for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit in wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

R. Conduits above acoustical "lay-in" ceilings shall be anchored to the building structure and

not on the ceiling or ceiling support wires. Wire shall not be used to anchor boxes to structure. Junction boxes shall be installed on the structural members and flexible conduit, extended down to light fixtures, length not to exceed 6 ft.

S. Do not install aluminum conduit. T. PVC externally coated rigid steel conduit: Use only fittings approved for use with that

material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit.



U. Lighting fixtures shall not be used for raceways for circuits other than parallel wiring of fixtures.

V. Fire Barriers: Contractor shall be responsible for sealing all conduit penetrations through

fire rated walls and ceilings. The seal shall be acceptable to Architect and maintain the I ntegrity of the wall or ceiling fire rating. 3M brand fire barrier caulk #CP 25 and putty #303 are considered acceptable for this purpose. Refer to Architectural drawings for these locations.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all

blockages and remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris. END OF SECTION 26 0535


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 1

SECTION 26 0553 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Nameplates and labels.

B. Wire and cable markers.

C. Conduit markers.


A. Painting. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. Quality Control: Requirements for references and standards.

B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS – None Required. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background. B. Locations:

1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. Provide new labels

on all equipment, existing and new.

2. Communication cabinets.

A. Letter Size:

1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553 - 2

A. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.2 APPLICATION

A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.

B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive.

C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations.

D. Color:

a. 208 Volt System: Black, Red, Blue, White, Green.



PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 1

SECTION 26 2416 – PANELBOARDS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Division 26 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections, apply to work specified in this

section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Extent of panelboard, and enclosure work, including cabinets is indicated by drawings and schedules, and as specified herein.

B. Types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the following:

1. Power-distribution panelboards 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards

C. Refer to other Division 26 sections for wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work required in conjunction with installation of panelboards and enclosures.

D. Wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways required in conjunction with the

installation of panelboards and enclosures are specified in other Division 26 sections.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures. B. Shop Drawings: Submit dimensioned drawings of panelboards and enclosures showing

accurately scaled layout of enclosures and required individual panelboard devices, including but not necessarily limited to, circuit breakers, fusible switches, fuses, ground-fault circuit interrupters, and accessories.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for panelboards showing connections to electrical

power feeders and distribution branches. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384 as applicable to installation, and construction of electrical panelboards and enclosures.

B. Contractor shall comply with panel board clearance requirements, NEC 110-16 (a), regarding the

30" work space. Conflicts with local inspection authorities regarding this shall be total



responsibility of Contractor. C. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric Panelboards", and

UL's 50, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053 pertaining to panelboards, accessories and enclosures. Provide panelboard units which are UL-listed and labeled.

D. Special-Use Markings: Provide panelboards, constructed for special use, with appropriate UL

markings which indicate that they are suitable for special type of use/application. E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds. Pub No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical

Equipment (1000 volt maximum)"; Pub/No. PB 1 , "Panelboards", and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards rated 600 volts or less."

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate installation of panelboards and enclosures with installation of wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceway work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or equal (for each type of panelboard and enclosure):

1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc. 2. General Electric Company 3. Square "D" Company

2.2 PANELBOARDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary components of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL, and established industry standards for applications indicated. Panels to have bolt-on type circuit breakers only.

B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type power distribution panelboards

as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for copper conductors. Construct unit for connecting feeder at top or bottom of panel to suit job conditions. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98-percent conductivity, and full-sized neutral bus. Use of aluminum bus bars will not be permitted. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide molded-case main and branch circuit breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip



all poles simultaneously. Provide a copper bare uninsulated grounding bar suitable for bolting to enclosure. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, and which mate and match properly with enclosures. Provide Square D I-Line class equipment, or equal.

C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance

panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for copper conductors; construct unit for connecting feeders at top or bottom of panel to suit job conditions; equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar or 200% Neutral bar as noted with bolt-in type heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-pole circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicated when tripped. Use of aluminum bus bars will not be permitted. Where multiple-pole circuit breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; provide a copper bare uninsulated ground bar suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, and which match and mate properly with panelboards.

D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in sizes (20"

width minimum) and NEMA types as indicated, code-gauge minimum 16-gauge thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable indicating trim clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed door hinges and door swings as indicated. All panelboards shall be of the "door-in-door" construction. In addition to the requirement for door-in-door construction, the door-in-door assembly must be bolted/supported to/by the panelboard enclosure (can). Those door assemblies which require support from the building wall construction are not acceptable and will not be approved. Equip with interior circuit-directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor. Design enclosure for surface or recessed mounting as required. Provide enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboard, and which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed.

E. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, molded-case circuit breakers of frame

sizes, characteristics, and ratings including RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault-current limiting protection, ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position, and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 deg. C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.

F. Termination provisions on all circuit breakers installed shall have wire temperature ratings of 60o

and 75o C. Circuit breakers rated 125 amperes or less shall be marked as being suitable for 60o/75o C. wire. All 15A and 20A, 1P breakers shall be UL listed as SWD (switching duty) rated.

G. Accessories: Provide panelboard accessories and devices including, but not necessarily limited to

cartridge and plug time-delay type fuses, ground-fault protection units, etc., as recommended by panelboard manufacturer for ratings and applications indicated.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall verify that proper clearance between panelboards and other surfaces is maintained to comply to NEC requirements. Location of panelboards as shown provides, base on information available, compliance with NEC requirements. Verify spacing based on equipment supplied and on actual field conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS

A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B.

C. Coordinate installation of panelboard and enclosures with cable and raceway installation work. D. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, insuring that they are permanently and

mechanically secure. E. Provide properly wired electrical connections for panelboards within enclosures. F. Panelboards shall have neatly typed circuit directories behind clear plastic. Handwritten

directories will not be accepted. Identify circuits by room numbers. Room numbers shall be those finally selected by the Owner; not necessarily those given on the contract documents. "Spares" and "Spaces" shall be indicated with erasable pencil, not typed.

G. The information presented on panelboard schedules contained on the drawings for individual

circuits regarding load served is not necessarily acceptable for final version of panel circuit directory. Each directory entry should designate type of load and location of load; i.e., Lights, Room 201; Outlets, Room 116; Lights & Outlets, Rooms 211 & 212. This contractor shall verify final room name/designation of owner and fill in circuit directory as described herein. Panelboard installation will not be considered finished until this requirement is complied with.

H. Panel Identification:

1. Electrical equipment to be identified with nameplates includes: Distribution

Panels and Lighting Panelboards. 2. Nameplates shall be as required in specification Section 260000. Nameplates shall

be mounted on outside surface of panelboard door about 3 inches from top of door and centered in width of door.

3.3 GROUNDING



A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboard enclosures as indicated. Tighten

connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.


A. Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.

B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester phase-to-phase and

phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled. C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for short-circuits.


A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize panelboards and demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate compliance.

B. Provide High Voltage labeling as required.



MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 26 2419 - 1

SECTION 26 2419 - MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS



B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 26 section making reference to motor and circuit disconnect switches specified herein.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The extent of motor and circuit disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and

schedules.

B. The types of motor and circuit disconnect switches in this section include the following: 1. Equipment disconnects 2. Appliance disconnects 3. Motor-circuit disconnects

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of

electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches. B. UL Compliance and Labeling: Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches which have

been UL listed and labeled. C. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. Publ. No. KS1. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions

and general recommendations for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS



2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the

following or equal (for each type of switch): 1. Cutler-Hammer, Inc. 2. General Electric Co. 3. Square D Company

B. Motor and circuit disconnects larger than 60A shall be side hinged.

2.2 FABRICATED SWITCHES

A. General-Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface-mounted, general-duty type, sheet steel enclosed safety switches, of the types, sizes, and electrical characteristics indicated; fusible type, rated for ampacity of circuit and system voltage as a minimum where noted on drawings. Switches shall be of pole configuration required for application with a solid neutral if needed; incorporating quick-make, quick-break type switches; so constructed that switch blades are visible in "OFF" position with door open. Equip with operating handle which is easily recognizable, and is padlockable in the "OFF" position; construct current carrying parts of positive pressure type reinforced fuse clips. Where noted on the contract documents, provide non-fuse disconnect switches of the same class construction listed above.

B. Provide rain-tight switches for outside locations and where noted on the drawings, or where required by code enforcing authorities.

C. Fuses: Provide fuses for safety switches, as noted on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Install: Motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with the manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway

and cable work, as necessary for proper interface. C. Install disconnect switches used with motor-driven appliances, and motors and controllers

within sight of the controller position unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide nameplates on disconnect switches. Nameplates shall be as required in



specification. E. Disconnects installed over the equipment nameplate shall be moved.

3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches,

energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise indicated, do not test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening/closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.



CABINETS & ENCLOSURES 26 2716 - 1

SECTION 26 2716 - CABINETS & ENCLOSURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Hinged cover enclosures. B. Cabinets. C. Terminal blocks. D. Accessories.


A. Section 26 05 29 - Supporting Devices.

B. Firestopping 1.3 REFERENCES

A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association).

B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).

C. NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems.

D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW – None Required. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hoffman. B. Circle A-W.



C. Wiegmann. D. Substitutions: Permitted.

2.2 HINGED COVER ENCLOSURES

A. Construction: NEMA 250, Type 1 or 3R steel enclosure. B. Covers: Continuous hinge, held closed by flush latch operable by key. C. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components; finish

with white enamel. D. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel.

2.3 CABINETS

A. Boxes: Galvanized steel. B. Box Size: As indicated on drawings. C. Backboard: Provide 3/4-inch thick plywood backboard for mounting terminal blocks. Paint

matte white. D. Fronts: Steel door with concealed hinge, and flush lock. Finish with gray baked enamel. E. Knockouts: Pre-punched. F. Provide metal barriers to form separate compartments wiring of different systems and voltages. G. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment.

2.4 TERMINAL BLOCKS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Siemon. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 26 00 00.

B. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. C. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw

connectors, rated 600 volts. D. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting, with

tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. E. Provide ground bus terminal block, with each connector bonded to enclosure.



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." C. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each

corner under the provisions of Section 26190. D. Install cabinet fronts plumb.

3.2 CLEANING

A. Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage.



WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1

SECTION 26 2726 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions,

Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. .

1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 3. Plugs 4. Plug Connections 5. Snap Switches 6. Wall Plates

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified. B. All wiring devices shall be by the same manufacturer unless authorized by Architect.

Unauthorized mixing of device brands is unacceptable. C. Samples: The Contractor shall submit when requested a sample of the standard single pole

switch and of the standard 15 and 20 Amp duplex convenience outlet as part of submittals. All wiring devices shall be by the same manufacturer unless authorized by Architect. Mixing of device brands is unacceptable.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes.

1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code".

B. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards.

1.5 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING



A. Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are installed has received final finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufactures: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the

following or equal (for each type of wiring device): 1. General Electric Co. 2. Harvey Hubbell, Inc.

3. Pass and Seymour, Inc. 4. Bryant Electric Div. 5. Arrow Hart 6. Leviton

7. Lutron

8. Carlon

2.2 WIRING DEVICES

A. General: Provide wiring devices in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and comply with NEMA WD1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Contractor to fulfill wiring requirements, and comply with NEC and NEMA standards for wiring devices. Provide ivory color devices throughout. Provide stainless steel wall plates except as otherwise indicated. Verify color selection of devices with the Architect.

B. Receptacles:

1. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall be in accordance with the NEMA Publication WD1 and UL 498. Fire-resistant, non-absorptive, hot-welded, phenolic composition or equal bodies and based with metal plaster ears (integral with the supporting members). Single or duplex as shown or noted on the drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong. Convenience outlets shall be installed with grounding pin connection for plugs at top (outlets installed vertically). All outlets not installed with ground post connection point on top shall be repositioned to meet this requirement.

2. Grounding type: All receptacles shall be grounding type with a green colored hexagonal equipment ground screw and shall be connected to green circuit ground



conductor. Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be internally connected to the receptacle mounting yoke.

3. Duplex convenience outlets, rated 20 amps, 125 volts, 2 pole, 3 wire, NEMA 5-20R, specification grade, back or side wiring, shall be Hubbell #5362-I, Pass & Seymour #5362-I, General Electric GE 5362-2 or Bryant 5362I.

4. Weather proof outlets on exterior walls (except on the roof) shall be GFCI

receptacles installed in recessed “Taymac Masque” or equal covered recessed receptacle box. Contractor shall install Taymac #72204 or equal with GFCI outlet. Taymac #72204 or equal consists of metal box, plastic extension ring and gasketed outlet bucket with cover. Verify color of cover prior to entering.

5. Weather proof outlets on roof for NEC 210.63 rule shall be GFCI outlet in FS cast metal box with Taymac #20510 or equal deep cover.

C. Ground Fault Interrupter Outlets: 1. The ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles, rated 15 amps, 125 volts, 2

pole, 3 wire, NEMA 5-15R, shall be UL listed (UL 498 and UL 943 Class A) and shall comply with ANSI C73.11. GFCI receptacles shall not have the "feed-through" feature to provide GFCI protection to receptacles connected downstream. The GFCI shall operate in the 4 - 6 milliamp range. The GFCI receptacles shall be Hubbell #GF-5262I, Pass & Seymour #1591-F-I, or Bryant #GFR52FTI. Receptacles shall be furnished with appropriate device wall coverplate.

D. Switches:

1. Unless otherwise specified, each snap switch (flush tumbler-toggle) shall be of the AC general use type fully rated 20 amperes minimum at 120/277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 20, NEMA Stds. Publ. No. WD1, and further requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single pole, 3-way, or 4-way of the maintained, momentary, or lock type as indicated on the drawings. Switches shall operate in any position and shall be fully enclosed cup type with entire body of phenolic, urea or melamine. Fiber, paper or similar insulating material shall not be used for body or cover. Silver or silver alloy contacts. AC 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of withstanding tests as outlined in NEMA publication WD1 and shall be as follows or an Architect approved equal, unless otherwise noted.

2. Single pole switches, rated 20A, 120-277 volts, shall be Hubbell #1221-I, General Electric #5951-2G, Pass & Seymour #20AC1-I or Bryant 4901I.

3. Single pole switch with pilot light shall be spec. grade red lighted handle, rated 20 amps, 120V, Hubbell #1221-PL, General Electric #SP121-8G, Pass & Seymour #20AC1-RPL or Bryant #4901 PLR 120.

4. Three-way switches, rated 20A, 120-277 volts, shall be Hubbell #1223-I, Bryant



#4903I, Pass & Seymour #20AC3-I or General Electric #5953-2G.

5. Four-way switches, rated 20A, 120-277 volts, shall be Hubbell #1224-I, Bryant 4904I, Pass & Seymour #20AC4-I or General Electric #5954-2G.

6. Weatherproof switches shall include the type of snap switch indicated on the

drawings and specified herein, enclosed with a Crouse-Hinds #DS 181 cover and gasket mounted in an FS cast box. Substitutions must be Architect approved. Flip top covers exposing switch handle to rain are not acceptable. Orientation of the cover must be vertical.

2.3 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES A. Wall plates: single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as

indicated. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Conform to requirements of "Electrical Identification." Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:

B. Material and Finish Recessed Box: 0.04 inch thick, type 302 satin finished stainless steel,

non-residential areas.

C. Material and Finish Surface Box: steel plate, galvanized, non-residential areas.

D. Engraving: Wall plates located in finished areas which would require identification shall be engraved stainless steel plates. All lettering shall be 1/8" minimum in height, nine characters per inch and filled with black paint. Identification wording/lettering shall be as noted on the drawings and shall be centered on coverplate.

E. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular application.

F. Wall plates covering flush boxes in CMU walls shall have oversize plates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Wiring device locations shown are approximate. Contractor shall adjust lateral locations

shown up to 18” to accommodate final room layouts. The outlet locations shall be modified from those shown on the plans to accommodate changes in door swings or to clear other interferences that may arise from job construction details as well as modification within room spaces. The Contractor shall check these conditions throughout the entire job and shall notify the Architect of discrepancies as they may occur before proceeding with the installation of the work to verify the modifications, if any.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES



A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations,

as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes, which are clean; free from building materials, dirt and debris.

C. Install galvanized steel wallplates in unfinished spaces.

D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. Switches shall be mounted 44" and

convenience outlets 18" minimum, center of box above the finished floor level except as otherwise specified on the drawings. Align devices and plates horizontally and vertically.

E. Wall boxes shall be set in advance of the wall construction, shall be blocked in place and

secured. All wall boxes shall be set flush with the finished building construction. Contractor shall vacuum clean all wiring device boxes.

F. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as

necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. G. Delay installation of wall plates until after painting work is completed.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with other trades the actual installation

of his outlet boxes in walls. The wall building material (cinder block, brick, sheetrock or whatever) shall provide an even trim around outlet boxes not exceeding a 1/4" gap. The device coverplate should be able to cover up wall openings around outlet boxes. Wherever an outlet box installation fails to comply with the above listed condition, the Contractor shall arrange to have the problem corrected. Caulking, spackling material or any other sealer to be used shall be kept out of the outlet box area.

I. Wiring device yokes shall be installed in physical contact with the plaster ring. Spiral

wound bare wire supports to act as spacers between plaster extension ring/box and device yokes are not acceptable. Where condition occurs, the plaster ring/box shall be replaced as required to provide the proper contact.

J. Device coverplates for each and every device shall be furnished and installed by this

contractor. K. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.

3.3 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES A. Upon installation of wall plates and receptacles, advise the Contractor regarding proper and



cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of Substantial Completion, replace those items which have been damaged, including those burned and scorched by faulty plugs.

3.4 GROUNDING A. Provide electrically continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring devices, unless

otherwise noted. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-

circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six times.

B. Test ground fault interruptor operation with both local and remote fault simulations in

accordance with manufacturer recommendations. END OF SECTION 26 2726


EMERGENCY/ STANDBY POWER SYSTEM 26 2826 - 1

SECTION 26 2826 - EMERGENCY/STANDBY POWER SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCED STANDARDS:

A. The generator covered by these specifications shall be designed, tested, rated, assembled and installed in strict accordance with all applicable standards of ANSI, NEC, ISO, U.L., IEEE and NEMA.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Division 3 - Concrete 1.3 WORK INCLUDED: A. Installation

1. The work includes supplying and installing a complete integrated emergency generator system to provide an alternate source of power to the site in the event of a utility outage. The system consists of a duel fuel (Natural Gas and Propane) generator set with related component accessories and automatic transfer switches specified under this section.

B. Fuel System

1. Deisel.

C. System Test

1. A complete system load bank test is required after all equipment is installed.

D. Requirements, Codes and Regulations

1. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of the NEC and all applicable local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be of new and current production by a MANUFACTURER who has 5 years of experience building this type of equipment.

E. Substitution

1. Proposed deviations from the specifications shall be treated as follows:

F. Substitution Responsibility

1. The emergency power system has been designed to the specified manufacturer's electrical and physical characteristics. The equipment sizing, spacing, amounts, electrical wiring, ventilation equipment, fuel and exhaust components have all been sized and designed around Cummins Power System supplied equipment. Should any substitutions be made, the CONTRACTOR shall bear responsibility for the installation, coordination and operation of the system as well as any engineering and redesign costs which may result from such substitutions.



G. Submittals

1. Engine-generator submittals shall include the following information: a. Factory published specification sheet indicating standard and optional accessories, ratings, etc.

b. Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets of all auxiliary components such as isolators, battery charger, silencer, exhaust flex, main circuit breaker, etc. c. Dimensional elevation and layout drawings of the generator set, and transfer switchgear and related accessories. d. Weights of all equipment. e. Concrete pad recommendation, layout and stub-up locations of electrical and fuel systems. f. Interconnect wiring diagram of complete emergency system, including generator, switchgear, battery charger, remote alarm indications.

H. Engine mechanical data at varying loads up to full load, including heat rejection, exhaust gas flows, combustion air and ventilation air flows, noise data, fuel consumption, etc.

I. Generator electrical data including temperature and insulation data, cooling requirements,

excitation ratings, voltage regulation, voltage regulator, efficiencies, waveform distortion and telephone influence factor.

J. Generator resistances, reactances and time constants. K. Generator current decrement curve. L. Generator motor starting capability. M. Generator thermal damage curve. N. Jacket water heater connection diagram. O. Control panel schematics. P. Automatic load transfer switch(es). Q. Oil sampling analysis, laboratory location, and information. R. Manufacturer's and dealer's written warranty. S. Emissions data

T. Factory Prototype Testing

1. The system manufacturer must certify that engine, generator, controls, and switchgear

have been tested as complete system of representative engineering models (not on equipment sold).



2. Prototype testing shall include: a. Fuel consumption at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load Exhaust emissions b. Mechanical and exhaust noise c. Governor speed regulation at 1/4, 1/2, 3/4, and full load; and during transients d. Motor starting kVA e. Generator temperature rise in accordance with NEMA MG1-22.40

U. Harmonic analysis, voltage waveform deviation and telephone influence factor V. Generator short circuit capability W. Cooling system performance X. Generator revolving field assembly for 2 hours at 2700 rpm (150% overspeed) and 70C, and

each production unit tested at 2250 rpm (125% overspeed) at room temperature. Y. The manufacturer shall supply equipment that is a current factory production model. Z. System Responsibility

1. Generator Set Manufacturer a. To qualify as a MANUFACTURER, the engine must be the principal item

manufactured and the completed engine generator set shall be supplied by that MANUFACTURER's authorized distributor only. 2. Requirements, Codes and Regulations

a. The equipment supplied and installed shall meet the requirements of NEC and all applicable local codes and regulations. All equipment shall be new, of current production. There shall be one source responsibility for warranty, parts and service through a local representative with factory trained service personnel. 3. Authorized Distributor

a. The equipment supplier shall be the local authorized distributor for the product

supplied.

AA. Automatic Transfer Switch

1. The automatic transfer switch specified in this section shall be supplied by the engine- generator manufacturer in order to establish and maintain a single source of system responsibility and coordination.

BB. Warranty

1. Five Year Basic Power Warranty

a. The manufacturer's standard warranty shall in no event be for a period of less



than five (5) years from date of initial start-up of the system and shall include repair parts, labor, reasonable travel expense necessary for repairs at the job site, and expendables (lubricating oil, filters, antifreeze, and other service items made unusable by the defect) used during the course of repair. Running hours shall not be a limiting factor for the system warranty by either the manufacturer or servicing distributor. Submittals received without written warranties as specified will be rejected in their entirety.

CC. Parts and Service Qualifications

1. Service Facility

a. The engine-generator supplier shall have service facilities within 50 miles of the project site and maintain 24-hour parts and service capability. The distributor shall stock parts as needed to support the generator set package for this specific project.

2. Service Personnel a. The dealer shall maintain qualified, factory trained service personnel that can

respond to an emergency call within 4 hours of notification. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 General Requirements

A. Genset Requirements

1. The generator set shall be Standby rated at 300kw, 0.8 power factor, 277/480 VAC, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hertz, including radiator fan and all parasitic loads. Altitude shall be 3750 ft., ambient temperature shall be 110°F. Cummins Model or approved equal with battery charger industrial grade exhaust silencer. Provide spring isolators, remote annunciators and weather proof enclosure.

2.2 Material And Parts

A. All materials and parts comprising the unit shall be new and unused. B. Diesel Fueled Engine

1. Engine Requirements

a. The engine shall be as manufactured by Cummings Power System or approved equal. A heavy-duty 4-cycle spar-ignited engine. The engine shall be water-cooled inline, four cycle compression, minimum 6 cylinders. Two cycle engines will not be considered. The engine shall be equipped with lube oil, and intake air filters, lube oil cooler, fuel ignition spark system, fuel / air mix device, service meter, gear-driven water pump.



C. Governor

1. Governor - Isochronous

a. The governor shall be electronic. It shall maintain +/- 0.25% regulation from no load full rated load. Steady state speed regulation shall be +/- 0.33%. The governor shall be equipped with a speed adjust potentiometer on the main Generator set control panel with positive locking to allow manual speed adjustment.

D. Block Design

1. The complete engine block shall be machined from one casting. Designs incorporating multiple blocks bolted together are not acceptable.

E. Lubrication System

1. The engine shall utilize a gear-type, positive displacement, full pressure lubricating oil pump and water-cooled lube oil cooler. Pistons shall be spray-cooled. Provide oil filters, oil pressure gauge, dipstick and oil drain.

F. Fuel System

1. Serviceable fuel system components shall be located on the engine body itself.

2.3 Generator A. Generator Specifications

1. The synchronous generator shall be a single bearing, self-ventilated, drip-proof design in accordance with NEMA MG 1 and directly connected to the engine flywheel housing with a flex coupling.

2.4 Insulation

A. The insulation material shall meet NEMA standards for Class H insulation and be vacuum

impregnated with epoxy varnish to be fungus resistant. Temperature rise of the rotor and stator shall not exceed NEMA class F (130 ºC rise by resistance over 40 C ambient) . The excitation system shall be of brushless construction.

2.5 Exciter

A. Self-Excited

1. The self excited, brushless exciter shall consist of a three-phase armature and a three- phase full wave bridge rectifier mounted on the rotor shaft. Surge suppressors shall be included to protect the diodes from voltage spikes.

2.6 Voltage Regulator



A. Automatic Voltage Regulator

1. The automatic voltage regulator (AVR) shall maintain generator output voltage within +/- 1.0% for any constant load between no load and full load. The regulator shall be a totally solid state design which includes electronic voltage buildup, volts per Hertz regulation, overexcitation protection, loss of sensing protection, temperature compensation, shall limit voltage overshoot on startup, and shall be environmentally sealed.

2.7 Circuit Breaker

A. Circuit Breaker Specifications

1. Provide a generator mounted circuit breaker, molded case or insulated case construction, 400 amp trip, 3 pole, NEMA 1P22. Breaker shall be ABB / Merlin Gerin or equal and utilize a thermal magnetic trip unit and DC shunt trip. The breaker shall be UL listed with shunt trip device connected to engine/generator safety shutdowns. Breaker shall be housed in a steel NEMA 3R terminal box mounted on a separate support stand vibration isolated from the engine / generator arrangement.. Mechanical type compression lugs, sized for the cable type shown on drawing, shall be supplied on the load side of breaker.

2.8 Control Panel

A. Generator Mounted Control Panel

1. Provide a generator set mounted control panel for complete control and monitoring of the engine and generator set functions. Panel shall include automatic start/stop operation, adjustable cycle cranking, digital AC metering (0.5% true rms accuracy) with phase selector switch, digital engine monitoring, shutdown sensors and alarms with horn and reset, adjustable cooldown timer and emergency stop push-button. Panel shall incorporate self-diagnostics capabilities and fault logging. Critical components shall be environmentally sealed to protect against failure from moisture and dirt. Components shall be housed in a NEMA 1/IP22 enclosure with hinged lid. The panel itself shall be mounted on a separate support stand isolated from the engine / generator arrangement. Panel / breaker arrangements mounted on the generator set in such a way that access to the AC Generator terminal box is restricted in any way whatsoever are not acceptable.

B. Digital Readouts

1. Provide the following digital readouts:

a. Engine oil pressure b. Coolant temperature c. Engine RPM d. System DC Volts e. Engine running hours g. Start attempt counter h. Generator AC volts i. Generator frequency j. Generator AC amps



k. Generator set kW output l. Generator set kVA m. Generator set kVAr n. Generator Power Factor

C. Alarm Nfpa 110

1. Provide the following indications for protection and diagnostics according to NFPA 110 level 1:

a. Low oil pressure b. High water temperature c. Low coolant level d. Overspeed e. Overcrank f. Emergency stop depressed g. Approaching high coolant temperature h. Approaching low oil pressure i. Low coolant temperature j. Low voltage in battery k. Control switch not in auto. position

D. Diesel pressure alarm

1. Battery charger ac failure 2. High battery voltage 3. Four (4) Spare

E. Control Functions/Interfaces 1. Provide the following control functions:

a. Terminals located inside the control panel for REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP b. ON / OFF / AUTO control switch c. Remote start delay d. Crank delay (programmable) e. Crank duration (programmable) f. Crank repeats (programmable) g. Remote stop delay (programmable)

2. Provide the following communication interfaces:

a. Common alarm dry contact b. Dry contact (form C) for individual alarms and shutdowns

F. Remote Annunciator NFPA 110 1. Provide a remote annunciator to meet the requirements of NFPA 110, Level 1. The



annunciator shall provide remote annunciation of all points stated above and shall incorporate ring-back capability so that after silencing the initial alarm, any subsequent alarms will sound the horn. Locate annunciator as shown on drawings. Verify location prior to rough-in.

G. Cooling System

1. Radiator

a. The generator set shall be equipped with a rail-mounted, engine-driven radiator with blower fan and all accessories. The cooling system shall be sized to operate at full load conditions and 110° F ambient air entering the enclosure (If an enclosure is specified) without derating the unit and 50/50 anti-freeze mixture. The generator set supplier is responsible for providing a properly sized cooling system based on the enclosure static pressure restriction.

H. Fuel Line Rating

1. Flexible fuel lines rated 300 degrees F and 100 PSI. I. Exhaust System 1. Silencer

a. Exhaust Silencer – An industrial grade type silencer, companion flanges, and flexible stainless steel exhaust fitting properly sized shall be furnished and installed according to the manufacturer's recommendation. Mounting shall be provided by the contractor as shown on the drawings. The silencer shall be mounted so that its weight is not supported by the engine nor will exhaust system growth due to thermal expansion be imposed on the engine. Exhaust pipe size shall be sufficient to ensure that exhaust back pressure does not exceed the maximum limitations specified by the engine manufacturer.

J. Exhaust System

1. Insulation - The muffler and all indoor exhaust piping shall be "lagged" by the contractor to maintain a surface temperature not to exceed 150F. The insulation shall be installed so that it does not interfere with the functioning of the flexible exhaust fitting.

K. Starting System

1. Starting Motor

a. Starting Motor - A DC electric starting system with positive engagement shall be furnished. The motor voltage shall be as recommended by the engine manufacturer.



L. Jacket Water Heater

1. Jacket Water Heater - A unit mounted thermal circulation type water heater. The heater Watt rating shall be sized by the manufacturer to maintain jacket water temperature at 90 degrees F, and shall be a 120 volt, single phase, 60 hertz.

M. Batteries

1. Batteries - A lead-acid storage battery set of the heavy duty generator starting type shall be provided. Battery voltage shall be compatible with the starting system. The battery set shall be rated no less than 75 ampere hours. Necessary cables and clamps shall be provided.

N. Battery Trays

1. Battery Trays - A battery tray shall be provided for the batteries and shall conform to NEC 480.7(b). It shall treated to be resistant to deterioration by battery electrolyte. Further, construction shall be such that any spillage or boil-over battery electrolyte shall be contained within the tray to prevent a direct path to ground.

O. Battery Charger

1. Battery Charger - A current limiting battery charger shall be furnish to automatically recharge batteries. Charger shall float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. It shall include overload protection, silicon diode full wave rectifiers, voltage surge suppressor, DC ammeter, DC voltmeter, and fused AC input. Ac input voltage shall be 120 volts, single phase. Charger shall be wall mounting type in NEMA 1 enclosure. Locate in generator housing.

P. WEATHER PROTECTIVE HOUSING

1. Provide a base weather protective housing. 2.9 Automatic Transfer Switch

A. The automatic transfer switch shall be 400 amps, 3 pole, 600 volt AC, fully rated enclosed

switch which complies to NEMA ICS2-447, NFPA 70, NFPA 110, and UL 1008. It shall have front access to all control panels and contacts. Main contact material shall consist of silver (87% min) and cadmium. Plexiglas covers shall shield electronic controls and main contact connections. Wiring shall be numbered for easy identification. The Break before Make transfer action shall require no more than 3 cycles, and the mechanism shall incorporate lifetime lubrication within a temperature range of -29 C to 60 C (-20 F to 140 F). It shall incorporate solid state programmable logic, be assembled and tested, and include:

1 - Sheet steel NEMA 1 enclosure with hinged, gasketed, key lockable door. 1 - Operating transfer switch consisting of single solenoid, electrically operated,

mechanically held 1 - Solderless connectors for normal source cables, emergency source cables, load cable,

and solid neutral bar. 1 - No load manual transfer



1 - High fault withstanding capacity 1 - Voltage monitoring of each phase of normal source (full protection), adjustable 70 to

90 percent 1 - Voltage of emergency at transfer, 70 to 90 percent (factory set 90 percent) 1 - Frequency of emergency at transfer, 70 to 90 percent (factory set 90 percent) 1 - Voltage and frequency monitoring of one phase of emergency source. 1 - Time delay, engine starting, adjustable 0.1 to 10 seconds, set at 3 seconds. 1 - Engine minimum run ( 5 to 30 minutes) (factory set 20 minutes) 1 - Engine cool down timer (1 to 30 minutes ) factory set 10 minutes) 1 - Engine warm-up (5 seconds to 3 minutes), with override switch (factory set 5

seconds) 1 - Time delay, normal to emergency (0.1 to 10 seconds adjustable) 1 - Time delay, emergency to normal (1 to 30 minutes (factory set 5 minutes) 1 - Three position mode selector switch in the face of the enclosure, marked auto, test. 1 - Self check built-in (at start-up, routine check of ATS circuits, LEDs shall flash to

confirm integrity. 1 - Exerciser ( 7 days from initial command) 1 - Transfer when exercising (on/off switch) 2 - Pilot lights in face of enclosure indicating source to which the ATS is connected. 1 - Auxiliary C-form contacts for normal and emergency 1 - Neutral lug. 1 - Internal cabling, terminal boards, fuses, fuse blocks, nameplates, and miscellaneous

hardware as needed. 1 - Software consisting of: dimensional drawing, layout drawing, electrical schematic, and

parts list. 1 - Cover mounted digital readout Generator frequency 1 - Cover mounted digital readout Generator A/C volts with phase/neutral/off selector

switch 1 - Cover mounted digital readout load A/C amps with phase/neutral/off selector switch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 Installation

A. Installation Requirements

1. Install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, the project

2. Drawings and specifications, and all applicable codes. B. Start-Up And Testing

1. Coordinate all start-up and testing activities with the Engineer and Owner. 2. After installation is complete and normal power is available, the manufacturer's local

dealer shall perform the following: 3. Verify that the equipment is installed properly. 4. Check all auxiliary devices for proper operation, including battery charger, jacket



water heater(s), generator space heater, remote annunciator, etc. 5. Test all alarms and safety shutdown devices for proper operation and annunciation. 6. Check all fluid levels.

7. Start engine and check for exhaust, oil, fuel leaks, vibrations, etc. 8. Verify proper voltage and phase rotation at the transfer switch before connecting to

the load. 9. Connect the generator to building load and verify that the generator will start and run

all designated loads in the plant. 10. Perform a 4 hour load bank test at .80 power factor at full nameplate load using a

reactive load bank and cables supplied by the local generator dealer. Observe and record the following data at 15 minute intervals:

a. Service meter hours b. Volts AC - All phases c. Amps AC - All phases d. Frequency e. Power factor or Vars f. Jacket water temperature g. Oil Pressure h. Fuel pressure i. Ambient temperature

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Manuals Provided

a. Provide four (4) sets of operation and maintenance manuals covering the generator, switchgear, and auxiliary components. Include parts manuals, final as-built wiring interconnect diagrams and recommended preventative maintenance schedules.

D. Training

1. On-Site Training

a. Provide one day of on-site training to instruct the owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment. Review operation and maintenance manuals, parts manuals, and emergency service procedures.

E. Scheduled Oil Sampling

1. In order to forecast and minimize engine failure, the supplier of the equipment must

provide an oil sampling analysis kit which operating personnel shall utilize for scheduled oil sampling.



2. The laboratory to which oil samples will be sent shall be located at and be a part of the

local generator set supplier's facility, and shall be open to inspection during normal working hours. Independent laboratories not a part of the engine supplier's facility are disallowed as to conformance with this specification.

3. Scheduled oil sampling shall be of the atomic absorption spectrophotometer method

as opposed to the spectrographic analysis method and shall be accurate to within a fraction of one part per million for the following elements:

a. Iron b. Chromium c. Copper d. Aluminum e. Silicon f. Lead

4. In addition, the sample shall be tested for the presence of water, fuel dilution, and

anti-freeze

5. All equipment needed to take oil samples shall be provided a kit at the time of acceptance and shall include the following:

a. Sample extraction gun (1) b. Bottle (10) c . Postage paid mailers (10) d. Written instructions (1) e. Metal storage box (1)

6. IMMEDIATE notification shall be provided to the owner when analysis shows any

critical reading. If readings are normal a report showing that the equipment is operating within established parameters shall be provided.

7. This scheduled oil sampling kit shall be made available, at additional cost, to the

owner beyond the mandatory starter kit specified previously and shall be optional for the owner to continue purchasing after the starter kit has been depleted.



TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION 26 3553-1

SECTION 26 3553 - TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. This section is a Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division 26

section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified herein. 1.2 DESCRIPTION

A. All specified units shall be integrally mounted in switchboard or panelboards. B. The specified unit shall provide effective high energy transient voltage suppression, surge current

diversion, high frequency attenuation and line control for all electrical modes of equipment connected downstream from the facility's meter or main overcurrent device in the afore mentioned ANSI/IEEE C62. 41-1991 environment(s). The unit shall be connected in parallel with the facility's wiring system.


A. Storage Temperature. Storage temperature range shall be -40 to +85 C" (-40 to +185F). B. Operating Temperature. Operating temperature range shall be -40 to +140F). C. Relative Humidity. Operation shall be reliable in an environment with 5% to 95% non-

condensing relative humidity. D. Operating Altitude. The unit shall be capable of operation in altitudes up to 5,000 feet above sea

level. E. Audible Noise. The unit shall not generate any audible noise. F. Magnetic Fields. No appreciable magnetic fields shall be generated. Unit shall be capable of use

directly in computer rooms in any location without danger to data storage systems or devices.

1.4 RELATED DOCUMENTS AND APPLICABLE STANDARDS

A. Systems shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in accordance with the following standards:

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449) 2. Canadian Standard Association(CSA)



3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association 4. American National Standards Institute 5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Architects (C62.41 and C62.45) 6. Military Standards (MIL-STD 220A) 7. National Electric Code (Article 280) 8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-78) 9. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication (FIPS PUB 94)

B. System shall be tested to meet ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991, tested per ANSI/IEEE C62.45-1992. C. The system shall be tested to 1,000 sequential ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category C waveforms.

D The system shall be tested to MIL-STD 220A for electrical line noise attenuation per 50 ohm

insertion loss measurement method of RF Frequencies up to 100 MHz.

1.5 WORK INCLUDED

A. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS) System. 1.6 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Panelboards


A. Product Data: Provide shop drawings for all devices utilized. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for (5) years from date of installation. Warranty shall cover unlimited replacement of system components during the warranty period.


A. Those equipment manufacturers responding to this specification shall provide proof that they have been regularly engaged in the design and manufacturing of TVSS for at least 5 years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 UNIT OPERATING VOLTAGE

A. The nominal unit operating voltage and configuration shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2.2 MAXIMUM CONTINUOUS OPERATING VOLTAGE (MCOV)

A. The maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) of all suppression components utilized in the unit shall not be less than 115% of the facility's nominal operating voltage.

2.3 SERVICE ENTRANCE PANELS OR SWITCHBOARD



A. Unit shall be rated Category C3 location per ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991 integrally mounted. B. The tested single-pulse surge current capacity, in amps, of the unit, based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41-

1991's standard 8 x 20 microsecond current waveform, and in accordance with NEMA Publication No. LS 1-1992, shall be no less than as follows:

Mode of Protection L-L L-N L-G N-G Tested Single Pulse Surge Current 150,000 150,000 100,000 100,000

C. Unit shall have indicator status lights for the TVSS device, verifying proper operation. D. The unit's published performance ratings shall be the UL 1449 Listed suppression ratings. The

UL 1449 suppression rating shall be, for each mode of protection, as follows:

Nominal System Voltage L-N L-G N-G 120/208 400/500 400/500 400 277/480 800/1000 800/1000 800 347/600 1000/1200 1000/1200 1000

E. Note: Numbers following slash indicate UL 1449 suppression rating for models with I Integral

fused disconnect switch. F. The unit shall include a high-frequency extended range tracking filter and shall be UL 1283

Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter. G. The unit shall include mechanical lugs for each phase, neutral and ground, if applicable. The lugs

shall accommodate up to #2 AWG copper conductor with integral fused disconnect switch and up to 1/0 AWG copper conductor without integral fused disconnect switch.

H. Units shall be provided in a NEMA 1 type enclosure of 14 gauge steel. Dimensions shall not be

greater than 22" wide by 38" high by 12" deep. Weight shall not exceed 100 lbs. (max). 2.4 INTEGRAL FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH

A. The unit shall include an integral fused and safety interlocked disconnect switch located in the unit enclosure with an externally mounted manual operator. The switch shall be rated for 600 Vac and fuses shall be 200 KAIC.

2.5 TEST SET

A. The unit shall be provided with a Diagnostic Test Set which test the operational integrity of the unit's suppression system. The Diagnostic Test Set shall be self-contained and portable and shall provide complete assurance of the unit's installation and capability without stressing the suppression system or posing detriment to continued operation. CAT # DTS-2 or equal. This test set shall work with all TVSS provided on the job.



B. Acceptable manufacturers are Current Technology or equal,

2.6 PANELBOARDS

A. Panel “C2” which is fed by a K-factor transformers shall have integral mounted TVSS. B. Unit shall be rated Category B3 location per ANSI/IEEE C62.41-1991. C. The tested single-pulse surge current capacity, in amps, of the unit, based on ANSI/IEEE C62.41-

1991's standard 8 x 20 microsecond current waveform, and in accordance with NEMA Publication No. LS 1-1992, shall be no less than as follows:

Mode of Protection L-L L-N L-G N-G

Tested Single Pulse Surge Current 100,000 100,000 100,000 100,000

D. Unit shall have indicator status lights for the TVSS device, verifying proper operation. E. The unit's published performance ratings shall be the UL 1449 Listed suppression ratings. The

UL 1449 suppression rating shall be, for each mode of protection, as follows:

Nominal System Voltage L-N L-G N-G 120/208 400/500 400/500 400 277/480 800/1000 800/1000 800 347/600 1000/1200 1000/1200 1000

Note: Numbers following slash indicate UL 1449 suppression rating for models with integral fused disconnect switch.

F. The unit shall include a high-frequency extended range tracking filter and shall be UL 1283

Listed as an Electromagnetic Interference Filter. G. The unit shall include mechanical lugs for each phase, neutral and ground, if applicable. The lugs

shall accommodate up to #8 AWG copper conductor with integral fused disconnect switch and up to 1/0 AWG copper conductor without integral fused disconnect switch.

H. Units shall be provided in a NEMA 1 type enclosure of 14 gauge steel. Dimensions shall not be

greater than 13" wide by 24" high by 8" deep. Weight shall not exceed 40 lbs. (max).

2.7 INTEGRAL FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH

A. The unit shall include an integral fused and safety interlocked disconnect switch located in the unit enclosure with an externally mounted manual operator. The switch shall be rated for 600 Vac and fuses shall be 200 KAIC.




A. The specified system shall be installed no further than twelve (12) inches in total wire lead length distance from the service entrance bus, distribution panelboard bus or variable frequency drive it is protecting and shall avoid any unnecessary bends. Insulated conductors shall be provided for all necessary power and ground connections.

B. The specified system shall be installed integral to the switchboard or panelboard as specified. C. System shall be complete, including status indicator lights providing independent protection

circuit status. D. Other materials and equipment shall comply with applicable Sections of this Division.



INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 5100 - 1

SECTION 26 5100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General Conditions, Supplementary

Conditions, and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section. B. Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Extent, location, and details of interior lighting fixture work are indicated on drawings and in

schedules. B. Types of interior lighting fixtures in this section include the following:

1. Fluorescent 2. Emergency Light units

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions on each type interior

building lighting fixture and component. B. Shop Drawings: Submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture,

assembled in "luminaire type" alphabetical or numerical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid system. Submit literature on all lamp types to be used on this project.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of interior lighting fixtures

of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Provide products as listed on Fixture Schedule of same quality and function. Substitution

requirements are noted in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Codes and Standards:

1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220, 410, and 510 as applicable to installation, and construction of interior building lighting fixtures. 2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA stds. Pub



Nos. LE-1 and LE-2 pertaining to lighting equipment. 3. IES Compliance: Comply with IES RP-1 pertaining to office lighting practices and

RP-15, regarding selection of illuminance values for interior office lighting. 4. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards, including UL 486A and B, pertaining

to interior lighting fixtures. Provide interior lighting fixtures and components which are UL-listed and labeled.

5. CBM Labels: Provide fluorescent lamp ballasts which comply with Certified Ballast

Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver interior lighting fixtures in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage.

B. Store interior lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area protected from

weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground. C. Handle interior lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of finishes. Do

not install damaged units or components; replace with new.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to

properly interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other work. B. Sequence interior lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage and soiling

during remainder of construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES:

A. General: Provide the new lighting fixtures of the sizes, types, and ratings indicated; complete with,

but not necessarily limited to, housings, energy efficient lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship fixtures factory-assembled, with those components required for a complete installation. Design fixtures with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise. If a type designation is omitted, the fixture shall be of the same type as is shown for rooms of similar usage. Verify before purchase and installation.

B. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within fixture suitable for connecting to branch circuit wiring as

follows: 1. NEC Type AF for 120/277 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG.



C. Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Shall be electronic type and shall be usable with 32 watt 4 ft. T8 (85o CRI) lamps so that the ballast/lamp system shall be capable of providing 3100 average initial lumens for two lamps @ 62 watts maximum of system input. Ballast performance with such lamps shall be certified as full output by CBM and UL approved. The ballast case temperature shall not exceed 25 degrees C. Ballast shall be UL listed, Class P, Premium, with "A" sound rating. All above mentioned shall apply unless noted differently on the electrical sheets. Electrical sheets shall supersede criteria set forth above.

D. Ballast manufacturers are as noted on the fixture schedule.

E. Lamps: Lamp types shall be as noted on fixture schedule.

F. Fluorescent lamps shall T8 lamps matched for usage to electronic ballast. The ballast/lamp system

shall be capable of providing 6000 average initial lumens for two lamps with 62 watts system input. Lamps shall be “ALTO” low mercury as noted on fixture schedule, or equal.

G. Manufacturers: General Electric, Sylvania, Philips, or equal. H. Lensed Lighting Fixtures: Recessed or surface lensed fluorescent fixtures shall be equal to or better

than those specified for intended use on this project. Fixtures shall have full socket tracks, semi-rigid door frames, functional hinges and latches, light leaktight construction without the use of gaskets, semi-rattle free lens retention, and conduit connection access plates. Standard lens shall be 12 pattern, 5/32" female prism nominal, .125 inch thickness. The lens or diffusers of lighting fixtures shall be as indicated on the plans. Acrylic lens or diffusers shall be extruded of 100% virgin clear acrylic meeting American Society for Testing Materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM C-788-63).

I. Fire Rated Ceiling Assemblies: Provide recessed fluorescent light fixtures to be installed in fire rated ceilings with a "fire rated" label and acoustical material/mineral and fiberboard protection as a part of the fire rated ceiling assembly. The type and configuration of the fixture protection shall comply with requirements of the UL Fire Resistance Directory for floor-ceiling and/or roof-ceiling designs. See drawings for specific requirements.

J. Emergency Lighting Units: See drawings for emergency lighting requirements.

1. Comply with additional fixture requirements contained in Fixture Schedule.

K. PHOTOCELL: To be Intermatic K1121 or Tork 2101. Mount on roof on a cast outlet box. L. LIGHTING RELAY OR CONTACTORS: For control of lighting circuits provide lighting

contactors with poles and amp rating required or indicated. Contactor to be mechanically held. Relay to be Square D Class 8903, type S, or equal. Provide enclosure suitable for the area in which the relay is to be installed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION



A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed, and substrate for

supporting lighting fixtures. Notify Architect in writing, of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected to an acceptable condition.

B. Provide fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture weight.

Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified herein, for review by Architect.

C. Install flush mounted fixtures properly to eliminate light leakage between fixture frame and

finished surface. D. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical

ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling. E. Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural supports; and ensure that pendant fixtures are

plumb and level. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures longer than 2 feet with twin stem hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and provisions for minimum one-inch vertical adjustment. Provide 3/16 inch diameter rods minimum. Canopies shall be in contact with ceiling.

F. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment

manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Stds 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA Standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.

B. Installation of interior lighting fixture type “K” in restrooms will follow attached installation guide for hard ceiling. The fixtures housing must be installed prior to the ceiling installation. C. Quiet Operation: All lighting fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all sections of the channel structure shall be securely held in position. Fixtures shall be mounted in such a way that ballast hum will not be amplified or transmitted into occupied areas. D. Coordinate with other electrical work as appropriate to properly interface installation of interior

lighting fixtures with other work. Fixtures shall be located in coordination with the ceiling patterns where these ceilings exist, and as approved by the Architect.

E. Installed device plates flush with all edges in contact with the wall surfaces. Alignment tolerance

to be one-sixteenth (1/16") inch.



F. Support surface mounted fixtures greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to the outlet

box fixture stud. G. Support ceiling fixtures by anchorage to the ceiling only where the ceiling is concrete or masonry

units. For ceilings of other construction, anchor ceiling fixtures to metal supports provided for that purpose, of suitable strength and stability, adequately attached to and supported by joists, trusses or other structural members. Provide detailed information for support methods of fixtures either suspended or wall mounted if fixture weight exceeds 20 lbs.

H. RECESSED FIXTURE SUPPORT: Fixture installation shall not cause any sagging of the ceiling

channels. Connect fixtures with 6’-0” maximum of flexible conduit. Lighting fixtures shall be secured to lay-in acoustical grid with the fixture grid tabs. Installation shall comply with NEC Article 410.16C.

I. Low Density Ceiling: Special attention is directed to the code restrictions against mounting

fluorescent lighting fixtures on combustible low density cellulose fiberboard. J. Ceiling Trim and Means of Support: The ceiling trim and means of support of recessed lighting

fixtures shall be properly installed for the type of the ceiling used on the project. K. Provide 3/16 inch diameter rods minimum. Canopies shall be in contact with ceiling. L. Lamp Guards: Provide safety guard clips or spring loaded lampholders on open type fluorescent

lighting fixtures to prevent lamps from falling. M. Ceiling Trim: Furnish proper ceiling frames. Rims of all lighting fixtures that overlap ceilings

shall be installed tight and snug against the ceiling surfaces so no light leakage occurs around the rim. If unevenness of surface or fixture causes light leak, then contractor shall provide soft sponge gasket to seal light leak.

N. TIME SWITCHES AND RELAY CONTACTORS and similar equipment to be installed on wall

surface utilizing screws or toggle bolts to assure adequate support. All devices shall be labeled with engraved plates attached with sheet metal screws. Embossed tape is not acceptable. All incoming wiring to be labeled to identify circuit number and use. Control (for photocells, etc.) to be identified also.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Incandescent lamps shall be new at time of final inspection. Fluorescent lamps may be used for

the final finishing of the building. However, those that have blackened ends, defective or have expended more than 1/3 of their rated life (as determined by the construction inspector's records), shall be replaced with new lamps just prior to final inspection.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean-up: At final inspection all lighting fixtures and lighting equipment shall be in first class

operating order, in perfect condition as to finish and free from defects, completely lamped, clean



and free from dust, fingerprints, smudges, plaster or paint spots and complete with the required glassware, reflectors, side panels, louvers or other components necessary to complete the lighting fixtures.

B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. 3.5 GROUNDING A. Provide equipment grounding connections for interior lighting fixtures as indicated. Tighten

connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been

energized; apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. When possible, correct malfunctioning units at the site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.



LIGHTING CONTROLS 26 5400 - 1

SECTION 26 5400 - LIGHTING CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following lighting controls: 1. The lighting control system is indicated by the drawings and by the requirements of this

section. It is defined to include: a. Wiring devices such as daylight harvesting sensors, occupancy sensors, and

vacancy Switches. Dual level power room controllers will be utilized to interconnect the devices.

2. System installation includes the following:

a. Wiring of main and branch circuit conductors. b. Installation of external control devices and wiring to the remote controllers per

room. c. Installation of communications conductors and associated hardware. d. Training of Owner’s personnel in the configuration and use of the system for

normal operating purposes.

B. Related sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section "Lighting Control Devices" for timed switches, photoelectric

switches, occupancy sensors, and multi-pole contactors.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Detail assemblies of standard components, custom assembled for specific application on this Project. 1. Outline Drawings: Indicate dimensions, information packages, arrangement of

components, and clearance and access requirements for devices. 2. Block Diagram: Show interconnections between components specified in this Section

and devices furnished with power distribution system components. Indicate data communication paths and identify networks, data buses, data gateways, concentrators, and other devices to be used. Describe characteristics of network and other data communication lines.



3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Coordinate nomenclature and presentation with a block diagram.

C. Coordination Drawings: Submit evidence that lighting controls are compatible with connected Ethernet system. 1. Show interconnecting signal and control wiring and interfacing devices that prove

compatibility of inputs and outputs. 2. For networked controls, list network protocols and provide statements from

manufacturers that input and output devices meet interoperability requirements of the network protocol.

D. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: 1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software And System Configuration Backup provided electronically, complete

with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

E. Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software and firmware to upgrade and to allow system expansion. Must include full technical information on all installed devices.

F. Field quality-control test reports.

G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting controls to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control module and power distribution components through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with 47 CFR, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.

D. Comply with NFPA 70.

1. Manufacturer shall be engaged in the manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of the types indicated, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three years. Design is based on Watt Stopper Digital Lighting Management.



E. Component Testing: All electronic component board assemblies are to be factory tested and burned in prior to installation.

F. System Support: Factory fax/telephone/email support shall be available free of charge during normal business hours for the duration of the warranty period.

G. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical equipment.

H. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of the NEC including Articles 110-10 and 725.

I. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards for energy management equipment.

J. FCC Emissions: All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions Standards specified in Part 15, Subpart J for Class A applications.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate lighting control components to form an integrated interconnection of compatible components.

1. Match components and interconnections for optimum performance of lighting control

functions.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of lighting controls equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Software: Failure of input/output to execute switching or dimming commands. b. Failure of modular relays to operate under manual or software commands. c. Damage of electronic components due to transient voltage surges.

2. Warranty Period: Cost to repair or replace malfunctioning parts for two years from date

of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. Each label must also be clearly stated.

1. Photoelectric devices and sensor components: Equal to 10 percent of amount installed. Must be delivered to and receipted by the Owner.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Watt Stopper Digital Lighting Management.

2.2 FUNCTIONAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Material and Components: 1. The lighting control system shall consist of microprocessor-based control electronics with

integral room controller packs for power. 2. All lighting control components shall be installed as per plan (as noted on drawings).

Suitable barriers shall be installed to separate Class 2 wiring from power conductors.

2.3 MANUAL SWITCHES AND PLATES

A. Switches: Modular, momentary push-button, low-voltage type. 1. Color: Ivory with stainless steel cover plates, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Lighting override switches shall be conspicuously labeled as “Lighting Override” and

also display in an inconspicuous but clearly visible fashion the unique identifier of the switch as it appears on the construction drawings.

2.4 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Power Wiring to Supply Side of Class 2 Power Source: Not smaller than No. 12 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 22 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

C. Class 1 Control Cable: Multiconductor cable with copper conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG, complying with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

D. Digital and Multiplexed Signal Wire: Shielded, twisted-pair cable complying with Division 26 Section "Voice and Data Communication Cabling."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceways. Comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch (13 mm).



B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Install field-mounting transient voltage suppressors for lighting control devices in Category A locations that do not have integral line-voltage surge protection.

D. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in terminal cabinets, equipment enclosures, and in junction, pull, and outlet boxes.

F. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify components and power and control wiring according to Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."


A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and assist in field-testing. Report results developed and provided by factory-authorized service representative in writing.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Test for circuit continuity.

2. Verify that the control module features are operational. 3. Check operation of local override controls. 4. Test system diagnostics by simulating improper operation of several components selected

by the Owner.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in reviewing Owner’s lighting panel operating configuration changes and in adjusting occupancy sensors to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site outside normal occupancy hours for this purpose.



3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to configure, adjust, operate, and maintain lighting controls. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."

END OF SECTION 26 54 00


COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 27 0000 - 1

SECTION 27 0000 - COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. This specification section covers the installation requirements for the conduit system to install the voice, data and video wiring only. All other conduit required for power wiring, controls wiring, special system wiring, etc. shall conform to Section Division 26 specifications. The Communication System may consist of fiber optic, coaxial and copper wiring. The systems may include but are not limited to the following:

Conduit system for voice system cabling.

Conduit system for data system cabling.

Conduit system for (surveillance system) cabling.

B. A complete conduit pathway is not a requirement of this project. A backbone raceway system is

required. Provide underground conduits as shown, conduits stubbed out of the MDF or IDF rooms and conduit stub-ups out of wall and floor data outlets.


A. Section 26 05 33 - Raceways. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. EIA/TIA-568 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard. B. EIA/TIA-569 - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunication Pathways and Spaces. All

conduit installations shall comply with EIA/TIA – 568 and 569. C. EIA/TIA-TSB72 - Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.


A. Contractor shall furnish and install all communication system conduits, junction boxes and sleeves in locations as shown on the drawings and herein specified.

B. Contractor shall install 5, CAT 5e, coaxial and fiber optic cable.


A. Record actual locations and sizes of pathways and outlets. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS



A. Conform to requirements of EIA/TIA and NFPA 70. B. Furnish Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for purpose

specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL

A. Junction boxes for communications drops shall be a minimum 4” deep square pressed galvanized steel. Flush mount all junction boxes and plaster rings within walls.

B. Plaster rings shall be one gang, 5/8”, or as necessary. C. All conduit shall be EMT with long sweep elbows. D. All cables, except as noted, will be installed by the Contractor. Cable will be furnished by the

Owner.

2.2 COMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY REQUIREMENTS FOR VOICE, DATA AND VIDEO DROPS:

A. Install the number of cable drops as listed on the drawings. B. These cables will be run and dropped as directed by the drawings in the pathways shown. C. Installation of cables through ceiling cavities without conduit pathways shown shall be by

installation of “J hooks.” Cables shall be neatly bundled. Spacing of “J hooks” shall not exceed 4’ or as required by EIA/TIA 568.569. Portions of story 3 ceiling cavity is a return air plenum and requires plenum cables. All other areas the ceiling cavity is not plenum return.

2.3 Floor Boxes:

A. Provide Carlon or Equal rectangular PVC box. Box shall be CAT # E976RFB. Provide data plate insert.


A. Conduit installation shall conform to the minimum requirements of EIA/TIA 568 and 569. Contractor shall provide all conduits, boxes, etc. as required to properly install all Structured Cabling System wiring.

B. Contractor shall carefully and neatly install owner’s cabling. Contractor shall leave cable for

make-up at both ends. Provide 15” at outlet and 12’-0” at HUB. C. Connections at HUB and owner provided devices at outlet boxes will be by the owner.




Date post:	04-Aug-2020
Category:	Documents
Upload:	others
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times